Yamaha RX-V630 Manual de usuario

Marca: Yamaha

Modelo: RX-V630

Categoría: Receptores AV

Tipo: Manual de usuario

OWNER’S MANUAL

RX-V630

AV Receiver

0100V630(U)-cv1 12/27/01, 7:45 PM1

I CAUTION

SAFETY INSTRUCTIONS

CAUTION: TO REDUCE THE RISK OF

ELECTRIC SHOCK, DO NOT REMOVE

COVER (OR BACK). NO USER-SERVICEABLE

PARTS INSIDE. REFER SERVICING TO

QUALIFIED SERVICE PERSONNEL.

• Explanation of Graphical Symbols

The lightning flash with arrowhead symbol,

within an equilateral triangle, is intended to alert

you to the presence of uninsulated “dangerous

voltage” within the product’s enclosure that may

be of sufficient magnitude to constitute a risk of

electric shock to persons.

The exclamation point within an equilateral

triangle is intended to alert you to the presence of

important operating and maintenance (servicing)

instructions in the literature accompanying the

appliance.

1 Read Instructions – All the safety and operating instructions

should be read before the product is operated.

2 Retain Instructions – The safety and operating instructions

should be retained for future reference.

3 Heed Warnings – All warnings on the product and in the

operating instructions should be adhered to.

4 Follow Instructions – All operating and use instructions

should be followed.

5 Cleaning – Unplug this product from the wall outlet before

cleaning. Do not use liquid cleaners or aerosol cleaners.

Use a damp cloth for cleaning.

6 Attachments – Do not use attachments not recommended

by the product manufacturer as they may cause hazards.

7 Water and Moisture – Do not use this product near water –

for example, near a bath tub, wash bowl, kitchen sink, or

laundry tub; in a wet basement; or near a swimming pool;

and the like.

8 Accessories – Do not place this product on an unstable cart,

stand, tripod, bracket, or table. The product may fall,

causing serious injury to a child or adult, and serious

damage to the product. Use only with a cart, stand, tripod,

bracket, or table recommended by the manufacturer, or sold

with the product. Any mounting of the product should

follow the manufacturer’s instructions, and should use a

mounting accessory recommended by the manufacturer.

9 A product and cart combination should be

moved with care. Quick stops, excessive

force, and uneven surfaces may cause the

product and cart combination to overturn.

10 Ventilation – Slots and openings in the cabinet are provided

for ventilation and to ensure reliable operation of the

product and to protect it from overheating, and these

openings must not be blocked or covered. The openings

should never be blocked by placing the product on a bed,

sofa, rug, or other similar surface. This product should not

be placed in a built-in installation such as a bookcase or

rack unless proper ventilation is provided or the

manufacturer’s instructions have been adhered to.

11 Power Sources – This product should be operated only from

the type of power source indicated on the marking label. If

you are not sure of the type of power supply to your home,

consult your product dealer or local power company. For

products intended to operate from battery power, or other

sources, refer to the operating instructions.

12 Grounding or Polarization – This product may be equipped

with a polarized alternating current line plug (a plug having

one blade wider than the other). This plug will fit into the

power outlet only one way. This is a safety feature. If you

are unable to insert the plug fully into the outlet, try

reversing the plug. If the plug should still fail to fit, contact

your electrician to replace your obsolete outlet. Do not

defeat the safety purpose of the polarized plug.

13 Power-Cord Protection – Power-supply cords should be

routed so that they are not likely to be walked on or pinched

by items placed upon or against them, paying particular

attention to cords at plugs, convenience receptacles, and the

point where they exit from the product.

14 Lightning – For added protection for this product during a

lightning storm, or when it is left unattended and unused for

long periods of time, unplug it from the wall outlet and

disconnect the antenna or cable system. This will prevent

damage to the product due to lightning and power-line

surges.

15 Power Lines – An outside antenna system should not be

located in the vicinity of overhead power lines or other

electric light or power circuits, or where it can fall into such

power lines or circuits. When installing an outside antenna

system, extreme care should be taken to keep from touching

such power lines or circuits as contact with them might be

fatal.

16 Overloading – Do not overload wall outlets, extension

cords, or integral convenience receptacles as this can result

in a risk of fire or electric shock.

17 Object and Liquid Entry – Never push objects of any kind

into this product through openings as they may touch

dangerous voltage points or short-out parts that could result

in a fire or electric shock. Never spill liquid of any kind on

the product.

18 Servicing – Do not attempt to service this product yourself

as opening or removing covers may expose you to

dangerous voltage or other hazards. Refer all servicing to

qualified service personnel.

19 Damage Requiring Service – Unplug this product from the

wall outlet and refer servicing to qualified service personnel

under the following conditions:

a) When the power-supply cord or plug is damaged,

b) If liquid has been spilled, or objects have fallen into

the product,

c) If the product has been exposed to rain or water,

WARNING

TO REDUCE THE RISK OF FIRE OR ELECTRIC SHOCK,

DO NOT EXPOSE THIS UNIT TO RAIN OR MOISTURE.

RISK OF ELECTRIC SHOCK

DO NOT OPEN

CAUTION

0101V630_Cau_EN(U) 12/27/01, 7:45 PM2

SAFETY INSTRUCTIONSSAFETY INSTRUCTIONS

CAUTION II

1. IMPORTANT NOTICE : DO NOT MODIFY THIS

UNIT!

This product, when installed as indicated in the

instructions contained in this manual, meets FCC

requirements. Modifications not expressly approved

by Yamaha may void your authority, granted by the

FCC, to use the product.

2. IMPORTANT : When connecting this product to

accessories and/or another product use only high

quality shielded cables. Cable/s supplied with this

product MUST be used. Follow all installation

instructions. Failure to follow instructions could void

your FCC authorization to use this product in the USA.

3. NOTE : This product has been tested and found to

comply with the requirements listed in FCC

Regulations, Part 15 for Class “B” digital devices.

Compliance with these requirements provides a

reasonable level of assurance that your use of this

product in a residential environment will not result in

harmful interference with other electronic devices.

This equipment generates/uses radio frequencies and,

if not installed and used according to the instructions

found in the users manual, may cause interference

harmful to the operation of other electronic devices.

Compliance with FCC regulations does not guarantee

that interference will not occur in all installations. If

this product is found to be the source of interference,

which can be determined by turning the unit “OFF” and

“ON”, please try to eliminate the problem by using one

of the following measures:

Relocate either this product or the device that is being

affected by the interference.

Utilize power outlets that are on different branch (circuit

breaker or fuse) circuits or install AC line filter/s.

In the case of radio or TV interference, relocate/reorient

the antenna. If the antenna lead-in is 300 ohm ribbon

lead, change the lead-in to coaxial type cable.

If these corrective measures do not produce satisfactory

results, please contact the local retailer authorized to

distribute this type of product. If you can not locate the

appropriate retailer, please contact Yamaha Electronics

Corp., U.S.A. 6660 Orangethorpe Ave, Buena Park, CA

90620.

The above statements apply ONLY to those products

distributed by Yamaha Corporation of America or its

subsidiaries.

EXAMPLE OF ANTENNA GROUNDING

MAST

GROUND

CLAMP

ANTENNA

LEAD IN

WIRE

ANTENNA

DISCHARGE UNIT

(NEC SECTION 810–20)

GROUNDING CONDUCTORS

(NEC SECTION 810–21)

GROUND CLAMPS

POWER SERVICE GROUNDING

ELECTRODE SYSTEM

(NEC ART 250. PART H)

ELECTRIC

SERVICE

EQUIPMENT

NEC

– NATIONAL ELECTRICAL CODE

FCC INFORMATION (for US customers only)

Note to CATV system installer:

This reminder is provided to call the CATV system

installer’s attention to Article 820-40 of the NEC that

provides guidelines for proper grounding and, in particular,

specifies that the cable ground shall be connected to the

grounding system of the building, as close to the point of

cable entry as practical.

d) If the product does not operate normally by following

the operating instructions. Adjust only those controls

that are covered by the operating instructions as an

improper adjustment of other controls may result in

damage and will often require extensive work by a

qualified technician to restore the product to its

normal operation,

e) If the product has been dropped or damaged in any

way, and

f) When the product exhibits a distinct change in

performance - this indicates a need for service.

20 Replacement Parts – When replacement parts are

required, be sure the service technician has used

replacement parts specified by the manufacturer or have

the same characteristics as the original part.

Unauthorized substitutions may result in fire, electric

shock, or other hazards.

21 Safety Check – Upon completion of any service or

repairs to this product, ask the service technician to

perform safety checks to determine that the product is in

proper operating condition.

22 Wall or Ceiling Mounting – The unit should be mounted

to a wall or ceiling only as recommended by the

manufacturer.

23 Heat – The product should be situated away from heat

sources such as radiators, heat registers, stoves, or other

products (including amplifiers) that produce heat.

24 Outdoor Antenna Grounding – If an outside antenna or

cable system is connected to the product, be sure the

antenna or cable system is grounded so as to provide some

protection against voltage surges and built-up static

charges. Article 810 of the National Electrical Code, ANSI/

NFPA 70, provides information with regard to proper

grounding of the mast and supporting structure, grounding

of the lead-in wire to an antenna discharge unit, size of

grounding conductors, location of antenna discharge unit,

connection to grounding electrodes, and requirements for

the grounding electrode.

0101V630_Cau_EN(U) 12/27/01, 7:45 PM3

1 To assure the finest performance, please read this

manual carefully. Keep it in a safe place for future

reference.

2 Install this unit in a well ventilated, cool, dry, clean

place with at least 30 cm on the top, 20 cm on the

left and right, and 10 cm at the back of this unit

— away from direct sunlight, heat sources,

vibration, dust, moisture, and/or cold.

3 Locate this unit away from other electrical

appliances, motors, or transformers to avoid

humming sounds. To prevent fire or electrical

shock, do not place this unit where it may get

exposed to rain, water, and/or any type of liquid.

4 Do not expose this unit to sudden temperature

changes from cold to hot, and do not locate this

unit in a environment with high humidity (i.e. a

room with a humidifier) to prevent condensation

inside this unit, which may cause an electrical

shock, fire, damage to this unit, and/or personal

injury.

5 On the top of this unit, do not place:

– Other components, as they may cause damage

and/or discoloration on the surface of this unit.

– Burning objects (i.e. candles), as they may

cause fire, damage to this unit, and/or personal

injury.

– Containers with liquid in them, as they may

cause electrical shock to the user and/or

damage to this unit.

6 Do not cover this unit with a newspaper,

tablecloth, curtain, etc. in order not to obstruct

heat radiation. If the temperature inside this unit

rises, it may cause fire, damage to this unit, and/or

personal injury.

7 Do not plug in this unit to a wall outlet until all

connections are complete.

8 Do not operate this unit upside-down. It may

overheat, possibly causing damage.

9 Do not use force on switches, knobs and/or cords.

10 When disconnecting the power cord from the wall

outlet, grasp the plug; do not pull the cord.

11 Do not clean this unit with chemical solvents; this

might damage the finish. Use a clean, dry cloth.

12 Only voltage specified on this unit must be used.

Using this unit with a higher voltage than

specified is dangerous and may cause fire,

damage to this unit, and/or personal injury.

YAMAHA will not be held responsible for any

damage resulting from use of this unit with a

voltage other than specified.

CAUTION: READ THIS BEFORE OPERATING YOUR UNIT.

13 To prevent damage by lightning, disconnect the

power cord from the wall outlet during an

electrical storm.

14 Take care of this unit so that no foreign objects

and/or liquid drops inside this unit.

15 Do not attempt to modify or fix this unit. Contact

qualified YAMAHA service personnel when any

service is needed. The cabinet should never be

opened for any reasons.

16 When not planning to use this unit for long

periods of time (i.e. vacation), disconnect the AC

power plug from the wall outlet.

17 Be sure to read the “TROUBLESHOOTING” section

on common operating errors before concluding

that this unit is faulty.

18 Before moving this unit, press STANDBY/ON to set

this unit in the standby mode, and disconnect the

AC power plug from the wall outlet.

19 VOLTAGE SELECTOR (China and General models

only)

The VOLTAGE SELECTOR on the rear panel of this

unit must be set for your local main voltage

BEFORE plugging into the AC main supply.

Voltages are 110/120/220/240 V AC, 50/60 Hz.

This unit is not disconnected from the AC power

source as long as it is connected to the wall outlet,

even if this unit itself is turned off. This state is called

the standby mode. In this state, this unit is designed to

consume a very small quantity of power.

IMPORTANT

Please record the serial number of this unit in the

space below.

MODEL:

Serial No.:

The serial number is located on the rear of the unit.

Retain this Owner’s Manual in a safe place for future

reference.

FOR CANADIAN CUSTOMERS

To prevent electric shock, match wide blade of plug to

wide slot and fully insert.

This Class B digital apparatus complies with Canadian

ICES-003.

III CAUTION

We Want You Listening For A Lifetime

YAMAHA and the Electronic Industries Association’s Consumer

Electronics Group want you to get the most out of your equipment

by playing it at a safe level. One that lets the sound come through

loud and clear without annoying blaring or distortion – and, most

importantly, without affecting your sensitive hearing.

Since hearing damage from loud sounds is often

undetectable until it is too late, YAMAHA and the

Electronic Industries Association’s Consumer

Electronics Group recommend you to avoid

prolonged exposure from excessive volume levels.

0101V630_Cau_EN(U) 12/27/01, 7:45 PM4

English

INTRODUCTION

PREPARATION

BASIC

OPERATION

ADVANCED

OPERATION

ADDITIONAL

INFORMATION

CONTENTS

INTRODUCTION

CONTENTS ............................................................ 1

FEATURES ............................................................. 2

GETTING STARTED ............................................ 3

Checking the package contents ................................. 3

Installing batteries in the remote control ................... 3

CONTROLS AND FUNCTIONS ......................... 4

Front panel ................................................................ 4

Remote control .......................................................... 6

Using the remote control ........................................... 7

Front panel display .................................................... 8

PREPARATION

SPEAKER SETUP ................................................. 9

Speakers .................................................................... 9

Speaker placement .................................................... 9

Connecting the speakers .......................................... 10

CONNECTIONS .................................................. 13

Before connecting components ............................... 13

Connecting video components ................................ 14

Connecting audio components ................................ 16

Connecting the antennas ......................................... 17

Connecting an external amplifier ............................ 18

Connecting an external decoder .............................. 18

Connecting the power supply cords ........................ 19

Turning on the power .............................................. 19

SPEAKER MODE SETTINGS .......................... 20

ADJUSTING SPEAKER OUTPUT LEVELS .. 21

Before you begin ..................................................... 21

Using the test tone ................................................... 21

BASIC OPERATION

BASIC PLAYBACK ............................................ 23

Input modes and indications .................................... 25

Selecting a sound field program .............................. 26

DIGITAL SOUND FIELD PROCESSING

(DSP) ................................................................. 29

Understanding sound fields ..................................... 29

Hi-Fi DSP programs ................................................ 29

CINEMA-DSP ...................................................... 30

Sound design of CINEMA-DSP ............................. 30

CINEMA-DSP programs ........................................ 32

TUNING ................................................................ 34

Automatic and manual tuning ................................. 34

Presetting stations .................................................... 35

Tuning in to a preset station .................................... 37

Exchanging preset stations ...................................... 37

SLEEP TIMER ..................................................... 38

Setting the sleep timer ............................................. 38

Canceling the sleep timer ........................................ 38

RECORDING ....................................................... 39

ADVANCED OPERATION

SET MENU ........................................................... 40

Adjusting the items on the SET MENU .................. 40

1 SPEAKER SET (speaker mode settings) ............ 41

2 LFE LEVEL ........................................................ 43

3 SP DLY TIME (speaker delay time) ................... 43

4 D. RANGE (dynamic range) ............................... 44

5 L/R BALANCE (balance of the main left and

right speakers) ..................................................... 44

6 HP TONE CTRL (headphone tone control) ........ 44

7 I/O ASSIGN (input/output assignment) .............. 44

8 INPUT MODE (initial input mode) .................... 45

9 DISPLAY SET .................................................... 45

10MEM. GUARD (memory guard) ........................ 45

REMOTE CONTROL FEATURES ................... 46

Control area ............................................................. 46

Setting the manufacturer code ................................. 47

Clearing setup manufacturer codes ......................... 47

Controlling other components ................................. 48

ADJUSTING THE LEVEL OF THE EFFECT

SPEAKERS ....................................................... 49

ADJUSTING THE DELAY TIME ..................... 50

ADJUSTING THE PARAMETER SETTINGS

FOR PRO LOGIC

MUSIC ......................... 51

Changing parameter settings ................................... 51

PRO LOGIC Music parameter descriptions ....... 51

ADDITIONAL INFORMATION

TROUBLESHOOTING ...................................... 52

GLOSSARY .......................................................... 56

SPECIFICATIONS .............................................. 58

0102V630_1-8_EN(U) 12/27/01, 7:45 PM1

Manufactured under license from Dolby Laboratories.

“Dolby”, “Pro Logic”, and the double-D symbol are trademarks

of Dolby Laboratories.

“DTS”, “ES” and “DTS Digital Surround” are trademarks of

Digital Theater Systems, Inc.

FEATURES

Built-in 6-channel power amplifier

◆ Minimum RMS output power

(0.06% THD, 20 Hz – 20 kHz, 8Ω)

Main: 75 W + 75 W

Center: 75 W

Rear: 75 W + 75 W

Rear center: 75 W

Multi-mode digital sound field

processing

◆ Dolby Pro Logic/Dolby Pro Logic decoder

◆ Dolby Digital/Dolby Digital EX decoder

◆ DTS/DTS-ES compatible decoder

◆ CINEMA DSP: Combination of YAMAHA DSP

technology and Dolby Pro Logic, Dolby Digital

or DTS

◆ Virtual CINEMA DSP

◆ SILENT CINEMA DSP

Sophisticated AM/FM Tuner

◆ 40-Station random access preset tuning

◆ Automatic preset tuning

◆ Preset station shifting capability (Preset

editing)

Other features

◆ 96-kHz/24-bit D/A converter

◆ “SET MENU” for optimizing this unit for your

Audio/Video system

◆ Test tone generator for easier speaker balance

adjustment

◆ 6-channel external decoder input

◆ S-video signal input/output capability

◆ Component video input/output capability

◆ Optical and coaxial digital audio signal jacks

◆ Sleep timer

◆ Remote control with preset manufacturer codes

■ About this manual

• y indicates a tip for your operation.

• Some operations can be performed by using either the buttons on the main unit or on the remote control. In cases when the button

names differ between the main unit and the remote control, the button name on the remote control is given in parentheses.

• This manual is printed prior to production. Design and specifications are subject to change in part for the reason of the improvement

in operativity ability, and others. In this case, the product has priority.

0102V630_1-8_EN(U) 12/27/01, 7:45 PM2

English

INTRODUCTION PREPARATION

BASIC OPERA-

TION

ADVANCED

OPERATION

ADDITIONAL

INFORMATION

APPENDIX

POWER

SLEEP

CODE SET

STANDBY

TRANSMIT

6CH INPUT

SYSTEM

AUX

TV/CBL

REC

DISC SKIP

SET MENU

SELECT

PRESET/CH

TV INPUTTV MUTE

A/B/C/D/E

AUDIO

VOLUME

LEVEL

TEST

STEREO

EFFECT

RETURN

DISPLAY

TITLE

MUTE

AMP

POWER POWER

AVTV

VCR 1 VCR2/DVR

DVD

MD/CD-R TUNERCD

–

TV CHTV VOL

–

HALL

ENTER-

TAINMENT

SPORTS

MONO

MOVIE

SELECT

EX/ES

MOVIE

THEATER 1

MOVIE

THEATER 2

/DTS

SUR.

ROCK

CONCERT

JAZZ CLUB

3421

ENTER

+10

67 8

Installing batteries in the remote

control

Insert the batteries in the correct direction by aligning the

+ and – marks on the batteries with the polarity markings

(+ and –) inside the battery compartment.

1 Press the part and slide off the battery

compartment cover.

2 Insert the four supplied batteries (AAA, R03,

UM-4) according to the polarity markings on

the inside of the battery compartment.

3 Slide the cover back on so that it snaps into

place.

■ Notes on batteries

• Change all of the batteries if you notice a decrease in

the operating range of the remote control, that the

indicator does not flash, or the light becoming dim.

• Do not use old batteries together with new ones.

• Do not use different types of batteries (such as alkaline

and manganese batteries) together. Read the packaging

carefully as these different types of batteries may have

the same shape and color.

• If the batteries have leaked, dispose of them

immediately. Avoid touching the leaked material or

letting it come into contact with clothing, etc. Clean

the battery compartment thoroughly before installing

new batteries.

If the remote control is without batteries for more than

2 minutes, or if exhausted batteries remain in the

remote control, the contents of the memory may be

cleared. When the memory is cleared, insert new

batteries, set up the manufacturer code that may have

been cleared.

AM loop antenna

(Europe, U.K., Australia and

Singapore models)

Indoor FM antenna

(U.S.A., Canada, China,

Korea and General models)

Batteries (4)

(AAA, R03, UM-4)

Remote control

GETTING STARTED

Checking the package contents

Check your package to make sure it contains the following items.

75-ohm/300-ohm antenna

adapter (U.K. model)

Front VIDEO AUX jack cap

0102V630_1-8_EN(U) 12/27/01, 7:45 PM3

NATURAL SOUND AV RECEIVER

SPEAKERS

SILENT

PHONES

STANDBY

STEREO

EFFECT

PROGRAM

BASS

– + – +

TREBLE

VIDEO AUX

S VIDEO VIDEO AUDIO OPTICALLR

MEMORY

FM/AM

EDIT

PRESET/TUNING

MAN'L/AUTO FM

AUTO/MAN'L MONO

TUNING MODE

VOLUME

INPUT

INPUT M0DE

6CH INPUT

PRESET

TUNING

A/B/C/D/E

123 456

MEMORY

FM/AM

EDIT

PRESET/TUNING

MAN'L/AUTO FM

AUTO/MAN'L MONO

TUNING MODE

iupo

90 ert8qw y

CONTROLS AND FUNCTIONS

Front panel

1 STANDBY/ON

Turns this unit on, or set it to the standby mode. When

you turn this unit on, you will hear a click and there will

be a 4 to 5-second delay before this unit can reproduce

sound.

Standby mode

In this mode, this unit will consume a small amount of

power in order to receive infrared-signals from the

remote control.

2 Remote control sensor

Receives signals from the remote control.

3 Front panel display

Shows information about the operational status of this

unit.

4 INPUT MODE

Sets the priority for the types of input signals (AUTO,

DTS, ANALOG) to receive when one component is

connected to two or more input jacks. Priority cannot be

set when 6CH INPUT is selected as the input source.

5 INPUT l / h

Selects the input source you want to listen to or watch.

6 VOLUME

Controls the output level of all audio channels.

This does not affect the OUT (REC) level.

7 6CH INPUT

Selects the audio source connected to the 6CH INPUT

jacks. This audio takes priority over the source selected

with INPUT l / h (or the input selector buttons on the

remote control).

8 SILENT (PHONES jack)

Allows you enjoy DSP effect for private listening with

headphones. When you connect headphones, no signals

are output to the speakers or the OUTPUT jacks.

9 SPEAKERS A/B

Turns the set of main speakers connected to the A and/or

B terminals on or off.

0102V630_1-8_EN(U) 12/27/01, 7:45 PM4

English

INTRODUCTION PREPARATION

BASIC OPERA-

TION

ADVANCED

OPERATION

ADDITIONAL

INFORMATION

APPENDIX

CONTROLS AND FUNCTIONS

0 STEREO/EFFECT

Switches between normal stereo and DSP effect

reproduction. When STEREO is selected, 2-channel

signals are directed to the main left and right speakers

without effect sounds and all Dolby Digital and DTS

signals (except the LFE channel) are mixed down to the

main left and right speakers.

q PROGRAM l / h

Selects the DSP program.

w PRESET/TUNING l / h

Selects preset station numbers 1 to 8 when the colon (:)

appears in the front panel display.

Selects the tuning frequency when the colon (:) does not

appear.

e A/B/C/D/E

Selects preset station groups A to E.

r BASS

Adjusts the low-frequency response for the main left and

right channels.

Turn right to increase or turn left to decrease the low-

frequency response.

t TREBLE

Adjusts the high-frequency response for the main left and

right channels.

Turn right to increase or turn left to decrease the high-

frequency response.

y VIDEO AUX jacks

Inputs for audio and video signals from a portable

external source (game console, etc.). Set the input source

to V-AUX to enjoy source signals from these jacks.

When the VIDEO AUX jacks on the front panel are not

used, you can attach the provided front VIDEO AUX jack

cap as shown in the illustration. When the cap is not

attached, be sure retain it carefully.

u PRESET/TUNING (EDIT)

Switches the function of PRESET/TUNING l / h

between selecting a preset station number and tuning (the

colon (:) turns on or off).

This button is also used to exchange the assignment of

two preset stations with each other.

i TUNING MODE (AUTO/MAN’L MONO)

Switches the tuning mode between automatic and manual.

o MEMORY (MAN’L/AUTO FM)

Stores the current station in the memory.

p FM/AM

Switches the reception band between FM and AM.

TICA

VID

S VID

VID

0102V630_1-8_EN(U) 12/27/01, 7:45 PM5

CONTROLS AND FUNCTIONS

POWER

SLEEP

CODE SET

STANDBY

TRANSMIT

6CH INPUT

SYSTEM

AUX

TV/CBL

REC

DISC SKIP

SET MENU

SELECT

PRESET/CH

TV INPUT

TV MUTE

A/B/C/D/E

AUDIO

VOLUME

LEVEL

TEST

STEREO

EFFECT

RETURN

DISPLAY

TITLE

MUTE

AMP

POWER POWER

AVTV

VCR 1 VCR2/DVR

DVD

MD/CD-R TUNERCD

–

TV CHTV VOL

–

HALL

ENTER-

TAINMENT

SPORTS

MONO

MOVIE

SELECT

EX/ES

MOVIE

THEATER 1

MOVIE

THEATER 2

/DTS

SUR.

ROCK

CONCERT

JAZZ CLUB

3421

ENTER

+10

67 8

Remote control

This section describes the remote control controls and

their functions. Make sure that the AMP mode is selected

before starting operation. See “REMOTE CONTROL

FEATURES” on pages 46 to 48.

1 Infrared window

Outputs infrared control signals. Aim this window at the

component you want to operate.

2 CODE SET

Used when setting up the manufacturer code (see page

47).

3 Input selector buttons

Select the input source and set the remote control to

operate the selected source component.

4 DSP program

Select DSP programs for the AMP position. Press a

button repeatedly to select a DSP program within that

group.

5 LEVEL

Selects the effect speaker channel to be adjusted.

6 Multi control section

Used when changing the setting and to implement the

settings.

7 TEST

Outputs the test tone to adjust the speaker levels.

8 TRANSMIT indicator

Flashes while the remote control is sending signals.

9 STANDBY

Sets this unit in the standby mode.

0 SYSTEM POWER

Turns on the power of this unit.

q SLEEP

Sets the sleep timer.

w 6CH INPUT

Selects the audio source connected to the 6CH INPUT

jacks.

e AMP

Sets the remote control to the AMP mode for controlling

this unit.

r Å

Sets the remote control to operate other component (not

necessarily connected to this unit) without changing this

unit’s input source.

t VOLUME +/–

Increases or decreases the volume level.

y MUTE

Mutes the sound. Press again to restore the audio output

to the previous volume level.

0102V630_1-8_EN(U) 12/27/01, 7:45 PM6

English

INTRODUCTION PREPARATION

BASIC OPERA-

TION

ADVANCED

OPERATION

ADDITIONAL

INFORMATION

APPENDIX

CONTROLS AND FUNCTIONS

VCR 1 VCR2/DVR

NATURAL SOUND AV RECEIVER

SPEAKERS

SILENT

PHONES

STANDBY

STEREO

EFFECT

PROGRAM

PRESET

TUNING

A/B/C/D/E

BASS

– + – +

TREBLE

VIDEO AUX

S VIDEO VIDEO AUDIO OPTICALLR

MEMORY

FM/AM

EDIT

PRESET/TUNING

MAN'L/AUTO FMAUTO/MAN'L MONO

TUNING MODE

VOLUMEINPUT

INPUT M0DE

6CH INPUT

30° 30°

Approximately 6 m (20 feet)

u STEREO/EFFECT

Switches between normal stereo and DSP effect

reproduction. When STEREO is selected, 2-channel

signals are directed to the main left and right speakers

without effect sounds and all Dolby Digital and DTS

signals (except the LFE channel) are mixed down to the

main left and right speakers.

i SET MENU

Selects the SET MENU mode.

Using the remote control

The remote control transmits a directional infrared beam.

Be sure to aim the remote control directly at the remote

control sensor on the main unit during operation.

■ Handling the remote control

• Do not spill water or other liquids on the remote

control.

• Do not drop the remote control.

• Do not leave or store the remote control in the

following types of conditions:

– high humidity or temperature such as near a heater,

stove or bath;

– dusty places; or

– in places subject to extremely low temperatures.

0102V630_1-8_EN(U) 12/27/01, 7:45 PM7

CONTROLS AND FUNCTIONS

LCR

RC RR

LFE

VIRTUAL

DSP

PCM

MATRIX

SILENT

DIGITAL

MUTE

SLEEP

STEREO

TUNED

MEMORY

AUTO

PRO LOGIC

VOLUME

DTS

MOVIE

THTR

ENTERTAINMENT

DOLBY DIGITAL

PRO

LOGIC

VCR

V-AUX

DVD

TUNER CD

TV/CBL

MD/CD

VCR2/DVR

1234

57890qwert

1 Processor indicators

Lights up when the t, g, VIRTUAL,

PRO LOGIC

DSP

are activated.

MATRIX lights up when the Dolby Digital EX decoder or

the DTS-ES compatible decoder is activated.

2 Input source indicator

Shows the current input source with a cursor.

3 MUTE indicator

Flashes while the MUTE function is on.

4 VOLUME level indicator

Indicates the volume level.

5 v indicator

Lights up when this unit is reproducing PCM (pulse code

modulation) digital audio signals.

6 SILENT indicator

Lights up when headphones are connected while the

digital sound field processor is on.

7 Headphones indicator

Lights up when headphones are connected.

8 DSP program indicators

The name of the selected DSP program lights up when the

ENTERTAINMENT, MOVIE THEATER 1, MOVIE

THEATER 2 or V/DTS SURROUND DSP program is

selected.

9 Multi-information display

Shows the current DSP program name and other

information when adjusting or changing settings.

0 STEREO indicator

Lights up when this unit is receiving a strong signal for an

FM stereo broadcast while the “AUTO” indicator is lit.

q TUNED indicator

Lights up when this unit is tuned to a station.

w MEMORY indicator

Flashes to show a station can be stored.

e AUTO indicator

Shows that this unit is in the automatic tuning mode.

r SLEEP indicator

Lights up while the sleep timer is on.

t Input channel indicator

Indicates the channel components of input signals being

received.

Front panel display

0102V630_1-8_EN(U) 12/27/01, 7:45 PM8

English

INTRODUCTION

PREPARATION

BASIC OPERA-

TION

ADVANCED

OPERATION

ADDITIONAL

INFORMATION

APPENDIX

SPEAKER SETUP

Speakers

This unit has been designed to provide the best sound-

field quality with a 6-speaker system, using main left and

right speakers, rear left and right speakers, a center

speaker, and a rear center speaker. If you use different

brands of speakers (with different tonal qualities) in your

system, the tone of a moving human voice and other types

of sound may not shift smoothly. We recommend that you

use speakers from the same manufacturer or speakers

with the same tonal quality.

The main speakers are used for the main source sound

plus effect sounds. They will probably be the speakers

from your present stereo system. The rear speakers are

used for effect and surround sounds. The center speaker is

for the center sounds (dialog, vocals, etc.). The rear center

speaker supplements the rear (left and right) speakers and

provides for more realistic front-to-back transitions.

The main speakers should be high-performance models

and have enough power-handling capacity to accept the

maximum output of your audio system. The other

speakers do not have to be equal to the main speakers. For

precise sound localization, however, it is ideal to use the

models of equivalent performance with the main

speakers.

■ Use of a subwoofer expands your

sound field

It is also possible to further expand your system with the

addition of a subwoofer. The use of a subwoofer is

effective not only for reinforcing bass frequencies from

any or all channels, but also for reproducing the LFE

(low-frequency effect) channel with high fidelity when

playing back Dolby Digital or DTS signals. The

YAMAHA Active Servo Processing Subwoofer System is

ideal for natural and lively bass reproduction.

PREPARATION

Speaker placement

Refer to the following diagram when you place the

speakers.

■ Main speakers

Place the main left and right speakers an equal distance

from the ideal listening position. The distance between

each speaker and each side of the video monitor should

also be the same.

■ Center speaker

Align the front face of the center speaker with the front

face of your video monitor. Place the speaker as close to

the monitor as possible (such as directly over or under the

monitor) and centrally between the main speakers.

■ Rear speakers

Place these speakers behind your listening position,

facing slightly inwards, nearly 1.8 m (6 feet) above the

floor.

■ Rear center speaker

Place the rear center speaker in the center between the

rear left and right speakers at the same height from the

floor as the rear speakers.

■ Subwoofer

The position of the subwoofer is not so critical, because

low bass sounds are not highly directional. But it is better

to place the subwoofer near the main speakers. Turn it

slightly toward the center of the room to reduce wall

reflections.

Note

• If you do not use any of effect speakers (rear, center and/or rear

center), change the settings of SPEAKER SET items at the

SET MENU to designate the signals to other terminals you

connect speakers to.

CAUTION

Use magnetically shielded speakers. If this type of

speakers still creates the interference with the monitor,

place the speakers away from the monitor.

Main

speaker (L)

1.8 m (6 feet)

Rear speaker (L)

Rear center

speaker

Rear speaker (R)

Subwoofer

Main speaker (R)Center speaker

0103V630_9-18_EN(U) 12/27/01, 7:45 PM9

SPEAKER SETUP

Connecting the speakers

Be sure to connect the left channel (L), right channel (R), “+” (red) and “–” (black) properly. If the connections are

faulty, no sound will be heard from the speakers, and if the polarity of the speaker connections is incorrect, the sound

will be unnatural and lack bass.

CAUTION

• Use speakers with the specified impedance shown on the rear panel of this unit.

• Do not let the bare speaker wires touch each other or any metal part of this unit. This could damage this unit

and/or the speakers.

If necessary, use the SET MENU to change the speaker mode settings according to the number and size of the speakers

in your configuration after you finish connecting your speakers.

■ Speaker cables

A speaker cord is actually a pair of insulated cables

running side by side. One cable is colored or shaped

differently, perhaps with a stripe, groove or ridge.

1 Remove approximately 10 mm (3/8”) of

insulation from each of the speaker cables.

2 Twist the exposed wires of the cable

together to prevent short circuits.

■ Connecting to the SPEAKERS terminals

1 Unscrew the knob.

2 Insert one bare wire into the hole in the side

of each terminal.

3 Tighten the knob to secure the wire.

(U.S.A., Canada, Australia, China, Korea and General models)

• Banana plug connections are also possible. First, tighten the

knob and then insert the banana plug connector into the end of

the corresponding terminal.

10 mm (3/8”)

■ MAIN SPEAKERS terminals

One or two speaker systems can be connected to these terminals. When using only one speaker system, it can be

connected to either the MAIN A or the MAIN B terminals.

■ REAR SPEAKERS terminals

A rear speaker system can be connected to these terminals.

■ CENTER SPEAKER terminals

A center speaker can be connected to these terminals.

■ REAR CENTER SPEAKER terminals

A rear center speaker can be connected to these terminals.

Red: positive (+)

Black: negative (–)

Banana plug

(U.S.A. model)

0103V630_9-18_EN(U) 12/27/01, 7:45 PM10

English

INTRODUCTION

PREPARATION

BASIC OPERA-

TION

ADVANCED

OPERATION

ADDITIONAL

INFORMATION

APPENDIX

SPEAKER SETUP

DIGITAL

OUTPUT

SPEAKERS

MAIN

DIGITAL

INPUT

6CH INPUT

(PLAY)

OUT

(REC)

DVD

D-TV

/CBL

DVD

OUT

VCR 1

VCR 2

/VDR

/CD-R

D-TV

/CBL

OUT

DVD

ANT

GND

UNBAL.

OPTICAL

D-TV/CBL

MD/CD-R

OPTICAL

COAXIAL

S VIDEO VIDEO

OUTPUT

S VIDEO

MONITOR OUT

MONITOR

OUT

VIDEO

TUNER

COMPONENT VIDEO

AUDIOAUDIO

MAIN

CENTER

SUB

WOOFER

SUB

WOOFER

SURROUND

CENTER

AC OUTLETS

REAR

CENTER

REAR CENTER

OUTPUT

–

REAR

(SURROUND)

REAR

(SURROUND)

IMPEDANCE SELECTOR

SET BEFORE POWER ON

MIN. /SPEAKER

MAIN

A OR B

A+B

CENTER

REAR CENTER

REAR

MAIN A OR B

A+B

CENTER

REAR CENTER

REAR

Subwoofer

system

Rear center

speaker

Main B speaker

Center

speaker

Right

Rear speaker

■ SUBWOOFER jack

When using a subwoofer with built-in amplifier, including the YAMAHA Active Servo Processing Subwoofer System,

connect the input jack of the subwoofer system to this jack. Low bass signals distributed from the main, center and/or

rear channels are directed to this jack in accordance with your SPEAKER SET selections. The LFE (low-frequency

effect) signals generated when Dolby Digital or DTS is decoded are also directed to this jack in accordance with your

SPEAKER SET selections.

Notes

• The cut-off frequency of the SUBWOOFER jack is 90 Hz.

• If you do not use a subwoofer, designate the signals to the main left and right speakers by changing the setting of SPEAKER SET

item “1E BASS” on the SET MENU to MAIN.

• Use the control on the subwoofer to adjust its volume level. It is also possible to adjust the volume level by using this unit’s remote

control (see “ADJUSTING THE LEVEL OF THE EFFECT SPEAKERS” on page 49).

Right Left

Main A speaker

Right Left

Left

The diagram shows the speaker layout in the listening

room.

0103V630_9-18_EN(U) 12/27/01, 7:45 PM11

SPEAKER SETUP

SPEAKERS

MAIN

MPONENT VIDEO

CENTER

REAR

CENTER

REAR CENTER

OUTPUT

–

REAR

(SURROUND)

REAR

(SURROUND)

MIN. /SPEAKER

MAIN

A OR B

A+B

CENTER

REAR CENTER

REAR

MAIN A OR B

A+B

CENTER

REAR CENTER

REAR

IMPEDANCE SELECTOR

SET BEFORE POWER ON

MIN. /SPEAKER

MAIN

A OR B

A+B

CENTER

REAR CENTER

REAR

MAIN A OR B

A+B

CENTER

REAR CENTER

REAR

IMPEDANCE SELECTOR

SET BEFORE POWER ON

Switch

position

Left

Right

Speaker

Main

Center

Rear

Center

Rear

Main

Center

Rear

Center

Rear

Impedance level

If you use one set of main speakers,

the impedance of each speaker must

be 4 Ω or higher.

If you use two sets of main speakers,

the impedance of each speaker must

be 8 Ω or higher.

The impedance must be 6 Ω or

higher.

The impedance must be 6 Ω or

higher.

The impedance of each speaker must

be 6 Ω or higher.

If you use one set of main speakers,

the impedance of each speaker must

be 8 Ω or higher.

If you use two sets of main speakers,

the impedance of each speaker must

be 16 Ω or higher.

[Canada model only]

The impedance of each speaker must

be 8 Ω or higher.

The impedance must be 8 Ω or

higher.

The impedance must be 8 Ω or

higher.

The impedance of each speaker must

be 8 Ω or higher.

IMPEDANCE

SELECTOR

switch

(U.S.A. model)

■ IMPEDANCE SELECTOR switch

WARNING

Do not change setting of the IMPEDANCE SELECTOR switch when the power of this unit is on, this may damage

the unit. If this unit fails to turn on when STANDBY/ON (or SYSTEM POWER) is pressed, the IMPEDANCE

SELECTOR switch may not be fully slid to either position. If so, slide the switch all the way to either position when

this unit is in the standby mode.

Select the switch position (left or right) according to the impedance of the speakers in your system. Be sure to move this

switch only when this unit is in the standby mode.

0103V630_9-18_EN(U) 12/27/01, 7:45 PM12

English

INTRODUCTION

PREPARATION

BASIC OPERA-

TION

ADVANCED

OPERATION

ADDITIONAL

INFORMATION

APPENDIX

CONNECTIONS

Before connecting components

CAUTION

Do not connect this unit or other components to the

mains power until all connections between the

components have been completed.

• Be sure all connections are made correctly, that is to

say L (left) to L, R (right) to R, “+” to “+” and “–” to

“–”. Some components require different connection

methods and have different jack names. Refer to the

operation instructions for each component to be

connected to this unit.

• When you connect other YAMAHA audio components

(such as a tape deck, MD recorder and CD player or

changer), connect them to the jack with the same

number labels as !, #, $ etc. YAMAHA applies this

labeling system to all its products.

• After you have completed all connections, check them

again to make sure they are correct.

• The name of jack corresponds to input selector.

■ Connecting to digital jacks

This unit has digital jacks for direct transmission of

digital signals through either coaxial or fiber optic cables.

You can use the digital jacks to input PCM, Dolby Digital

and DTS bitstreams. To enjoy multi-channel sound track

of DVD software, etc. with DSP effect, you need to make

digital connection. All digital input jacks are acceptable

for 96-kHz sampling digital signals.

Note

• The OPTICAL jacks on this unit conform to the EIA standard.

If you use a fiber optic cable that does not conform to this

standard, this unit may not function properly.

DIGITAL

OUTPUT

SPEAKERS

MAIN

DIGITAL

INPUT

6CH INPUT

(PLAY)

OUT

(REC)

DVD

D-TV

/CBL

DVD

OUT

VCR 1

VCR 2

/VDR

/CD-R

D-TV

/CBL

DVD

OUT

ANT

GND

UNBAL.

OPTICAL

D-TV/CBL

MD/CD-R

OPTICAL

COAXIAL

S VIDEO VIDEO

OUTPUT

S VIDEO

MONITOR OUT

MONITOR

OUT

VIDEO

TUNER

COMPONENT VIDEO

AUDIOAUDIO

MAIN

CENTER

SUB

WOOFER

SUB

WOOFER

SURROUND

CENTER

REAR

CENTER

REAR CENTER

OUTPUT

–

REAR

(SURROUND)

REAR

(SURROUND)

AC OUTLETS

(page 19)

6CH INPUT jacks

(page 18)

DIGITAL OUTPUT jack

(page 16)

OUTPUT jacks

(page 18)

DIGITAL INPUT jacks

(pages 13-16)

Antenna input terminals

(page 17)

Speaker terminals

(pages 10-11)

Video component jacks

(pages 14-15)

Audio component jacks

(page 16)

SUBWOOFER

OUTPUT jack

(page 11)

0103V630_9-18_EN(U) 12/27/01, 7:45 PM13

CONNECTIONS

Connecting video components

Refer to the connection examples on the next page.

■ Types of video jacks

There are three types of video jacks as follows:

1 VIDEO jack

Conventional composite video signal.

2 S VIDEO jack

Transmits color and luminance separately and achives

high-quality color reproduction.

3 COMPONENT VIDEO jacks

Transmit color difference (P

, P

) and

luminance separately and provide the best quality

picture.

• Each type of video jack works independently. Signals

input through the composite video, S-video and

component jacks are only output through the

corresponding composite video, S-video, and

component jacks.

• Use a commercially available cable specified for

connecting each type of jacks.

• The description of the component video jacks may

differ depending on the component (e.g. Y, C

, C

/Y,

, P

/Y, B-Y, R-Y etc.). When using these jacks, refer

also to the operation instructions for the component

being connected.

■ Connecting a video monitor

Connect the video input jack on your video monitor to the

MONITOR OUT VIDEO jack.

Note

• If you connect this unit with a source component using S-video

(or Component video) jacks, you also need to connect your

video monitor using S-video (or Component video) jacks.

■ Connecting a DVD player/digital

TV/cable TV

Connect the optical digital audio signal output jack on

your component to the DIGITAL INPUT jack and

connect the video signal output jack on the component to

the VIDEO jack on this unit.

Then connect AUDIO jacks on your component to the

AUDIO jacks on this unit.

• If your video component has an S-video output or component

video output, connect the S-video signal output jack on the

component to the S VIDEO jack or connect the component

video signal output jacks on the component to the

COMPONENT VIDEO jacks.

• The AUDIO jacks are available for a video component which

does not have optical digital output jack. However, multi-

channel reproduction cannot be obtained with audio signals

input from AUDIO jacks.

■ Connecting a game console or

camcorder

Connect the optical digital audio signal output jack on

your video component to the OPTICAL jack on the front

panel and connect video signal output jack on the

component to the VIDEO jack on the front panel.

• If your video component has an S-video output, connect the S-

video signal output jack on the component to the S VIDEO

jack.

• The AUDIO jacks are available for a video component such as

a camcorder which does not have optical digital output jack.

■ Connecting a VCR or DVR (digital

video recorder)

Connect the audio signal input jacks on your video

component to the AUDIO OUT jacks and connect the

video signal input jack on the video component to the

VIDEO OUT jack on this unit for picture recording.

Connect the audio signal output jacks on your component

to the AUDIO IN jacks and connect the video signal

output jack on the component to the VIDEO IN jack on

this unit to play a source from your recording component.

Second VCR or digital video recorder can be connected

using VCR 2/DVR jacks.

• If your video component has an S-video input, connect the S-

video signal input jack on the component to the S VIDEO OUT

jack.

• If your video component has an S-video output, connect the S-

video signal output jack on the component to the S VIDEO IN

jack.

Notes

• Once you have connected a recording component to this unit,

keep its power turned on while using this unit. If the power is

off, this unit may distort the sound from other components.

• S-video and component video signals pass independently

through this unit’s video circuit. Make sure to connect this unit

to both a source component and a recording component using

the video jacks of the same system.

COMPONENT VIDEO

VIDEOS VIDEO

2 1 3

0103V630_9-18_EN(U) 12/27/01, 7:45 PM14

English

INTRODUCTION

PREPARATION

BASIC OPERA-

TION

ADVANCED

OPERATION

ADDITIONAL

INFORMATION

APPENDIX

CONNECTIONS

DIGITAL

OUTPUT

DIGITAL

INPUT

6CH INPUT

(PLAY)

OUT

(REC)

DVD

D-TV

/CBL

DVD

OUT

VCR 1

VCR 2

/VDR

/CD-R

D-TV

/CBL

OUT

ANT

GND

UNBAL.

OPTICAL

D-TV/CBL

MD/CD-R

OPTICAL

COAXIAL

S VIDEO VIDEO

OUTPUT

S VIDEO

MONITOR OUT

MONITOR

OUT

VIDEO

TUNER

B/CBPR/CR

COMPONENT VIDEO

AUDIOAUDIO

MAIN

CENTER

SUB

WOOFER

SUB

WOOFER

SURROUND

MIN. /SPEAKER

MAIN

A OR B

A+B

CENTER

REAR CENTER

REAR

A/B/C/D/E

BASS

– + – +

TREBLE

VIDEO AUX

S VIDEO VIDEO AUDIO OPTICALLR

MEMORY

FM/AM

EDIT

PRESET/TUNING

MAN'L/AUTO FM

AUTO/MAN'L MONO

TUNING MODE

VOLUME

INPUT

INPUT M0DE

6CH INPUT

V V

AUDIO

OUTPUT

AUDIO

INPUT

VIDEO

OUTPUT

VIDEO

INPUT

VIDEO

INPUT

VIDEO

OUTPUT

OPTICAL

OUTPUT

AUDIO

OUTPUT

VIDEO

OUTPUT

OPTICAL

OUTPUT

OPTICAL

OUTPUT

VIDEO

OUTPUT

indicates video cables

indicates optical cables

indicates right analog cables

indicates left analog cables

indicates signal direction

Video monitor

VCR 1

DVD player

TV/digital TV/

cable TV

Game console or

camcorder

0103V630_9-18_EN(U) 12/27/01, 7:45 PM15

CONNECTIONS

Connecting audio components

■ Connecting a CD player

Connect the coaxial digital output jack on your CD player

to the DIGITAL INPUT CD jack.

• The AUDIO jacks are available for a CD player which does not

have coaxial digital output jack.

■ Connecting a CD recorder or MD

recorder

Connect the optical digital signal input jack on your CD

recorder or MD recorder to the DIGITAL OUTPUT MD/

CD-R jack for digital recording.

Connect the optical digital output jack on your CD

recorder or MD recorder to the DIGITAL INPUT MD/

CD-R jack to play a source from your recording

component.

DIGITAL

OUTPUT

DIGITAL

INPUT

6CH INPUT

(PLAY)

OUT

(REC)

DVD

OUT

VCR 1

VCR 2

/VDR

/CD-R

D-TV

/CBL

OUT

OPTICAL

D-TV/CBL

MD/CD-R

OPTICAL

COAXIAL

S VIDEO VIDEO

OUTPUT

S VIDEO

MONITOR OUT

VIDEO

VIDEOAUDIO

MAIN

CENTER

SUB

WOOFER

SUB

WOOFER

SURROUND

AUDIO

OPTICAL

INPUT

OPTICAL

OUTPUT

COAXIAL

OUTPUT

indicates signal direction

CD player

CD recorder or

MD recorder

• The AUDIO jacks are available for an CD recorder or MD

recorder which does not have optical digital input or output

jack.

Notes

• Once you have connected a recording component to this unit,

keep its power turned on while using this unit. If the power is

off, this unit may distort the sound from other components.

• DIGITAL OUTPUT jack and analog OUT (REC) jacks are

independent. Only digital signals are output from DIGITAL

OUTPUT jack and analog signals from OUT (REC) jacks.

indicates optical cables

indicates coaxial cables

0103V630_9-18_EN(U) 12/27/01, 7:45 PM16

English

INTRODUCTION

PREPARATION

BASIC OPERA-

TION

ADVANCED

OPERATION

ADDITIONAL

INFORMATION

APPENDIX

CONNECTIONS

D-TV

/CBL

DVD

ANT

GND

UNBAL.

VIDEO

OUT

FREQUENCY

STEP

MONI

VIDEO

TUNER

100kHz/10kHz

FREQUENCY

STEP

50kHz/9kHz

FM/AM

Ground (GND terminal)

For maximum safety and minimum

interference, connect the antenna GND

terminal to a good earth ground. A good

earth ground is a metal stake driven into

moist earth.

Indoor FM

antenna

(included)

AM loop antenna

(included)

Connecting the antennas

11 (7/16)

8 (5/16)

6 (1/14)

■ Connecting the AM loop antenna

1 Set up the AM loop antenna, then connect it.

2 Press and hold the tab to insert the AM loop

antenna lead wires into the AM ANT and

GND terminals.

3 Orient the AM loop antenna for the best

reception.

Notes

• The AM loop antenna should be placed away from this unit.

• The AM loop antenna should always be connected, even if an

outdoor AM antenna is connected to this unit.

A properly installed outdoor antenna provides clearer

reception than an indoor one. If you experience poor

reception quality, an outdoor antenna may improve the

quality. Consult the nearest authorized YAMAHA

dealer or service center about the outdoor antennas.

FREQUENCY STEP switch (China and General

models)

Because the interstation frequency spacing

differs in different areas, set the

FREQUENCY STEP switch (located on

the rear panel) according to the frequency

spacing in your area.

North, Central and South America:

100 kHz/10 kHz

Other area: 50 kHz/9 kHz

Before setting this switch, disconnect the

AC power plug of this unit from the AC

outlet.

Open the cover of the

included 75-ohm/300-ohm

antenna adapter.

Cut the external sleeve

of the 75-ohm coaxial

cable and prepare it for

connection.

Cut the lead wire and

remove it.

Insert the cable wire into the

slot, and clamp it with pliers.

Snap the cover into

place.

Unit:

mm (inch)

Lead wire

Clamp with

pliers.

Clamp

with

pliers.

Insert the wire

into the slot.

Both AM and FM indoor antennas are included with this

unit. In general, these antennas should provide sufficient

signal strength.

Connect each antenna correctly to the designated

terminals.

75-ohm/300-ohm antenna adapter (U.K. model)

0103V630_9-18_EN(U) 12/27/01, 7:45 PM17

CONNECTIONS

234

MAIN

CENTER

REAR

CENTER

OUTPUT

REAR

(SURROUND)

OUTPUT

SUB

WOOFER

Connecting an external amplifier

If you want to increase the power output to the speakers,

or want to use another amplifier, connect an external

amplifier to the OUTPUT jacks as follows.

Note

• When RCA pin plugs are connected to the OUTPUT jacks for

output to an external amplifier, signals are output from the

SPEAKERS terminals as well.

1 SUBWOOFER jack

When using a subwoofer with built-in amplifier,

including the YAMAHA Active Servo Processing

Subwoofer System, connect the input jack of the

subwoofer system to this jack. Low bass signals

distributed from the main, center and/or rear channels are

directed to this jack in accordance with your SPEAKER

SET selections. The LFE (low-frequency effect) signals

generated when Dolby Digital or DTS is decoded are also

directed to this jack in accordance with your SPEAKER

SET selections.

Notes

• The cut-off frequency of the SUBWOOFER jack is 90 Hz.

• If you do not use a subwoofer, designate the signals to the main

left and right speakers by changing the settings of SPEAKER

SET item “1E BASS” on the SET MENU.

• Use the control on the subwoofer to adjust its volume level. It

is also possible to adjust the volume level by using this unit’s

remote control (see “ADJUSTING THE LEVEL OF THE

EFFECT SPEAKERS” on page 49).

2 MAIN jacks

Main channel line output jacks.

Note

• The signals output through these jacks are affected by the

BASS and TREBLE settings.

3 REAR CENTER jack

Rear center channel line output jack.

4 CENTER jack

Center channel line output jack.

5 REAR (SURROUND) jacks

Rear channel line output jacks.

Connecting an external decoder

This unit is equipped with 6 additional input jacks (MAIN

left and right, CENTER, SURROUND left and right, and

SUBWOOFER) for discrete multi-channel input from an

external decoder, sound processor, or pre-amplifier.

Connect the output jacks on your external decoder to the

6CH INPUT jacks. Be sure to match the left and right

outputs to the left and right input jacks for the main and

surround channels.

Notes

• When you select 6CH INPUT as the input source, this unit

automatically turns off the digital sound field processor, and

you cannot listen to DSP programs.

• When you select 6CH INPUT as the input source, settings of

“1 SPEAKER SET” on the SET MENU do not apply (except

for “1F MAIN Lv”).

0103V630_9-18_EN(U) 12/27/01, 7:45 PM18

English

INTRODUCTION

PREPARATION

BASIC OPERA-

TION

ADVANCED

OPERATION

ADDITIONAL

INFORMATION

APPENDIX

CONNECTIONS

Connecting the power supply

cords

VOLTAGE

SELECTOR

SWITCHED

120V 60Hz

100W MAX. TOTAL

AC OUTLETS

VOLTAGE SELECTOR

(General model)

■ Connecting the AC power cord

Plug in this unit to the wall outlet.

■ AC OUTLETS (SWITCHED)

U.S.A., Canada, China, Europe, Singapore and

General models ..............................................2 OUTLETS

U.K. and Australia model ................................ 1 OUTLET

Use these outlets to connect the power cords from your

components to this unit. The power to the AC OUTLETS

is controlled by this unit’s STANDBY/ON (or SYSTEM

POWER and STANDBY). These outlets will supply

power to any source component connected to this unit

whenever this unit is turned on. The maximum power

(total power consumption of components) that can be

connected to the AC OUTLETS varies depending on the

area which it was purchasing.

China and General models ......................................... 50 W

Other models ........................................................... 100 W

■ VOLTAGE SELECTOR

(China and General models)

The VOLTAGE SELECTOR on the rear panel of this unit

must be set for your local main voltage BEFORE

plugging into the AC main supply. Voltages are 110/120/

220/240 V AC, 50/60 Hz.

Turning on the power

When all connections are complete, turn on the power of

this unit.

1 Press STANDBY/ON (SYSTEM POWER on

the remote control) to turn on the power of

this unit.

The level of the main volume, and then the current

DSP program name appear on the front panel

display.

2 Turn on the video monitor connected to this

unit.

NATURAL SOUND AV RECEIVER

SPEAKERS

SILENT

PHONES

STANDBY

STEREO

EFFECT

PROGRAM

PRESET

TUNING

A/B/C/D/E

BASS

– + – +

TREBLE

VIDEO AUX

S VIDEO VIDEO AUDIO OPTICALLR

MEMORY

FM/AM

EDIT

PRESET/TUNING

MAN'L/AUTO FM

AUTO/MAN'L MONO

TUNING MODE

VOLUME

INPUT

INPUT M0DE

6CH INPUT

POWER

SLEEP

CODE SET

STANDBY

TRANSMIT

6CH INPUT

SYSTEM

AUX

TV/CBL

TV INPUTTV MUTE

VOLUME

MUTE

AMP

POWER POWER

AVTV

VCR 1 VCR1/DVR

DVD

MD/CD-R TUNERCD

–

TV CHTV VOL

HALL

ENTER-

TAINMENT

ROCK

CONCERT

JAZZ CLUB

STANDBY

/ON

POWER

SYSTEM

Remote control

Front panel

0104V630_19-22_EN(U) 12/27/01, 7:45 PM19

Item

1A CENTER

1B MAIN

1C REAR LR

1D REAR CT

1E BASS

1F MAIN Lv

Description

Sets center speaker availability and size.

Sets main speaker size.

Sets rear L/R speakers availability and size.

Sets rear center speaker availability and size.

Sets the speaker(s) to be used to output low bass signals.

Sets the main speaker level.

Possible settings (default

setting indicated in bold)

LRG/SML/NON

LARGE/SMALL

LRG/SML/NON

SWFR/MAIN/BOTH

Nrm (Normal)/–10 dB

SPEAKER MODE SETTINGS

This unit has 6 SPEAKER SET items on the SET MENU that you must set according to the number of speakers in your

configuration and their size. The following table summarizes these SPEAKER SET items, and shows the initial settings

as well as other possible settings.

If the initial settings shown in the following table are not appropriate for your speaker configuration,

see “1 SPEAKER SET” on pages 41-43 to change the settings.

Summary of SPEAKER SET items 1A through 1F

0104V630_19-22_EN(U) 12/27/01, 7:45 PM20

English

INTRODUCTION

PREPARATION

BASIC OPERA-

TION

ADVANCED

OPERATION

ADDITIONAL

INFORMATION

APPENDIX

Using the test tone

Use the test tone to balance the output levels of the

speakers. The adjustment of each speaker output level

should be made at your listening position using the

remote control.

1 Press AMP.

2 Press TEST to output the

test tone.

3 Adjust the volume of this unit so you can

hear the test tone.

The test tone is heard (in order) from the main left

speaker, center speaker, main right speaker, rear right

speaker, rear center, rear left speaker, and the

subwoofer. The tone is produced for 2.5 seconds

from each speaker.

This section explains how to adjust speaker output levels

using the test tone generator. When this adjustment is

complete, the output level heard at the listening position

should be the same from each speaker. This is important

for best performance of the digital sound field processor,

and the various decoders (Dolby Digital, Dolby Pro

Logic, Dolby Pro Logic

and DTS).

Note

• Since this unit cannot enter the test mode while headphones are

connected to this unit, be sure to unplug the headphones from

the PHONES jack when using the test tone.

Before you begin

1 Press SPEAKERS A or B

to select the main

speakers to be used.

If you are using two sets of the

main speakers, press both A

and B.

2 Set the BASS and TREBLE controls on the

front panel to the center position.

TEST

RETURN

AMP

BASS

–

TREBLE

–

SET MENU

TV INPUTTV MUTE

A/B/C/D/E

VOLUME

LEVEL

TEST

STEREO

EFFECT

RETURN

DISPLAY

TITLE

MUTE

AMP

VCR 1 VCR2/DVR

–

TV CHTV VOL

–

HALL

ENTER-

TAINMENT

SPORTS

MONO

MOVIE

SELECT

EX/ES

MOVIE

THEATER 1

MOVIE

THEATER 2

/DTS

SUR.

ROCK

CONCERT

JAZZ CLUB

3421

ENTER

+10

67 8

SELECT

PRESET/CH

2,5

SPEAKERS

ADJUSTING SPEAKER OUTPUT LEVELS

NATURAL SOUND AV RECEIVER

SPEAKERS

SILENT

PHONES

STANDBY

STEREO

EFFECT

PROGRAM

PRESET

TUNING

A/B/C/D/E

BASS

– + – +

TREBLE

VIDEO AUX

S VIDEO VIDEO AUDIO OPTICALLR

MEMORY

FM/AM

EDIT

PRESET/TUNING

MAN'L/AUTO FM

AUTO/MAN'L MONO

TUNING MODE

VOLUME

INPUT

INPUT M0DE

6CH INPUT

NATURAL SOUND AV RECEIVER

SPEAKERS

SILENT

PHONES

STANDBY

STEREO

EFFECT

PROGRAM

PRESET

TUNING

A/B/C/D/E

BASS

– + – +

TREBLE

VIDEO AUX

S VIDEO VIDEO AUDIO OPTICALLR

MEMORY

FM/AM

EDIT

PRESET/TUNING

MAN'L/AUTO FM

AUTO/MAN'L MONO

TUNING MODE

VOLUME

INPUT

INPUT M0DE

6CH INPUT

VOLUME

–

VOLUME

Remote controlFront panel

0104V630_19-22_EN(U) 12/27/01, 7:46 PM21

ADJUSTING SPEAKER OUTPUT LEVELS

4 Adjust the level of the

effect speakers using j / i

so that it matches the

level of the main

speakers.

While adjusting, the test tone

is heard from the selected

speaker.

Note

• To adjust the level of the main speakers, use VOLUME knob

(or VOLUME +/– on the remote control).

5 When adjustment is

complete, press TEST to

stop the test tone.

Notes

• If “1A CENTER” on the SET MENU is set to NON, the center

channel sound is automatically output from the main left and

right speakers.

• If “1C REAR LR” on the SET MENU is set to NON, the

output level of the rear left, right and center speakers cannot be

adjusted in step 4. The test tone will be circulated skipping the

rear left and right speakers and the rear center speaker.

• If “1D REAR CT” on the SET MENU is set to NON, the

output level of the rear center speaker cannot be adjusted in

step 4. The test tone will be circulated skipping the rear center

speaker.

• If “1E BASS” on the SET MENU is set to MAIN, the test tone

will be circulated skipping the subwoofer.

• It is not necessary to readjust the speaker levels once they are

set (as long as you do not change the speakers). You can enjoy

listening to or watching the input source at the desired volume

simply by adjusting the VOLUME knob (or VOLUME +/– on

the remote control).

• If the output level of the effect speakers (center, rear left, rear

right, and rear center) cannot be increased enough to match the

level of the main speakers, set “1F MAIN Lv” on SET MENU

to –10 dB (see page 43). This setting decreases the main

speaker output level to about one-third of the normal level.

After you have set “1F MAIN Lv” on the SET MENU to

–10 dB, adjust the levels for the center and rear speakers again.

* Subwoofer test tone is output after the rear left

speaker (LEFT SURROUND).

The front panel display shows which speaker is

outputting the test tone.

Note

• If the test tone cannot be heard, turn down the volume, set this

unit to standby mode and check the speaker connections.

SELECT

PRESET/CH

–

LEFT SURROUND RIGHT SURROUND

CENTER

REAR CENTER

RIGHT

LEFT

*SUBWOOFER

TEST

RETURN

0104V630_19-22_EN(U) 12/27/01, 7:46 PM22

English

INTRODUCTION

PREPARATION

BASIC

OPERATION

ADVANCED

OPERATION

ADDITIONAL

INFORMATION

APPENDIX

BASIC PLAYBACK

1 Press STANDBY/ON (SYSTEM POWER on

the remote control) to turn on the power.

2 Turn on the video monitor connected to this

unit.

3 Press SPEAKERS A or B

to select the main

speakers to be used.

If you are using two sets of

main speakers, press both A

and B.

4 Press INPUT l / h repeatedly (one of the

input selector buttons on the remote control)

to select the input source.

The selected input source name and input mode

appear on the front panel display for a few seconds.

To select the audio source connected to the 6CH

INPUT jacks

(When combining with a video source)

• You need to select the input to which the video source

component is connected before selecting audio source.

Press 6CH INPUT until “6CH INPUT” appears on the

front panel display.

Note

• If “6CH INPUT” is shown on the front panel display, no other

source can be played. To select another input source, first press

6CH INPUT to turn off “6CH INPUT” from the front panel

display.

INPUT

POWER

SLEEP

CODE SET

STANDBY

TRANSMIT

6CH INPUT

SYSTEM

AUX

TV/CBL

TV INPUTTV MUTE

VOLUME

STEREO

EFFECT

MUTE

AMP

POWER POWER

AVTV

VCR 1 VCR2/DVR

DVD

MD/CD-R TUNERCD

–

TV CHTV VOL

HALL

ENTER-

TAINMENT

SPORTS

MONO

MOVIE

SELECT

EX/ES

MOVIE

THEATER 1

MOVIE

THEATER 2

/DTS

SUR.

ROCK

CONCERT

JAZZ CLUB

3421

ENTER

+10

67 8

AUX

TV/CBL

VCR 1 VCR2/DVR

DVD

MD/CD-R TUNERCD

VOLUME

VCR

V-AUX

DVD

TUNER CD

TV/CBL

MD/CD

VCR2/DVR

NATURAL SOUND AV RECEIVER

SPEAKERS

SILENT

PHONES

STANDBY

STEREO

EFFECT

PROGRAM

PRESET

TUNING

A/B/C/D/E

BASS

– + – +

TREBLE

VIDEO AUX

S VIDEO VIDEO AUDIO OPTICALLR

MEMORY

FM/AM

EDIT

PRESET/TUNING

MAN'L/AUTO FM

AUTO/MAN'L MONO

TUNING MODE

VOLUME

INPUT

INPUT M0DE

6CH INPUT

464

STANDBY

/ON

POWER

SYSTEM

SPEAKERS

Remote control

Front panel

Selected input source

6CH INPUT

Remote controlFront panel

0105V630_23-28_EN(U) 12/27/01, 7:46 PM23

BASIC PLAYBACK

5 Start playback or select a broadcast station

on the source component.

Refer to the operation instructions for the

component.

6 Adjust the volume to the desired level.

The volume level is displayed digitally.

Example: –70 dB

Control range: VOLUME MUTE (minimum) to

0 dB (maximum)

The volume level indicator also shows the current

volume level as a bar graph.

If desired, use BASS and TREBLE. These controls

only effect the sound from the main speakers.

Notes

• If you increase or decrease the high-frequency or the low-

frequency sound to an extreme level, the tonal quality from the

center and rear speakers may not match that of the main left

and right speakers.

• If you have connected a recording component to the VCR 1

OUT, VCR 2/DVR OUT, or MD/CD-R OUT jacks, and you

notice distortion or low volume during playback of other

components, try turning the recording component on.

7 Select a DSP program if desired.

Use PROGRAM l / h (DSP program buttons on

the remote control) to select a DSP program. See

pages 29 to 33 for details about DSP programs.

When using the remote control, press AMP before

selecting a DSP program.

AUX

TV/CBL

VCR 1 VCR2/DVR

DVD

MD/CD-R TUNERCD

VOLUME

–

VOLUME

BASS

–

TREBLE

–

Front panel

Remote control

■ BGV (background video) function

The BGV function allows you to enjoy video images

from a video source together with sounds from an audio

source. For example, you can enjoy listening to classical

music while having beautiful scenery from a video source

on the video monitor.

Select a source from the video group, then select a source

from the audio group using the input selector buttons on

the remote control. BGV selections cannot be made with

INPUT l / h on the front panel.

■ To mute the sound

1 Press MUTE on the

remote control.

To resume the audio output,

press MUTE again.

• You can also cancel mute by pressing VOLUME +/–, etc.

• During muting, the “MUTE” indicator flashes on the front

panel display.

■ When you have finished using

this unit

1 Press STANDBY/ON (STANDBY on the

remote control) to set this unit in the

standby mode.

PROGRAM

STEREO

EFFECT

HALL

ENTER-

TAINMENT

SPORTS

MONO

MOVIE

SELECT

EX/ES

MOVIE

THEATER 1

MOVIE

THEATER 2

/DTS

SUR.

ROCK

CONCERT

JAZZ CLUB

3421

ENTER

+10

67 8

Front panel Remote control

STANDBY

/ON

STANDBY

Front panel

Remote control

MUTE

0105V630_23-28_EN(U) 12/27/01, 7:46 PM24

English

INTRODUCTION

PREPARATION

BASIC

OPERATION

ADVANCED

OPERATION

ADDITIONAL

INFORMATION

APPENDIX

BASIC PLAYBACK

Input modes and indications

This unit comes with a variety input jacks. You can select

the type of input signals you desire.

Each time you turn on the power of this unit, the input

mode is set according to “8 INPUT MODE” setting on

the SET MENU (see page 45 for details).

1 Press INPUT MODE (the input selector

button that you have pressed to select the

input source on the remote control)

repeatedly until the desired input mode is

shown on the front panel display.

AUTO: In this mode, the input signal is selected

automatically as follows:

1) Digital signal

2) Analog signal

DTS: In this mode, only the digital input signal

encoded with DTS is selected, even if

another signal is input at the same time.

ANALOG: In this mode, only the analog input signal is

selected, even if a digital signal is input at

the same time.

Notes

• When AUTO is selected, this unit automatically determines the

type of signal. If this unit detects a Dolby Digital or DTS

signal, the decoder automatically switches to the appropriate

setting.

• When playing a disc encoded with Dolby Digital or DTS on

some LD or DVD players, the sound output delays for a

moment when playback resumes after a search because the

digital signal is selected again.

• When playing a LD source that has not been digitally recorded,

the sound may not be output for some LD players. In this case,

set the input mode to ANALOG.

INPUT MODE

DVD AUTO

VOLUME

VCR

V-AUX

DVD

TUNER CD

TV/CBL

MD/CD

VCR2/DVR

AUX

TV/CBL

VCR 1 VCR2/DVR

DVD

MD/CD-R TUNERCD

Remote controlFront panel

Input mode

■ Notes on 96-kHz sampling digital

signals

The digital input jacks of this unit can handle 96-kHz

sampling digital signals. Note the following when 96-kHz

sampling digital signal is input to this unit:

– DSP programs cannot be selected.

– Sound will be output as 2-channel stereo from only the

main left and right speakers. (There may be sound

output from the subwoofer depending on the

SPEAKER MODE settings on the SET MENU.)

Therefore, the level of the effect speakers cannot be

adjusted while listening to such a source.

■ Notes on playing DTS-CD/LDs

• If the digital output data of the player has been

processed in any way, you may not be able to perform

DTS decoding even if you make a digital connection

between this unit and the player.

• If you play a source encoded with a DTS signal and

set the input mode to ANALOG, this unit may

reproduce the noise of an unprocessed DTS signal. In

this case, connect the source to a digital input jack and

set the input mode to AUTO or DTS.

• If you switch the input mode to ANALOG while

playing a source encoded with a DTS signal, this unit

reproduces no sound.

• If you play a source encoded with a DTS signal with

the input mode set to AUTO;

– This unit automatically switches to the DTS-

decoding mode (The “t” indicator lights up) after

having detected the DTS signal. When playback of

the DTS source is completed, the “t” indicator

may flash. While this indicator is flashing, only DTS

source can be played. If you want to play a normal

PCM source soon, set the input mode back to AUTO.

– When the input mode is set to AUTO and a search or

skip operation is performed during playback of a

DTS source, the “t” indicator may flash. If this

status continues for longer than 30 seconds, this unit

will automatically switch from “DTS-decoding”

mode to PCM digital signal input mode. The “t”

indicator will turn off.

0105V630_23-28_EN(U) 12/27/01, 7:46 PM25

BASIC PLAYBACK

Selecting a sound field program

You can enhance your listening experience by selecting a

DSP program. For details about each program, see pages

29 to 33.

1 Press AMP.

2 Press one of the DSP program buttons on

the remote control to select the desired

program.

The name of the selected program appears on the

front panel display.

AMP

NATURAL SOUND AV RECEIVER

SPEAKERS

SILENT

PHONES

STANDBY

STEREO

EFFECT

PROGRAM

PRESET

TUNING

A/B/C/D/E

BASS

– + – +

TREBLE

VIDEO AUX

S VIDEO VIDEO AUDIO OPTICALLR

MEMORY

FM/AM

EDIT

PRESET/TUNING

MAN'L/AUTO FM

AUTO/MAN'L MONO

TUNING MODE

VOLUME

INPUT

INPUT M0DE

6CH INPUT

PROGRAM l / h

POWER

SLEEP

CODE SET

STANDBY

TRANSMIT

6CH INPUT

SYSTEM

AUX

TV/CBL

TV INPUTTV MUTE

VOLUME

STEREO

EFFECT

MUTE

AMP

POWER POWER

AVTV

VCR 1 VCR2/DVR

DVD

MD/CD-R TUNERCD

–

TV CHTV VOL

HALL

ENTER-

TAINMENT

SPORTS

MONO

MOVIE

SELECT

EX/ES

MOVIE

THEATER 1

MOVIE

THEATER 2

/DTS

SUR.

ROCK

CONCERT

JAZZ CLUB

3421

ENTER

+10

67 8

2,3

3 After selecting the desired program, press

the same button repeatedly to select the

desired sub-program if available.

Example: Pressing MOVIE THEATER 1 repeatedly

switches the sub-program between

“Sci-Fi” and “Spectacle”.

Notes

• There are 9 programs with sub-programs available with this

unit. However, the selection depends on the input signal format

and not all sub-programs can be used with all input signal

formats.

• The digital sound field processor cannot be used when a source

connected to the 6CH INPUT jacks of this unit is selected or

when 96-kHz sampling digital signals are input to this unit.

• The acoustics of your listening room affect the DSP program.

Minimize the sound reflections in your room to maximize the

effect created by the program.

• When you select an input source, this unit automatically selects

the last DSP program used with that source.

• When you set this unit in the standby mode, the current source

and DSP program are memorized and are automatically

selected when you turn on the power again.

• If a Dolby Digital or DTS signal is input when the input mode

is set to AUTO, the DSP program (No. 7–9) automatically

switches to the appropriate decoding program.

• When a monaural source is being played with PRO LOGIC/

Normal or PRO LOGIC/Enhanced, or PRO LOGIC Movie,

no sound will be heard from the main speakers and the rear

speakers. Sound can only be heard from the center speaker. (If

“1A CENTER” on the SET MENU is set to NON, the center

channel sound is output from the main speakers.)

• You can also select DSP program by pressing PROGRAM

l / h on the front panel.

• Select a program based on your listening preference. Program

names are just for reference.

DGTLz Sci-Fi

LCR

LFE

DSP

PRO LOGIC

VOLUME

MOVIE

THTR

VCR

V-AUX

DVD

TUNER CD

TV/CBL

MD/CD

VCR2/DVR

Sub-program name

Program name

DGTL Spectacle

LCR

LFE

DSP

PRO LOGIC

VOLUME

MOVIE

THTR

VCR

V-AUX

DVD

TUNER CD

TV/CBL

MD/CD

VCR2/DVR

STEREO

EFFECT

HALL

ENTER-

TAINMENT

SPORTS

MONO

MOVIE

SELECT

EX/ES

MOVIE

THEATER 1

MOVIE

THEATER 2

/DTS

SUR.

ROCK

CONCERT

JAZZ CLUB

3421

ENTER

+10

67 8

STEREO

EFFECT

HALL

ENTER-

TAINMENT

SPORTS

MONO

MOVIE

SELECT

EX/ES

MOVIE

THEATER 1

MOVIE

THEATER 2

/DTS

SUR.

ROCK

CONCERT

JAZZ CLUB

3421

ENTER

+10

67 8

Program name

Sub-program name

0105V630_23-28_EN(U) 12/27/01, 7:46 PM26

English

INTRODUCTION

PREPARATION

BASIC

OPERATION

ADVANCED

OPERATION

ADDITIONAL

INFORMATION

APPENDIX

BASIC PLAYBACK

■ Selecting PRO LOGIC

You can enjoy the 2-channel sources decoded into five or

six discrete channels by selecting PRO LOGIC

program No. 9.

1 Select a 2-channel source and start playback

on the source component.

2 Press AMP.

3 Press q/DTS SUR.

The previously selected sub program appears on the

front panel display.

PRO LOGIC

DSP

PRO LOGIC

VOLUME

PRO

LOGIC

VCR

V-AUX

DVD

TUNER CD

TV/CBL

MD/CD

VCR2/DVR

STEREO

EFFECT

HALL

ENTER-

TAINMENT

SPORTS

MONO

MOVIE

SELECT

EX/ES

MOVIE

THEATER 1

MOVIE

THEATER 2

/DTS

SUR.

ROCK

CONCERT

JAZZ CLUB

3421

ENTER

+10

67 8

Remote control

STEREO

EFFECT

HALL

ENTER-

TAINMENT

SPORTS

MONO

MOVIE

SELECT

EX/ES

MOVIE

THEATER 1

MOVIE

THEATER 2

/DTS

SUR.

ROCK

CONCERT

JAZZ CLUB

3421

ENTER

+10

67 8

STEREO

EFFECT

HALL

ENTER-

TAINMENT

SPORTS

MONO

MOVIE

SELECT

EX/ES

MOVIE

THEATER 1

MOVIE

THEATER 2

/DTS

SUR.

ROCK

CONCERT

JAZZ CLUB

3421

ENTER

+10

67 8

NATURAL SOUND AV RECEIVER

SPEAKERS

SILENT

PHONES

STANDBY

STEREO

EFFECT

PROGRAM

PRESET

TUNING

A/B/C/D/E

BASS

– + – +

TREBLE

VIDEO AUX

S VIDEO VIDEO AUDIO OPTICALLR

MEMORY

FM/AM

EDIT

PRESET/TUNING

MAN'L/AUTO FM

AUTO/MAN'L MONO

TUNING MODE

VOLUME

INPUT

INPUT M0DE

6CH INPUT

PROGRAM l / h

AMP

4 Press SELECT repeatedly to select the

decoder; PRO LOGIC or PRO LOGIC

5 After selecting on the decoder (PRO LOGIC

), select the mode appropriate for the

source by pressing q/DTS SUR.

The selection switches as follow;

PRO LOGIC

Movie ↔ PRO LOGIC Music

• You can select PRO LOGIC, PRO LOGIC Movie, and PRO

LOGIC Music by pressing PROGRAM l / h on the front

panel repeatedly.

POWER

SLEEP

CODE SET

STANDBY

TRANSMIT

6CH INPUT

SYSTEM

AUX

TV/CBL

TV INPUTTV MUTE

VOLUME

STEREO

EFFECT

MUTE

AMP

POWER POWER

AVTV

VCR 1 VCR2/DVR

DVD

MD/CD-R TUNERCD

–

TV CHTV VOL

HALL

ENTER-

TAINMENT

SPORTS

MONO

MOVIE

SELECT

EX/ES

MOVIE

THEATER 1

MOVIE

THEATER 2

/DTS

SUR.

ROCK

CONCERT

JAZZ CLUB

3421

ENTER

+10

67 8

3,4,5

0105V630_23-28_EN(U) 12/27/01, 7:46 PM27

BASIC PLAYBACK

■ Playing Dolby Digital Surround

EX or DTS ES software

Press EX/ES to turn on the Dolby Digital EX or DTS-ES

compatible decoder.

The display changes AUTO → Matrix6.1 → OFF each

time the EX/ES button is pressed.

AUTO: This mode automatically switches Dolby

Digital EX and DTS-ES compatible

depending on the signal. Rear center speaker

does not work for 5.1 channel sources.

Matrix6.1: This setting produces 6-channel playback of

the input source using the Dolby Digital EX

or DTS-ES compatible decoder. The rear

center speaker can be used when playing a

5.1-channel source.

OFF: Rear center speaker does not work in this

setting. (Except for when the DSP program

“6ch” is selected.)

Notes

• No sound will be output from the rear center speaker if you

have set “1C REAR LR” or “1D REAR CT” on the SET

MENU to NON.

• The setting becomes AUTO once this unit turns into standby

mode.

• Some Dolby Digital Surround EX or DTS ES software may not

contain the signal that is necessary for this unit to switch to the

Dolby Digital EX or DTS-ES compatible decoding mode. To

turn on the decoder when playing such a source, select

“Matrix6.1”.

■ Virtual CINEMA DSP

With Virtual CINEMA DSP, you can enjoy all DSP

programs without rear speakers. It creates virtual speakers

to reproduce a natural sound field.

You can listen to virtual CINEMA DSP by setting “1C

REAR LR” in the SET MENU to NON. Sound field

processing changes to VIRTUAL CINEMA DSP

automatically.

Note

• This unit is not set in the virtual CINEMA DSP mode even if

“1C REAR LR” is set to NON in the following cases:

– when the 6ch Stereo, DOLBY DIGITAL Normal, Pro Logic

Normal, Pro Logic , or DTS Normal program is selected;

– when the sound effect is turned off;

– when 6CH INPUT is selected as the input source;

– when 96-kHz sampling digital signals are input to this unit;

– when using the test tone; or

– when connecting the headphones.

STEREO

EFFECT

ENTER

STEREO

EFFECT

Front panel

Remote control

SELECT

PRESET/CH

–

■ SILENT CINEMA DSP

You can enjoy a powerful sound field similar to what you

could expert from actual speakers with SILENT

CINEMA DSP. You can listen to SILENT CINEMA DSP

by connecting your headphones to the PHONES jack

while the digital sound field processor is on. Enjoy all the

DSP program using the headphones. The “SILENT”

indicator lights up on the front panel display. (When

sound effects are off, you listen to the source with normal

stereo reproduction.)

Notes

• This feature is not available when 6CH INPUT is selected or

96-kHz sampling digital signals are input to this unit.

• The sound of LFE channel will be mixed and output from the

headphone.

■ Normal stereo reproduction

1 Press STEREO to turn off the sound effect

for normal stereo reproduction.

Press STEREO again to turn the sound effect back

on.

Notes

• If you turn off the sound effects, no sound is output from the

center speaker, rear speakers, or rear center speaker.

• If you turn off the sound effects while a Dolby Digital or DTS

signal is being output, the dynamic range of the signal is

automatically compressed and the sounds of the center and rear

speaker channels are mixed and output from the main speakers.

• The volume may be greatly reduced when you turn off the

sound effects or if you set “4 D. RANGE” on the SET MENU

to MIN. In this case turn on the sound effect.

• The sound of LFE channel will be directed to the main left and

right or the subwoofer (or both) channels depending on the

setting of “1E BASS” on the SET MENU.

During stereo reproduction, you can display information such as

the type, format and sampling frequency of the signal input from

the components connected to this unit.

(While playing a source)

1 Press AMP.

2 Press d to display the information about the

input signal.

EX/ES

+10

The MATRIX indicator lights up.

Spectacle EX

DSP

MATRIX

DIGITAL

MOVIE

THTR

VCR

V-AUX

DVD

TUNER

TV/CBL

MD/CD

VCR2/DVR

0105V630_23-28_EN(U) 12/29/01, 9:38 PM28

BASIC

OPERATION

English

INTRODUCTION PREPARATION

ADVANCED

OPERATION

ADDITIONAL

INFORMATION

APPENDIX

DIGITAL SOUND FIELD PROCESSING (DSP)

Understanding sound fields

A sound field is defined as the “characteristic sound reflections of a

particular space.” In concert halls and other music venues, we hear

early reflections and reverberations as well as the direct sound

produced by the artist(s). The variations in the early reflections and

other reverberations among the different music venues is what gives

each venue its special and recognizable sound quality.

YAMAHA sent teams of sound engineers all around the world to

measure the sound reflections of famous concert halls and music

venues, and collect detailed sound field information such as the

direction, strength, range, and delay time of those reflections. Then

we stored this enormous amount of data in the ROM chips of this

unit.

■ Recreating a sound field

Recreating the sound field of a concert hall or an opera house requires localizing the virtual sound sources in your

listening room. The traditional stereo system that uses only two speakers is not capable of recreating a realistic sound

field. YAMAHA’s DSP requires four effect speakers to recreate sound fields based on the measured sound field data.

The processor controls the strength and delay time of the signals output from the four effect speakers to localize the

virtual sound sources and fully encompass the listener.

Hi-Fi DSP programs

The following list gives you a brief description of the sound fields produced by each of the DSP programs. Keep in

mind that most of these are precise digital recreations of actual acoustic environments.

No.

Program

CONCERT HALL

JAZZ CLUB

ROCK CONCERT

ENTERTAINMENT/

Disco

ENTERTAINMENT/

6ch Stereo

Features

A large round concert hall with a rich surround effect. Pronounced reflections from all directions

emphasize the extension of sounds. The sound field has a great deal of presence, and your virtual

seat is near the center, close to the stage.

This is the sound field at stage front in “The Bottom Line”, a famous New York jazz club, that

seats up to 300 people. Its wide left to right seating arrangement offers a real and vibrant sound.

The ideal program for lively, dynamic rock music. The data for this program was recorded at

LA’s “hottest” rock club. The listener’s virtual seat is at the center-left of the hall.

This program recreates the acoustic environment of a lively disco in the heart of a big city. The

sound is dense and highly concentrated. It is also characterized by a high-energy, “immediate”

sound.

Using this program increases the listening position range. This is a sound field suitable for

background music at parties, etc.

0106V630_29-33_EN(U) 12/27/01, 7:46 PM29

CINEMA-DSP

Sound design of CINEMA-DSP

Filmmakers intend for the dialog to be located right on the screen, the effect sound a little farther back, the music spread

even farther back, and the surround sound around the listener. Of course, all of these sounds must be synchronized with

the images on the screen.

CINEMA-DSP is an upgraded version of YAMAHA DSP specially designed for movie soundtracks. CINEMA-DSP

integrates the DTS, Dolby Digital, and Dolby Pro Logic surround sound technologies with YAMAHA DSP sound field

programs to provide a surround sound field. It recreates comprehensive movie sound design in your audio room. In

CINEMA-DSP sound field programs, YAMAHA’s exclusive DSP processing is added to the Main left and right, and

Center channels, so the listener can enjoy realistic dialogue, depth of sound, smooth transition between sound sources,

and a surround sound field that goes beyond the screen.

When a DTS or Dolby Digital signal is detected, the CINEMA-DSP sound field processor automatically chooses the

most suitable sound field program for that signal.

L SURROUND SOUND FIELD

R SURROUND SOUND FIELD

PRESENCE SOUND FIELD

DIALOG

EFFECT MUSIC

In addition to the DSP, this unit is equipped with a variety of precise decoders; Dolby Pro Logic decoder for Dolby

Surround sources, Dolby Pro Logic

decoder for Dolby Surround and 2-channel sources, Dolby Digital/DTS decoder

for multi-channel sources and Dolby Digital EX or DTS-ES compatible decoder for adding a rear center channel. You

can select CINEMA-DSP programs to optimize these decoders and the DSP sound patterns depending on the input

source.

0106V630_29-33_EN(U) 12/27/01, 7:46 PM30

English

INTRODUCTION PREPARATION

BASIC

OPERATION

ADVANCED

OPERATION

ADDITIONAL

INFORMATION

APPENDIX

CINEMA-DSP

The 6-channel soundtracks found on 70-mm film produce precise sound field localization and rich, deep sound without

using matrix processing. This unit’s MOVIE THEATER programs provide the same quality of sound and sound

localization that 6-channel soundtracks do. The built-in Dolby Digital or DTS decoder brings the professional-quality

sound designed for movie theaters into your home. With this unit’s MOVIE THEATER programs, you can use Dolby

Digital or DTS technology to recreate a dynamic sound that gives you the feeling of being in a public theater.

■ Dolby Digital/DTS + DSP sound field effect

These programs use YAMAHA’s tri-field DSP processing

on each of the Dolby Digital or DTS signals for the front,

left surround, and right surround channels. This

processing enables this unit to reproduce the immense

sound field and surround expression of a Dolby Digital-

or DTS-equipped movie theater without sacrificing the

clear separation of all channels.

■ Dolby Digital EX/DTS-ES compatible + DSP sound field effect

These programs provide you with the maximum experience of the spacious surround effects by adding an extra rear

center DSP sound field created from the rear center channel.

■ Dolby Pro Logic + DSP sound field effect

Most movie software has 4-channel (left, center, right,

and surround) sound information encoded by Dolby

Surround matrix processing and stored on the left and

right tracks. These signals are processed by the Dolby Pro

Logic decoder. The MOVIE THEATER programs are

designed to recreate the spaciousness and delicate

nuances of sound that tend to be lost in the encoding and

decoding processes.

■ Dolby Pro Logic

Dolby Pro Logic decodes Dolby Surround software into 5 discrete full-range channels (3 channels in front and 2

channels in rear). There are 2 modes; MOVIE for movies and MUSIC for 2-channel audio sources.

Surround DSP

sound field

Right surround DSP

sound field

Presence DSP

sound field

Left surround DSP

sound field

Presence DSP

sound field

0106V630_29-33_EN(U) 12/27/01, 7:46 PM31

CINEMA-DSP

CINEMA-DSP programs

■ For movie programs: No. 7 to 9

This unit automatically chooses the appropriate decoder and DSP sound field pattern according to the input signal

format.

Table of Program Names for Each Input Format

MOVIE

THEATER 1

MOVIE

THEATER 2

DOLBY

DIGITAL

DTS DIGITAL

SUR

PRO LOGIC

2 channel

Stereo

70 mm Spectacle

70 mm Sci-Fi

70 mm Adventure

70 mm General

—

Normal

Enhanced

Movie

Music

DOLBY DIGITAL

DGTL Spectacle

DGTL Sci-Fi

DGTL Adventure

DGTL General

Normal

Enhanced

—

5.1 channel

DTS

DTS Spectacle

DTS Sci-Fi

DTS Adventure

DTS General

—

Normal

Enhanced

—

DTS-ES

compatible

Spectacle ES

Sci-Fi ES

Adventure ES

General ES

—

DTS-ES

Enhanced ES

—

6.1 channel *

Input

Program

DOLBY DIGITAL

Spectacle EX

Sci-Fi EX

Adventure EX

General EX

Dolby D EX

Enhanced EX

—

* means the Dolby Digital EX decoder or the DTS-ES compatible decoder is ON.

• If a Dolby Digital signal or DTS signal is input when the input mode is set to AUTO, the DSP program will automatically switch to

the Dolby Digital playback sound field or DTS playback sound field.

• If Dolby Digital Surround EX software or DTS ES software is played when AUTO is selected by pressing the EX/ES button on the

remote control, the Dolby Digital EX or DTS-ES compatible decoder usually turns on and the corresponding DSP program is

selected.

• EX/ES on the remote control can be used to play Dolby Digital or DTS 5.1 channel sources with the rear center speaker. In this case

the program name changes to the corresponding name for 6.1 channel.

• When playing a 6.1 channel source with the Dolby Digital EX decoder or the DTS-ES compatible decoder turned off, the program

name changes to the corresponding name for 5.1 channel.

Notes

• The “ ” indicator does not light up when selecting program No. 9 except in Enhanced mode.

• When playing a monaural source with a CINEMA DSP program, the source signal is directed to the center channel, main and rear

speakers output effect sounds.

No.

0106V630_29-33_EN(U) 12/27/01, 7:46 PM32

English

INTRODUCTION PREPARATION

BASIC

OPERATION

ADVANCED

OPERATION

ADDITIONAL

INFORMATION

APPENDIX

CINEMA-DSP

Program

Enhanced Mode

No.

Program

ENTERTAINMENT/

Game

ENTERTAINMENT/

Concert Video

TV SPORTS

MONO MOVIE

Features

This program adds a deep and spatial feeling to video game sounds.

This program adds a deep and spatial feeling to concert video sounds.

With this program, you can enjoy watching various TV programs such as news, variety shows,

music programs or sports programs. In a stereo broadcast of a sports game, the commentator is

oriented at the center position, and the shouts and the atmosphere in the stadium spread on the

surround side, while their spread to the rear is properly restrained.

This program is provided for reproducing monaural video sources (such as old movies). The

program produces the optimum reverberation to create sound depth by using only the presence

sound field.

■ For audio-video sources: No. 4 to 6

The following list gives you a brief description of the sound fields produced by each of the DSP programs. Keep in

mind that most of these are precise digital recreations of actual acoustic environments. Select the DSP program that you

feel sounds best regardless of the name and description given for it below.

No.

Features

This program creates the extremely wide sound field of a 70-mm movie theater. It

precisely reproduces the source sound in detail, making both the video and the sound

field incredibly real. This is ideal for any kind of video source encoded with Dolby

Surround, Dolby Digital or DTS (especially large-scale movie productions).

This program clearly reproduces dialog and sound effects in the latest sound form of

science fiction films, thus creating a broad and expansive cinematic space amid the

silence. You can enjoy science fiction films in a virtual-space sound field that includes

Dolby Surround, Dolby Digital and DTS-encoded software employing the most advanced

techniques.

This program is ideal for precisely reproducing the sound design of the newest 70-mm

and multichannel soundtrack films. The sound field is made to be similar to that of the

newest movie theaters, so the reverberations of the sound field itself are restrained as

much as possible.

This program is for reproducing sounds from 70-mm and multichannel soundtrack films,

and is characterized by a soft and extensive sound field. The presence sound field is

relatively narrow. It spatially spreads all around and toward the screen, restraining the

echo effect of conversations without losing clarity.

This program ideally simulates the multi-surround speaker systems of the 35-mm film

theaters. Dolby Pro Logic decoding, Dolby Digital decoding or DTS decoding and digital

sound field processing create precise effects without altering the original sound

orientation.

The surround effects produced by this sound field wrap around the viewer naturally from

the back to the left and right, and toward the screen.

MOVIE

THEATER 1

MOVIE

THEATER 2

Spectacle

Sci-Fi

Adventure

General

0106V630_29-33_EN(U) 12/27/01, 7:46 PM33

TUNING

4 Press PRESET/TUNING l / h once to begin

automatic tuning.

Press h to tune in to a higher frequency, or press l

to tune in to a lower frequency.

When tuned in to a station, the “TUNED” indicator

lights up and the frequency of the received station is

shown on the front panel display.

• Use the manual tuning method if the tuning search does not

stop at the desired station because the signal is weak.

■ Manual tuning

If the signal from the station you want to select is weak,

you must tune in to it manually.

1 Select TUNER and the reception band

following steps 1 and 2 described in

“Automatic tuning” at left.

2 Press TUNING MODE (AUTO/MAN’L MONO)

so that the “AUTO” indicator goes off from

the front panel display.

If the colon (:) appears on the front panel display,

press PRESET/TUNING (EDIT) to turn it off.

3 Press PRESET/TUNING l / h to tune in to

the desired station manually.

Hold down the button to

continue the tuning search.

Note

• Manually tuning in to an FM station will automatically change

the reception mode to monaural to increase the signal quality.

Automatic and manual tuning

There are 2 ways to tune; automatic and manual.

Automatic tuning is effective when station signals are

strong and there is no interference.

■ Automatic tuning

1 Press INPUT l / h (TUNER on the remote

control) to select TUNER as the input source.

2 Press FM/AM to select the reception band.

“FM” or “AM” appears on the front panel display.

3 Press TUNING MODE (AUTO/MAN’L MONO)

so that the “AUTO” indicator lights up on the

front panel display.

If the colon (:) appears on the front panel display,

press PRESET/TUNING (EDIT) to turn it off.

INPUT

PRESET

TUNING

4233

NATURAL SOUND AV RECEIVER

SPEAKERS

SILENT

PHONES

STANDBY

STEREO

EFFECT

PROGRAM

PRESET

TUNING

A/B/C/D/E

BASS

– + – +

TREBLE

VIDEO AUX

S VIDEO VIDEO AUDIO OPTICALLR

MEMORY

FM/AM

EDIT

PRESET/TUNING

MAN'L/AUTO FM

AUTO/MAN'L MONO

TUNING MODE

VOLUME

INPUT

INPUT M0DE

6CH INPUT

FM/AM

AUTO/MAN'L MONO

TUNING MODE

AUTO

Lights up

EDIT

PRESET/TUNING

POWER

SLEEP

STANDBY

6CH INPUT

SYSTEM

AUX

TV/CBL

AMP

POWER POWER

AVTV

VCR 1 VCR2/DVR

DVD

MD/CD-R TUNERCD

Front panel

Remote control

AUTO/MAN'L MONO

TUNING MODE

AUTO

Goes off

EDIT

PRESET/TUNING

PRESET

TUNING

A AM 144O

TUNED

VCR

V-AUX

DVD

TUNER

TV/CBL

MD/CD

DVR

A AM 144O

TUNED

VCR

V-AUX

DVD

TUNER

TV/CBL

MD/CD

DVR

A AM 144O

TUNED

VCR

V-AUX

DVD

TUNER

TV/CBL

MD/CD

DVR

0107V630_34-39_EN(U) 12/27/01, 7:46 PM34

English

INTRODUCTION

PREPARATION

BASIC

OPERATION

ADVANCED

OPERATION

ADDITIONAL

INFORMATION

APPENDIX

TUNING

Presetting stations

■ Automatically presetting stations

(for FM stations)

You can use the automatic preset tuning feature to store

FM stations. This function enables this unit to

automatically tune in to FM stations with strong signals,

and to store up to 40 (8 stations x 5 groups) of those

stations in order. This feature enables you to easily tune in

to any preset station by selecting the preset station

number (see page 37).

1 Press FM/AM to select the FM band.

2 Press TUNING MODE (AUTO/MAN’L MONO)

so that the “AUTO” indicator lights up on the

front panel display.

3 Press and hold MEMORY (MAN’L/AUTO FM)

for more than 3 seconds.

The preset number and the “MEMORY” and

“AUTO” indicators flash. Then, after about

5 seconds, automatic preset tuning begins from the

frequency currently displayed toward the higher

frequencies.

When automatic preset tuning is completed, the front

panel display shows the frequency of the last preset

station.

AUTO/MAN'L MONO

TUNING MODE

MEMORY

MAN'L/AUTO FM

AUTO

A1:FM

MEMORY

AUTO

VOLUME

VCR

V-AUX

DVD

TUNER CD

TV/CBL

MD/CD

VCR2/DVR

NATURAL SOUND AV RECEIVER

SPEAKERS

SILENT

PHONES

STANDBY

STEREO

EFFECT

PROGRAM

PRESET

TUNING

A/B/C/D/E

BASS

– + – +

TREBLE

VIDEO AUX

S VIDEO VIDEO AUDIO OPTICALLR

MEMORY

FM/AM

EDIT

PRESET/TUNING

MAN'L/AUTO FM

AUTO/MAN'L MONO

TUNING MODE

VOLUME

INPUT

INPUT M0DE

6CH INPUT

Lights up

Notes

• Any stored station data existing under a preset number is

cleared when you store a new station under that preset number.

• When a station data is stored under a preset number, the

frequency and reception band are also stored.

• You can manually replace a preset station with another FM or

AM station by simply following the procedure in the section

“Manually presetting stations” on page 36.

• If the number of the received stations does not reach E8,

automatic preset tuning has automatically stopped after

searching all stations.

• Only FM stations with sufficient signal strength are stored

automatically by automatic preset tuning. If the station you

want to store is weak in signal strength, tune in to it manually

in the monaural mode, and store it by following the procedure

in “Manually presetting stations” on page 36.

Automatic preset tuning options

You can select the preset number from which this unit

will store FM stations and/or begin tuning toward lower

frequencies. After pressing MEMORY in step 3:

1. Press A/B/C/D/E and PRESET/TUNING l / h to

select the preset number under which the first station

will be stored. Automatic preset tuning will stop when

stations have all been stored up to E8.

2. Press PRESET/TUNING (EDIT) to turn off the colon

(:) and then press PRESET/TUNING l to begin

tuning toward lower frequencies.

Memory back-up

The memory back-up circuit prevents the stored data

from being lost even if this unit is set in the standby

mode, the power cord is disconnected from the AC

outlet, or the power supply is temporarily cut due to

power failure. However, if the power is cut for more

than one week, the preset stations may be cleared. If

so, store the stations again.

FM/AM

0107V630_34-39_EN(U) 12/27/01, 7:47 PM35

TUNING

■ Manually presetting stations

You can also store up to 40 stations (8 stations x 5

groups) manually.

1 Tune in to a station.

See page 34 for tuning instructions.

When tuned in to a station, the front panel display

shows the frequency of received station.

2 Press MEMORY (MAN’L/AUTO FM).

The “MEMORY” indicator flashes for about

5 seconds.

3 Press A/B/C/D/E repeatedly to select a preset

station group (A to E) while the “MEMORY”

indicator is flashing.

The group letter appears and make sure that the

colon (:) appears on the front panel display.

MEMORY

MAN'L/AUTO FM

MEMORY

A/B/C/D/E

C :AM 63O kHz

TUNED

MEMORY

VOLUME

VCR

V-AUX

DVD

TUNER CD

TV/CBL

MD/CD

VCR2/DVR

4 3 2,5

NATURAL SOUND AV RECEIVER

SPEAKERS

SILENT

PHONES

STANDBY

STEREO

EFFECT

PROGRAM

PRESET

TUNING

A/B/C/D/E

BASS

– + – +

TREBLE

VIDEO AUX

S VIDEO VIDEO AUDIO OPTICALLR

MEMORY

FM/AM

EDIT

PRESET/TUNING

MAN'L/AUTO FM

AUTO/MAN'L MONO

TUNING MODE

VOLUME

INPUT

INPUT M0DE

6CH INPUT

Shows the displayed station has been stored as C3.

Flashes

4 Press PRESET/TUNING l / h to select a

preset station number (1 to 8) while the

“MEMORY” indicator is flashing.

Press h to select a higher preset station number.

Press l to select a lower preset station number.

5 Press MEMORY (MAN’L/AUTO FM) on the

front panel while the “MEMORY” indicator is

flashing.

The station band and

frequency appear on the front

panel display with the preset

group and number you have

selected.

6 Repeat steps 1 to 5 to store other stations.

Notes

• Any stored station data existing under a preset number is

cleared when you store a new station under that preset number.

• The reception mode (stereo or monaural) is stored along with

the station frequency.

A AM 63O kHz

TUNED

VOLUME

VCR

V-AUX

DVD

TUNER CD

TV/CBL

MD/CD

VCR2/DVR

PRESET

TUNING

C3:AM 63O kHz

TUNED

MEMORY

VOLUME

VCR

V-AUX

DVD

TUNER CD

TV/CBL

MD/CD

VCR2/DVR

MEMORY

MAN'L/AUTO FM

C3:AM 63O kHz

TUNED

VOLUME

VCR

V-AUX

DVD

TUNER CD

TV/CBL

MD/CD

VCR2/DVR

0107V630_34-39_EN(U) 12/27/01, 7:47 PM36

English

INTRODUCTION

PREPARATION

BASIC

OPERATION

ADVANCED

OPERATION

ADDITIONAL

INFORMATION

APPENDIX

TUNING

Exchanging preset stations

You can exchange the assignment of two preset stations.

The example below describes the procedure for

exchanging preset station “E1” with “A5”.

1 Tune in to preset station “E1” by using the

A/B/C/D/E and PRESET/TUNING l / h.

See “Tuning in to a preset station” at left.

2 Press and hold PRESET/TUNING (EDIT) for

more than 3 seconds.

“E1” and the “MEMORY” indicator flash on the

front panel display.

3 Tune in to preset station “A5” by using the

A/B/C/D/E and PRESET/TUNING l / h.

“A5” and the “MEMORY” indicator flash on the

front panel display.

4 Press PRESET/TUNING (EDIT) again.

The stations stored at the two preset assignments are

exchanged.

Tuning in to a preset station

You can tune any desired station simply by selecting the

preset station number under which it was stored.

1 Press A/B/C/D/E (A/B/C/D/E on the remote

control) to select the preset station group.

The preset group letter appears on the front panel

display and changes each time you press A/B/C/D/E.

2 Press PRESET/TUNING l / h (PRESET

u / d on the remote control) to select a

preset station number (1 to 8).

The preset group and number appear on the front

panel display along with the station band, frequency

and the “TUNED” indicator lights up.

EDIT

PRESET/TUNING

SELECT

PRESET/CH

–

PRESET

TUNING

A/B/C/D/E

SET MENU

A/B/C/D/E

A5:FM 9O.6 MHz

TUNED

MEMORY

VOLUME

VCR

V-AUX

DVD

TUNER CD

TV/CBL

MD/CD

VCR2/DVR

EDIT E1-A5

MEMORY

VCR

V-AUX

DVD

TUNER CD

TV/CBL

MD/CD

VCR2/DVR

Shows the exchange of stations has

been completed.

Front panel

Remote control

Front panel

Remote control

NATURAL SOUND AV RECEIVER

SPEAKERS

SILENT

PHONES

STANDBY

STEREO

EFFECT

PROGRAM

PRESET

TUNING

A/B/C/D/E

BASS

– + – +

TREBLE

VIDEO AUX

S VIDEO VIDEO AUDIO OPTICALLR

MEMORY

FM/AM

EDIT

PRESET/TUNING

MAN'L/AUTO FM

AUTO/MAN'L MONO

TUNING MODE

VOLUME

INPUT

INPUT M0DE

6CH INPUT

REC

DISC SKIP

SET MENU

SELECT

PRESET/CH

A/B/C/D/E

AUDIO

LEVEL

TEST

EFFECT

RETURN

DISPLAY

TITLE

–

NATURAL SOUND AV RECEIVER

SPEAKERS

SILENT

PHONES

STANDBY

STEREO

EFFECT

PROGRAM

PRESET

TUNING

A/B/C/D/E

BASS

– + – +

TREBLE

VIDEO AUX

S VIDEO VIDEO AUDIO OPTICALLR

MEMORY

FM/AM

EDIT

PRESET/TUNING

MAN'L/AUTO FM

AUTO/MAN'L MONO

TUNING MODE

VOLUME

INPUT

INPUT M0DE

6CH INPUT

2,41,3 1,3

EDIT

PRESET/TUNING

E1:FM 87.5 MHz

TUNED

MEMORY

VCR

V-AUX

DVD

TUNER CD

TV/CBL

MD/CD

VCR2/DVR

E1:FM 87.5 MHz

TUNED

VCR

V-AUX

DVD

TUNER CD

TV/CBL

MD/CD

VCR2/DVR

0107V630_34-39_EN(U) 12/27/01, 7:47 PM37

Use this feature to automatically set this unit in the

standby mode after the amount of time you have set. The

sleep timer is useful when you are going to sleep while

this unit is playing or recording a source. The sleep timer

also automatically turns off the external component(s)

connected to AC OUTLET(S).

The sleep timer can only be set with the remote control.

• By connecting a commercially available timer to this unit, you

can also set a wake-up timer. Refer to the operation instructions

of the timer.

Setting the sleep timer

1 Select a source and start playback on the

source component.

2 Press SLEEP repeatedly

to set the amount of time.

Each time you press SLEEP,

the front panel display changes

as shown below.

SLEEP

POWER

SLEEP

CODE SET

STANDBY

TRANSMIT

6CH INPUT

SYSTEM

AUX

TV/CBL

TV INPUTTV MUTE

VOLUME

MUTE

AMP

POWER POWER

AVTV

VCR 1 VCR2/DVR

DVD

MD/CD-R TUNERCD

–

TV CHTV VOL

SLEEP 12Omin

DSP

PCM

SLEEP

VOLUME

VCR

V-AUX

DVD

TUNER CD

TV/CBL

MD/CD

VCR2/DVR

CONCERT HALL

DSP

PCM

SLEEP

VOLUME

VCR

V-AUX

DVD

TUNER CD

TV/CBL

MD/CD

VCR2/DVR

SLEEP TIMER

3 The “SLEEP” indicator lights up on the front

panel display soon after the sleep timer has

been set.

The display then returns to the previous indication.

Canceling the sleep timer

1 Press SLEEP repeatedly until “SLEEP OFF”

appears on the front panel display.

After a few seconds, “SLEEP OFF” disappears, the

“SLEEP” indicator goes off and the display returns

to the previous indication.

• The sleep timer setting can also be canceled by setting this unit

in the standby mode by using STANDBY on the remote control

(or STANDBY/ON on the front panel) or by disconnecting the

AC power cord from the AC outlet.

0107V630_34-39_EN(U) 12/27/01, 7:47 PM38

English

INTRODUCTION

PREPARATION

BASIC

OPERATION

ADVANCED

OPERATION

ADDITIONAL

INFORMATION

APPENDIX

INPUT

POWER

SLEEP

CODE SET

STANDBY

TRANSMIT

6CH INPUT

SYSTEM

AUX

TV/CBL

TV INPUTTV MUTE

VOLUME

MUTE

AMP

POWER POWER

AVTV

VCR 1 VCR2/DVR

DVD

MD/CD-R TUNERCD

–

TV CHTV VOL

HALL

ENTER-

TAINMENT

ROCK

CONCERT

JAZZ CLUB

SLEEP

6CH INPUT

AUX

TV/CBL

AMP

VCR 1 VCR2/DVR

DVD

MD/CD-R TUNERCD

Front panel Remote control

RECORDING

Notes

• Do a test recording before you start an actual recording.

• When this unit is set in the standby mode, you cannot record

between the components connected to this unit.

• The setting of BASS, TREBLE, VOLUME, “5 L/R

BALANCE” on the SET MENU and DSP programs does not

effect the recorded material.

• A source connected to the 6CH INPUT jacks on this unit

cannot be recorded.

• A given input source is not output to the same OUT (REC)

channel. (For example, the signal input from VCR 1 IN is not

output to VCR 1 OUT.)

• Check the copyright laws in your country to record from

records, CDs, radio, etc. Recording of copyrighted material

may infringe copyright laws.

If you playback a video source that uses scrambled or

encoded signals to prevent it from being dubbed, the

picture itself may be disturbed due to those signals.

■ Special considerations when

recording DTS software

The DTS signal is a digital bitstream. Attempting to

digitally record the DTS bitstream will result in noise

being recorded. Therefore, if you want to use this unit to

record sources that have DTS signals recorded on them,

the following considerations and adjustments need to be

made.

For LDs, DVDs and CDs encoded with DTS, when your

player is compatible with the DTS format, follow its

operation instruction to make a setting so that the analog

signal will be output from the player.

■ Timer playback/recording

This unit can perform playback or recording with an

external timer (not supplied). Refer to the operating

instructions for the component and the timer to be used.

Notes

• Stored data, such as input source, will be reflected when

playback or recording with the timer.

• If you do not want any sound output when recording with a

timer, turn the volume down.

Memory back-up

The memory back-up circuit prevents the stored data

(input source, volume level, set menu settings and so

on) from being lost even if this unit is disconnected

from the AC outlet. However, if the timer is turned off

for more than one week, the stored data will be lost.

NATURAL SOUND AV RECEIVER

SPEAKERS

SILENT

PHONES

STANDBY

STEREO

EFFECT

PROGRAM

PRESET

TUNING

A/B/C/D/E

BASS

– + – +

TREBLE

VIDEO AUX

S VIDEO VIDEO AUDIO OPTICALLR

MEMORY

FM/AM

EDIT

PRESET/TUNING

MAN'L/AUTO FM

AUTO/MAN'L MONO

TUNING MODE

VOLUME

INPUT

INPUT M0DE

6CH INPUT

Recording adjustments and other operations are

performed from the recording components. Refer to the

operation instructions for these components.

1 Turn on the power of this unit and all

connected component.

2 Select the source component you want to

record from.

3 Start playback (or select a broadcast station)

on the source component.

4 Start recording on the recording component.

0107V630_34-39_EN(U) 12/27/01, 7:47 PM39

SELECT

PRESET/CH

–

Adjusting the items on the SET

Adjustment should be made with the remote control.

Note

• Some items require extra steps.

1 Press AMP.

2 Press SET MENU to enter

the SET MENU.

3 Press u/d repeatedly to

select the item you want

to adjust (1 to 10).

• By pressing SET MENU repeatedly, you can select items in the

same order as when pressing d.

4 Press j / i once to enter

the setup mode of the

selected item.

The last setting you adjusted

appears on the front panel

display.

Depending on the item, press

u/d to select a sub item.

AMP

SET MENU

ADVANCED OPERATION

REC

DISC SKIP

SET MENU

SELECT

PRESET/CH

TV INPUTTV MUTE

A/B/C/D/E

AUDIO

VOLUME

LEVEL

TEST

STEREO

EFFECT

RETURN

DISPLAY

TITLE

MUTE

AMP

VCR 1 VCR2/DVR

–

TV CHTV VOL

–

HALL

ENTER-

TAINMENT

SPORTS

MONO

MOVIE

SELECT

EX/ES

MOVIE

THEATER 1

MOVIE

THEATER 2

/DTS

SUR.

ROCK

CONCERT

JAZZ CLUB

3421

ENTER

+10

67 8

3,6

4,5

The SET MENU consists of 10 items including the

speaker mode setting. Choose the appropriate item and

adjust or select the values as necessary.

• You can adjust the items on the SET MENU while playing a

source.

Items Initial settings

1 SPEAKER SET

A CENTER LRG (large)

B MAIN LARGE

C REAR LR LRG (large)

D REAR CT LRG (large)

E BASS BOTH

F MAIN Lv Nrm (Normal)

2 LFE LEVEL SP/HP 0 dB

3 SP DLY TIME

CENTER 0 ms

REAR CNTR 3 ms

4 D. RANGE SP/HP MAX

5 L/R BALANCE 0 dB for L/R

HP TONE CTRL BASS/TRBL

0 dB

7 I/O ASSIGN

A (component video input) [A] DVD

[B] D-TV/CBL

B (optical output) (1) MD/CDR

C (optical input) (2) MD/CDR

(3) DVD

(4) D-TV/CBL

D (coaxial input) (5) CD

8 INPUT MODE AUTO

9 DISPLAY SET

DIMMER 0

10 MEM. GUARD OFF

• In the descriptions for each item from the following page, the

default setting is indicated in bold.

SET MENU

A/B/C/D/E

SELECT

PRESET/CH

–

SELECT

PRESET/CH

–

0108V630_40-45_EN(U) 12/27/01, 7:47 PM40

English

INTRODUCTION

PREPARATION

BASIC OPERA-

TION

ADVANCED

OPERATION

ADDITIONAL

INFORMATION

APPENDIX

SET MENU

5 Press j / i repeatedly to

change the setting of the

item.

6 Press u/d repeatedly until the menu

disappears or simply press one of the DSP

program group buttons to exit SET MENU.

SELECT

PRESET/CH

–

SELECT

PRESET/CH

–

STEREO

EFFECT

HALL

ENTER-

TAINMENT

SPORTS

MONO

MOVIE

SELECT

EX/ES

MOVIE

THEATER 1

MOVIE

THEATER 2

/DTS

SUR.

ROCK

CONCERT

JAZZ CLUB

3421

ENTER

+10

67 8

1 SPEAKER SET (speaker mode

settings)

Use this feature to select suitable output modes for your

speaker configuration.

Notes

• When 96-kHz sampling digital signals are input to this unit,

some items are not affected.

• When 6CH INPUT is selected as the input source, level

adjustments in items 1A through 1E are not affected.

■ 1A CENTER (center speaker

mode)

By adding a center speaker to your speaker configuration,

this unit can provide better dialog localization for several

listeners and superior synchronization of sound and

images.

Choices: LRG (large), SML (small), NON (none)

LRG

Select this if you have a large center speaker. The entire

range of the center channel signal is directed to the center

speaker.

SML

Select this if you have a small center speaker. The low-

frequency signals (90 Hz and below) of the center

channel are directed to the speakers selected with “1E

BASS”.

NON

Select this if you do not have a center speaker. All of the

center channel signal are directed to the main left and

right speakers.

Memory back-up

The memory back-up circuit prevents the stored data

from being lost even if this unit is in the standby

mode. However, if the power cord is disconnected

from the AC outlet, or the power supply is cut for

more than one week, the stored data will be lost. If

so, adjust the items again.

0108V630_40-45_EN(U) 12/27/01, 7:47 PM41

SET MENU

■ 1B MAIN (main speaker mode)

Choices: LARGE, SMALL

LARGE

Select this if you have large main speakers. The entire

range of the main left and right channel signal is directed

to the main left and right speakers.

SMALL

Select this if you have small main speakers. The low-

frequency signals (90 Hz and below) of the main channel

are directed to the speakers selected with “1E BASS”.

■ 1C REAR LR (rear speaker mode)

Choices: LRG (large), SML (small), NON (none)

LRG

Select this if you have large rear left and right speakers or

if a rear subwoofer is connected to the rear speakers. The

entire range of the rear channel signal is directed to the

rear left and right speakers.

SML

Select this if you have small rear left and right speakers.

The low-frequency signals (90 Hz and below) of the rear

channel are directed to the speakers selected with “1E

BASS”.

NON

Select this if you do not have rear speakers.

• This unit is set in the virtual CINEMA DSP mode when you

select NON for “1C REAR LR”. In this case, the rear center

speaker will automatically be set to “NON” and the “1D REAR

CT” item will be skipped.

■ 1D REAR CT (rear center speaker

mode)

By adding a rear center speaker to your speaker

configuration, this unit can provide more realistic front-

to-back and transitions.

Choices: LRG (large), SML (small), NON (none)

LRG

Select this if you have a large rear center speaker. The

entire range of the rear center channel signal is directed to

the rear center speaker.

SML

Select this if you have a small rear center speaker. The

low-frequency signals (90 Hz and below) of the rear

center channel are directed to the speakers selected with

“1E BASS”.

NON

Select this if you do not have a rear center speaker. All of

the rear center channel signal are directed to the rear left

and right speakers.

■ 1E BASS (LFE/bass out mode)

LFE signals carry low-frequency effects when this unit

decodes a Dolby Digital or DTS signal. Low-frequency

signals are defined as 90 Hz and below. The Low-

frequency signals can be directed to both main left and

right speakers, and the subwoofer (subwoofer can be used

for both stereo reproduction and the DSP program).

Choices: SWFR (subwoofer), MAIN, BOTH

SWFR

Select this if you use a subwoofer. The LFE signals are

directed to the subwoofer.

MAIN

Select this if you do not use a subwoofer. The LFE

signals are directed to the main speakers.

BOTH

The LFE signals are directed to the subwoofer. Low-

frequency signals designated to the main channels in

accordance with other speaker mode settings are directed

to both main speakers and a subwoofer.

Note

• When you select MAIN for “1E BASS”, the low-frequency

signals (90 Hz and below) of the main channel are directed to

the main speakers even if you select SMALL for the main

speaker mode.

0108V630_40-45_EN(U) 12/27/01, 7:47 PM42

English

INTRODUCTION

PREPARATION

BASIC OPERA-

TION

ADVANCED

OPERATION

ADDITIONAL

INFORMATION

APPENDIX

SET MENU

3 SP DLY TIME (speaker delay

time)

Use this feature to adjust the delay of the center and the

rear center channel sounds. This feature works when there

is sound output from the center speakers, with a source

like Dolby Digital or DTS, etc. Ideally, the center speaker

and the rear center speaker should be the same distance

from the main listening position as the left and right

speakers. However, in most home situations, the center

speaker or the rear center speaker are placed in line with

the main speakers or the rear speakers. By delaying the

sound from the center speaker and the rear center speaker,

the apparent distance from the center speaker and the rear

center speaker to the main listening position can be

adjusted to make it seem the same as the distance

between the main left and right speaker, and the rear left

and right speakers to the listening position. Adjusting the

delay time for the center speaker is especially important

for giving depth to the dialogue.

Control range:

CENTER .......................... 0 to 5 ms

REAR CNTR (center) ...... 0 to 30 ms

Initial setting:

CENTER .......................... 0 ms

REAR CNTR (center) ...... 3 ms

1 Press j / i to increase or decrease the delay

of the center and the rear center channel

sounds.

Center speaker image

• Increasing the delay by 1 ms simulates moving the speakers

about 30 cm (one foot) farther away from the listening

position.

■ 1F MAIN Lv (main level mode)

Change this setting if you cannot match the output level

of the center, rear (L/R), and rear center speakers with the

main speakers because of unusually high-efficiency

performance from the main speakers.

Choices: Nrm (Normal), –10 dB

Nrm

Select this if you can match the output level of your effect

speakers with that of your main speakers when using the

test tone.

–10 dB

Select this if you cannot match the output level of your

effect speakers with that of your main speakers when

using the test tone.

2 LFE LEVEL

Use this feature to adjust the output level of the LFE

(low-frequency effect) channel when playing back a

Dolby Digital or DTS signal. The LFE signal carries the

low-frequency special effect sound which is only added to

certain scenes.

Control range:

SPEAKER ............ –20 to 0 dB

HEADPHONE ..... –20 to 0 dB

Initial setting: 0 dB

1 Press d/u to select the item to be adjusted.

2 Press j to adjust the LFE level.

Note

• Adjust the LFE level according to the capacity of your

subwoofer or headphones.

0108V630_40-45_EN(U) 12/27/01, 7:47 PM43

SET MENU

7 I/O ASSIGN (input/output

assignment)

It is possible to assign jacks according to the component

to be used if this unit’s COMPONENT VIDEO input jack

or DIGITAL INPUT/OUTPUT jack settings (component

names for jacks) differ from that component. This makes

it possible to change the jack assignment and effectively

connect more components.

Once you assign, you can select that component with

INPUT l / h (or the input selector buttons on the

remote control).

■ 7A CMPNT-V INPUT for

COMPONENT VIDEO INPUT jacks

[A] and [B]

Choices: [A] DVD, V-AUX, VCR 2/DVR, VCR 1,

D-TV/CBL

[B] DVD, V-AUX, VCR 2/DVR, VCR 1,

D-TV/CBL

■ 7B OPTICAL OUT for OPTICAL

OUTPUT jack (1)

Choices: (1) MD/CD-R, CD, V-AUX, VCR 2/

DVR, VCR 1, D-TV/CBL, DVD

■ 7C OPTICAL IN for OPTICAL

INPUT jacks (2) to (4)

Choices: (2) MD/CD-R, CD, VCR 2/DVR, VCR 1,

D-TV/CBL, DVD

(3) MD/CD-R, CD, VCR 2/DVR, VCR 1,

D-TV/CBL, DVD

(4) MD/CD-R, CD, VCR 2/DVR, VCR 1,

D-TV/CBL, DVD

■ 7D COAXIAL IN for COAXIAL

INPUT jack (5)

Choices: (5) MD/CD-R, CD, V-AUX, VCR 2/

DVR, VCR 1, D-TV/CBL, DVD

Notes

• You cannot select an item more than once for the same type of

jack.

• When you connect a component to both the COAXIAL and

OPTICAL jacks, priority is given to the input signals from the

COAXIAL jack.

4 D. RANGE (dynamic range)

Use this feature to adjust the dynamic range. This setting

is effective only when this unit is decoding Dolby Digital

signals.

Choices: MAX, STD (standard), MIN (minimum)

MAX

Select the “MAX” for feature films.

STD

Select the “STD” for general use.

MIN

Select the “MIN” for listening to sources at low volume

levels.

5 L/R BALANCE (balance of the

main left and right speakers)

Use this feature to adjust the balance of the output level

from the main left and right speakers.

Control range: 20 steps for L/R

Initial setting: 0 dB for L/R

1 Press i to decrease the output level for the

main left speaker. Press j for the main right

speaker.

6 HP TONE CTRL (headphone tone

control)

Use this feature to adjust the level of the bass and treble

when you use your headphones.

Control range (dB):

BASS ............... –6 to +3

TRBL (treble) .. –6 to +3

Initial setting:

BASS ............... 0 dB

TRBL............... 0 dB

0108V630_40-45_EN(U) 12/27/01, 7:47 PM44

English

INTRODUCTION

PREPARATION

BASIC OPERA-

TION

ADVANCED

OPERATION

ADDITIONAL

INFORMATION

APPENDIX

SET MENU

8 INPUT MODE (initial input

mode)

Use this feature to designate the input mode for sources

connected to the DIGITAL INPUT jacks when you turn

on this unit (see page 25 for details about the input

mode).

Choices: AUTO, LAST

AUTO

Select this to allow this unit to automatically detect the

type of input signal and select the appropriate input mode.

LAST

Select this to set this unit to automatically select the last

input mode used for the respective source.

9 DISPLAY SET

■ DIMMER

You can adjust the brightness of the front panel display.

Control range: –4 to 0

Initial setting: 0

10 MEM. GUARD (memory guard)

Use this feature to prevent accidental changes to settings

on this unit.

Choices: ON, OFF

Select ON to protect the following features:

• All SET MENU items

• Center, rear speakers, rear center, and subwoofer

levels

• DSP program parameters

Notes

• When this item is set to ON, you cannot use the test tone.

• When this item is set to ON, you cannot select any other SET

MENU items.

0108V630_40-45_EN(U) 12/27/01, 7:47 PM45

REMOTE CONTROL FEATURES

In addition to controlling this unit, the remote control can operate other A/V components made by YAMAHA and other

manufacturers. To control other components, you must set up the remote control with the manufacturer codes.

Control area

■ Controlling this unit

The shaded areas below can be used to control this unit

when the AMP mode is selected. Press AMP to select the

AMP mode.

■ Controlling other component

The shaded areas below can be used to control other

components. Each button has a different function

depending on the selected components. Select the

component to be controlled by pressing an input selector

button.

POWER

SLEEP

CODE SET

STANDBY

TRANSMIT

6CH INPUT

SYSTEM

AUX

TV/CBL

REC

DISC SKIP

SET MENU

SELECT

PRESET/CH

TV INPUTTV MUTE

A/B/C/D/E

AUDIO

VOLUME

LEVEL

TEST

STEREO

EFFECT

RETURN

DISPLAY

TITLE

MUTE

AMP

POWER POWER

AVTV

VCR 1 VCR2/DVR

DVD

MD/CD-R TUNERCD

–

TV CHTV VOL

–

HALL

ENTER-

TAINMENT

SPORTS

MONO

MOVIE

SELECT

EX/ES

MOVIE

THEATER 1

MOVIE

THEATER 2

/DTS

SUR.

ROCK

CONCERT

JAZZ CLUB

3421

ENTER

+10

67 8

Å button and input selector

buttons switch the control area

for each component.

* Å button is to operate the

other components that are not

connected to this unit.

Factory setting:

Å...VCR

Component control area

You can control up to 9 different components. You can set up

manufacturer code and program other remote control functions for

each component (see page 48).

Å button and

input selector

buttons

The buttons in the

dotted lines

(SYSTEM

POWER,

STANDBY,

SLEEP, 6CH

INPUT, VOLUME

+/– and MUTE)

function in any

mode.

POWER

SLEEP

CODE SET

STANDBY

TRANSMIT

6CH INPUT

SYSTEM

AUX

TV/CBL

VOLUME

MUTE

AMP

POWER POWER

AVTV

VCR 1 VCR2/DVR

DVD

MD/CD-R TUNERCD

–

REC

DISC SKIP

SET MENU

SELECT

PRESET/CH

TV INPUTTV MUTE

A/B/C/D/E

AUDIO

LEVEL

TEST

STEREO

EFFECT

RETURN

DISPLAY

TITLE

–

TV CHTV VOL

–

HALL

ENTER-

TAINMENT

SPORTS

MONO

MOVIE

SELECT

EX/ES

MOVIE

THEATER 1

MOVIE

THEATER 2

/DTS

SUR.

ROCK

CONCERT

JAZZ CLUB

3421

ENTER

+10

67 8

Press AMP to

control this unit.

0109V630_46-51_EN(U) 12/27/01, 7:47 PM46

English

INTRODUCTION

PREPARATION

BASIC OPERA-

TION

ADVANCED

OPERATION

ADDITIONAL

INFORMATION

APPENDIX

REMOTE CONTROL FEATURES

3 Press the numeric buttons to enter the four

digit manufacturer’s code for the component

to be used.

Refer to “LIST OF MANUFACTURER’S CODES”

at the end of this manual.

The TRANSMIT indicator flashes twice.

Notes

• If the manufacturer of your component has more than one

code, try each of them until you find the correct one.

• If you wait for more than 30 seconds during step 3, the setup

process is canceled. If this happens, start over from step 2.

Setting the manufacturer code

You can control other components by setting a

manufacturer code. Codes can be set for each of the 9

component controls.

The following table shows factory-set component

(Library: component category) and the manufacturer code

for each component control.

1 Press an input selector button or Å to select

the component you want to set up.

2 Press CODE SET using a ballpoint pen or

similar object.

The TRANSMIT indicator flashes twice.

SLEEP

6CH INPUT

AUX

TV/CBL

AMP

VCR 1 VCR2/DVR

DVD

MD/CD-R TUNERCD

CODE SET

Component

control

(buttons)

MD/CD-R

TUNER

DVD

D-TV/CBL

V-AUX

VCR 1

VCR 2/DVR

Component category

(Library)

TUNER

DVD

–

Manufacturer

YAMAHA

–

TRANSMIT

STEREO

EFFECT

HALL

ENTER-

TAINMENT

SPORTS

MONO

MOVIE

SELECT

EX/ES

MOVIE

THEATER 1

MOVIE

THEATER 2

/DTS

SUR.

ROCK

CONCERT

JAZZ CLUB

3421

ENTER

+10

67 8

Code

0005

0024

0003

0098

–

Clearing setup manufacturer

codes

■ Clearing setup manufacturer

code for the component control

1 Press an input selector button or Å to select

the component control for which you want to

clear the manufacturer code.

2 Press CODE SET by using a ballpoint pen or

similar object.

The TRANSMIT indicator flashes twice.

Note

• If you do not press any button within 30 seconds after step 2,

the clearing process is canceled. If this happens, start over from

step 1.

3 Enter the code number “0000”.

The TRANSMIT indicator flashes twice, and the

manufacturer code for the selected component is

cleared.

• You can clear all setup manufacturer codes at once by entering

the code number “9990”.

POWER

SLEEP

STANDBY

6CH INPUT

SYSTEM

AUX

TV/CBL

AMP

POWER POWER

AVTV

VCR 1 VCR2/DVR

DVD

MD/CD-R TUNERCD

CODE SET

TRANSMIT

0109V630_46-51_EN(U) 12/27/01, 7:47 PM47

REMOTE CONTROL FEATURES

Controlling other components

DVD player VCR TV, digital/cable TV CD player CD/MD recorder Tuner

1 AV POWER *

Power *

VCR power *

Power *

Power

2 TV POWER *

TV power *

TV power

3 TV CH + *

TV channel up *

TV channel up TV channel up *

TV channel up *

TV channel up

TV CH – *

TV channel down

TV channel down TV channel down

TV channel down

4 TV VOL + *

TV volume up *

TV volume up TV volume up *

TV volume up *

TV volume up

TV VOL – *

TV volume down

TV volume down TV volume down

TV volume down

5 TV MUTE *

TV mute *

TV mute TV mute *

TV mute *

TV mute

6 TV INPUT *

TV input *

TV input TV input *

TV input *

TV input

7 1-9, 0, +10

Numeric buttons Numeric buttons Numeric buttons Numeric buttons Numeric buttons Preset stations (1-8)

8 TITLE Title

9 PRESET/CH u Up VCR channel up Preset up

PRESET/CH d Down

VCR channel down

Preset down

PRESET/CH j Left

PRESET/CH i Right

SELECT Select

0 RETURN Return

REC/DISC SKIP

Disc skip Rec *

VCR rec Disc skip Rec (MD)

w Play Play *

VCR play Play Play

Search backward Search backward

VCR search backward

Search backward Search backward

r Search forward Search forward *

VCR search forward

Search forward Search forward

AUDIO Audio

d Pause Pause *

VCR pause Pause Pause

t Skip backward Skip backward Skip backward

y Skip forward Skip forward Skip forward

a Stop Stop *

VCR stop Stop Stop

w ENTER Title/Index Enter Enter Index Index

e MENU Menu A/B/C/D/E

r DISPLAY Display Display Display

You can operate other components when you have set the

manufacturer code for your component. Note, however,

that some buttons may not operate your component.

Once you select an input source, the remote control

switches to the mode for operating the component.

POWER

SLEEP

CODE SET

STANDBY

TRANSMIT

6CH INPUT

SYSTEM

AUX

TV/CBL

TV INPUTTV MUTE

VOLUME

MUTE

AMP

POWER POWER

AVTV

VCR 1 VCR2/DVR

DVD

MD/CD-R TUNERCD

–

TV CHTV VOL

HALL

ENTER-

TAINMENT

ROCK

CONCERT

JAZZ CLUB

3421

REC

DISC SKIP

SET MENU

SELECT

PRESET/CH

TV INPUTTV MUTE

A/B/C/D/E

AUDIO

LEVEL

TEST

STEREO

EFFECT

RETURN

DISPLAY

TITLE

MUTE

–

HALL

ENTER-

TAINMENT

SPORTS

MONO

MOVIE

SELECT

EX/ES

MOVIE

THEATER 1

MOVIE

THEATER 2

/DTS

SUR.

ROCK

CONCERT

JAZZ CLUB

3421

ENTER

+10

67 8

This button functions only when the original remote control of the component has POWER button.

These buttons can operate your TV without switching the input if the manufacturer code is set in D-TV/CBL.

These buttons can operate your VCR without switching the input to VCR if the manufacturer code is set in VCR.

0109V630_46-51_EN(U) 12/27/01, 7:47 PM48

English

INTRODUCTION

PREPARATION

BASIC OPERA-

TION

ADVANCED

OPERATION

ADDITIONAL

INFORMATION

APPENDIX

You can adjust the output level of each effect speaker

(center, rear left and right, rear center and subwoofer)

while listening to a source.

Adjustment should be made with the remote control.

1 Press AMP.

(While playing a source)

2 Press LEVEL repeatedly to select the

speaker(s) you want to adjust.

Each time you press LEVEL, the selected speaker

changes and appears on the front panel display as

follows: center, rear right, rear center, rear left and

subwoofer.

LEVEL

TITLE

AMP

REC

DISC SKIP

SET MENU

SELECT

PRESET/CH

A/B/C/D/E

AUDIO

LEVEL

TEST

STEREO

EFFECT

RETURN

DISPLAY

TITLE

MUTE

–

HALL

ENTER-

TAINMENT

SPORTS

MONO

MOVIE

SELECT

EX/ES

MOVIE

THEATER 1

MOVIE

THEATER 2

/DTS

SUR.

ROCK

CONCERT

JAZZ CLUB

3421

ENTER

+10

67 8

POWER

SLEEP

CODE SET

STANDBY

TRANSMIT

6CH INPUT

SYSTEM

AUX

TV/CBL

TV INPUTTV MUTE

VOLUME

MUTE

AMP

POWER POWER

AVTV

VCR 1 VCR2/DVR

DVD

MD/CD-R TUNERCD

–

TV CHTV VOL

HALL

ENTER-

TAINMENT

ROCK

CONCERT

JAZZ CLUB

SELECT

PRESET/CH

–

SELECT

PRESET/CH

–

LEVEL

TITLE

ADJUSTING THE LEVEL OF THE EFFECT SPEAKERS

• Once you press LEVEL, you can also select the speaker(s) to

be adjusted by pressing d / u.

Center speaker output level

Subwoofer output level

Rear left speaker output

level

Rear right speaker output

level

3 Press j / i to adjust the speaker output level.

• The control range for the center or rear left and

right speakers is from +10 dB to –10 dB.

• The control range for the subwoofer is from 0 dB

to –20 dB.

Notes

• When the speaker output modes for “1A CENTER” and “1C

REAR LR” are set to NON, and “1E BASS” to MAIN, the

output level of those speakers cannot be adjusted because there

is no sound coming from these speakers.

• When you adjust the output level with LEVEL, the settings you

made with the test tone will be changed.

• We recommend adjusting the speakers by following the steps

described in “Using the test tone” on pages 21 and 22.

■ For 6ch Stereo

You can adjust the volume level for each channel in 6-

channel stereo mode.

Control range: 0 to 100%

• CT level (Center level)

• RL level (Rear left level)

• RR level (Rear right level)

• RC level (Rear center level)

1 Select 6ch Stereo.

2 Press u / d repeatedly to select the

speaker(s) you want to adjust.

3 Press j / i to adjust the speaker output level.

Memory back-up

The memory back-up circuit prevents the stored data

from being lost even if this unit is in the standby

mode. However, if the power cord is disconnected

from the AC outlet, or the power supply is cut for

more than one week, the stored data will be lost. If so,

set the output level again.

Rear center speaker output

level

0109V630_46-51_EN(U) 12/27/01, 7:47 PM49

You can adjust the time difference between the beginning

of the sound from the main speakers and the beginning of

the sound effect from the rear speakers. The larger the

value, the later the sound effect is generated. The delay

time can be individually adjusted to all DSP programs.

The following table shows factory-set delay time.

AMP

SELECT

PRESET/CH

–

ADJUSTING THE DELAY TIME

Adjustment should be made with the remote control.

1 Press AMP.

(While playing a source)

2 Select a DSP program you want to adjust the

delay time.

3 Press u / d so that “DELAY” appears on the

front panel display.

4 Press j / i to adjust the delay time.

Notes

• Adding too much delay will cause an unnatural effect with

some sources.

• The sound is momentarily interrupted while adjusting the delay

time.

Memory back-up

The memory back-up circuit prevents the stored data

from being lost even if this unit is in the standby

mode. However, if the power cord is disconnected

from the AC outlet, or the power supply is cut for

more than one week, the stored data will be lost. If so,

adjust the delay time again.

Program

Preset value (ms)

1. CONCERT HALL 45

2. JAZZ CLUB 30

3. ROCK CONCERT 15

4. DISCO 26

GAME 36

CONCERT VIDEO 21

5. TV SPORTS 10

6. MONO MOVIE 69

7. 70 mm SPECTACLE 23

DGTL SPECTACLE 15

DTS SPECTACLE 15

Spectacle EX/ES 15

70 mm SCI-FI 20

Sci-Fi EX/ES 15

DGTL SCI-FI 15

DTS SCI-FI 15

8. 70 mm ADVENTURE 20

DGTL ADVENTURE 15

DTS ADVENTURE 15

Adventure EX/ES 15

70 mm GENERAL 20

DGTL GENERAL 15

DTS GENERAL 15

General EX/ES 15

9. PRO LOGIC/NORMAL 15

DOLBY DIGITAL/NORMAL 5

DTS DIGITAL SUR./NORMAL 5

Dolby D EX/DTS-ES 5

PRO LOGIC/ENHANCED 20

DOLBY DIGITAL/ENHANCED 5

DTS DIGITAL SUR./ENHANCED 5

Enhanced EX/ES 5

PRO LOGIC Movie 15

PRO LOGIC Music 5

DELAY

REC

DISC SKIP

SET MENU

SELECT

PRESET/CH

A/B/C/D/E

AUDIO

LEVEL

TEST

STEREO

EFFECT

RETURN

DISPLAY

TITLE

MUTE

–

HALL

ENTER-

TAINMENT

SPORTS

MONO

MOVIE

SELECT

EX/ES

MOVIE

THEATER 1

MOVIE

THEATER 2

/DTS

SUR.

ROCK

CONCERT

JAZZ CLUB

3421

ENTER

+10

67 8

POWER

SLEEP

CODE SET

STANDBY

TRANSMIT

6CH INPUT

SYSTEM

AUX

TV/CBL

TV INPUTTV MUTE

VOLUME

MUTE

AMP

POWER POWER

AVTV

VCR 1 VCR2/DVR

DVD

MD/CD-R TUNERCD

–

TV CHTV VOL

HALL

ENTER-

TAINMENT

ROCK

CONCERT

JAZZ CLUB

0109V630_46-51_EN(U) 12/27/01, 7:47 PM50

English

INTRODUCTION

PREPARATION

BASIC OPERA-

TION

ADVANCED

OPERATION

ADDITIONAL

INFORMATION

APPENDIX

Changing parameter settings

You can adjust the values of PRO LOGIC Music

parameters so the sound fields are recreated accurately in

your listening room.

Adjustments should be made with the remote control.

1 Press AMP.

2 Select PRO LOGIC Music.

3 Press u / d to select the

parameter.

4 Press j / i to change the

parameter value.

5 Repeat steps 3 and 4 above as necessary to

change other parameters.

AMP

SELECT

PRESET/CH

–

SELECT

PRESET/CH

–

SELECT

/DTS

SUR.

REC

DISC SKIP

SET MENU

SELECT

PRESET/CH

A/B/C/D/E

AUDIO

LEVEL

TEST

STEREO

EFFECT

RETURN

DISPLAY

TITLE

MUTE

–

HALL

ENTER-

TAINMENT

SPORTS

MONO

MOVIE

SELECT

EX/ES

MOVIE

THEATER 1

MOVIE

THEATER 2

/DTS

SUR.

ROCK

CONCERT

JAZZ CLUB

3421

ENTER

+10

67 8

POWER

SLEEP

CODE SET

STANDBY

TRANSMIT

6CH INPUT

SYSTEM

AUX

TV/CBL

TV INPUTTV MUTE

VOLUME

MUTE

AMP

POWER POWER

AVTV

VCR 1 VCR2/DVR

DVD

MD/CD-R TUNERCD

–

TV CHTV VOL

HALL

ENTER-

TAINMENT

ROCK

CONCERT

JAZZ CLUB

Note

• You cannot change parameter values when “10 MEM.

GUARD” on the SET MENU is set to ON.

Memory back-up

The memory back-up circuit prevents the stored data

from being lost even if this unit is set in the standby

mode, the power cord is disconnected from the AC

outlet, or the power supply is temporarily cut due to

power failure. However, if the power is cut for more

than one week, the parameter value you edited will

return to the factory setting. If so, edit the parameter

value again.

PRO LOGIC Music parameter

descriptions

■ PANORAMA

Function: Turning the function on extends the front

stereo image to include the surround

speakers for wraparound effect.

Choices: OFF/ON, initial setting is OFF.

■ DIMENSION

Function: Gradually adjusts the soundfield either

towards the front or towards the rear.

Control range: –3 (towards the rear) to +3 (towards the

front), initial setting is STD (standard).

■ CT WIDTH (Center width)

Function: Adjusts the center image from all three

front speakers to varying degrees. The

larger the value, adjusts the center image

towards the main left and right speakers.

Control range: 0 (center channel sound is output only

from center speaker) to 7 (center channel

sound is output only from main left and

right speakers), initial setting is 3.

ADJUSTING THE PARAMETER SETTINGS FOR PRO LOGIC MUSIC

0109V630_46-51_EN(U) 12/29/01, 3:52 PM51

TROUBLESHOOTING

Refer to the chart below when this unit does not function properly. If the problem you are experiencing is not listed

below or if the instruction below does not help, set this unit to the standby mode, disconnect the power cord, and

contact the nearest authorized YAMAHA dealer or service center.

■ General

Problem

This unit fails to turn

on when STANDBY/

ON (or SYSTEM

POWER) is pressed,

or enters in the

standby mode soon

after the power has

been turned on.

No sound.

The picture does not

appear.

Cause

The power cord is not connected or the

plug is not completely inserted.

The IMPEDANCE SELECTOR switch

on the rear panel is not fully set to either

the left or right position.

The protection circuitry has been

activated.

This unit has been exposed to a strong

external electric shock (such as lightning

and strong static electricity).

Incorrect input or output cable

connections.

An appropriate input source has not been

selected.

The speaker connections are not secure.

The main speakers to be used have not

been selected properly.

The volume is turned down.

The sound is muted.

Digital signals which this unit cannot

reproduce are being input to this unit by

playing a CD-ROM, etc.

The output and input for the picture are

connected to different types of video

jacks.

Remedy

Firmly connect the power cord.

Set the switch fully to the left or right position when

this unit is in the standby mode.

Make sure all speaker wire connections on this unit

and on all speakers are secure and that the wire for

each connection does not touch anything other than

its respective connection.

Set this unit in the standby mode, disconnect the

power cord, plug it back in after 30 seconds, then

start operating.

Connect the cables properly. If the problem persists,

the cables may be defective.

Select an appropriate input source with INPUT

l / h

or 6CH INPUT (or the input selector buttons).

Secure the connections.

Select the main speakers with SPEAKERS A and/or

Turn up the volume.

Press MUTE or any operation buttons of this unit to

cancel a mute and adjust the volume.

Play a source whose signals this unit can reproduce.

Make connections using the same type of video

jacks (S VIDEO, VIDEO (composite), or

COMPONENT VIDEO) for both the input and

output.

Refer

to page

—

10, 11

—

10 – 16

10, 11

—

14, 15

0110V630_52-58_EN(U) 12/27/01, 7:47 PM52

English

INTRODUCTION PREPARATION

BASIC

OPERAIONT

ADVANCED

OPERATION

ADDITIONAL

INFORMATION

APPENDIX

TROUBLESHOOTING

Problem

The sound suddenly

goes off.

Only the speaker on

one side can be

heard.

No sound from the

effect speakers.

No sound from the

center speaker.

No sound from the

rear speakers.

No sound from the

subwoofer.

Poor bass

reproduction.

Cause

The protection circuit has been activated

because of a short circuit, etc.

The sleep timer has functioned.

The sound is muted.

Incorrect cable connections.

Incorrect setting of “5 L/R BALANCE”

on the SET MENU.

The sound effect is off.

A Dolby Surround, Dolby Digital or

DTS decoding DSP program is being

used with material not encoded with

Dolby Surround, Dolby Digital or DTS.

A 96-kHz sampling digital signal is

being input to this unit.

The output level of the center speaker is

set to minimum.

“1A CENTER” on the SET MENU is set

to NON.

One of the Hi-Fi DSP programs (1 to 4)

has been selected (except for 6ch Stereo).

The source encoded with a Dolby Digital

or DTS signal does not have a center

channel signal.

The output level of the rear speakers is

set to minimum.

A monaural source is being played with

program 9.

“1E BASS” on the SET MENU is set to

MAIN when a Dolby Digital or DTS

signal is being played.

“1E BASS” on the SET MENU is set to

SWFR or MAIN when a 2-channel

source is being played.

The source does not contain low bass

signals (90 Hz and below).

“1E BASS” on the SET MENU is set to

SWFR or BOTH and your system does

not include a subwoofer.

The speaker mode settings (main, center,

rear, or rear center) on the SET MENU

does not match your speaker

configuration.

Remedy

Check the IMPEDANCE SELECTOR switch is set

to the appropriate position and then turn this unit

back on.

Check the speaker wires are not touching each other

and then turn this unit back on.

Turn on the power, and play the source again.

Press MUTE or any operation buttons of this unit to

cancel a mute and adjust the volume.

Connect the cables properly. If the problem persists,

the cables may be defective.

Adjust it to the appropriate position.

Press STEREO/EFFECT to turn it on.

Select another DSP program.

Raise the level of the center speaker.

Select the appropriate mode for your center speaker.

Select another DSP program.

Raise the output level of the rear speakers.

Select another DSP program.

Select SWFR or BOTH.

Select BOTH.

Select MAIN.

Select the appropriate position for each speaker

based on the size of the speakers in your

configuration.

Refer

to page

—

10, 11

26 – 33

—

26 – 33

—

26 – 33

—

41 – 43

0110V630_52-58_EN(U) 12/27/01, 7:47 PM53

TROUBLESHOOTING

Problem

No sound from the rear

center speaker.

A “humming” sound

can be heard.

The volume level

cannot be increased, or

the sound is distorted.

The sound effect

cannot be recorded.

A source cannot be

recorded by a digital

recording component

connected to the

DIGITAL OUTPUT jack

of this unit.

The sound field

parameters and some

other settings on this

unit cannot be

changed.

This unit does not

operate properly.

“CHECK SP WIRES”

appears on the front

panel display.

There is noise

interference from digital

or high-frequency

equipment, or this unit.

This unit suddenly

turns into the standby

mode.

Cause

“1C REAR LR” or “1D REAR CT” on

the SET MENU is set to NON.

The Dolby Digital EX decoder or the

DTS-ES compatible decoder is not on.

Incorrect cable connections.

The component connected to the OUT

(REC) jacks of this unit is turned off.

It is not possible to record the sound

effect by a recording component.

A source component is not connected to

the DIGITAL INPUT jacks of this unit.

“10 MEM. GUARD” in the SET MENU

is set to ON.

The internal microcomputer has been

frozen by an external electric shock (such

as lightning or excessive static electricity)

or by a power supply with low voltage.

Speaker cables are short circuited.

This unit is too close to the digital or

high-frequency equipment.

The internal temperature becomes too

high and the overheat protection circuitry

has been activated.

Remedy

Select LRG or SML.

Press the EX/ES button on the remote control to

turn it on.

Firmly connect the audio plugs. If the problem

persists, the cables may be defective.

Turn on the power to the component.

Connect the source component to the DIGITAL

INPUT jacks of this unit.

Set “10 MEM. GUARD” in the SET MENU to

OFF.

Disconnect the AC power cord from the outlet

and then plug it in again after about 30 seconds.

Make sure all speaker cables are connected

correctly.

Move this unit further away from such

equipment.

Wait until this unit cools down and then turn it

back on.

Refer

to page

10 – 16

—

0110V630_52-58_EN(U) 12/27/01, 7:47 PM54

English

INTRODUCTION PREPARATION

BASIC

OPERAIONT

ADVANCED

OPERATION

ADDITIONAL

INFORMATION

APPENDIX

TROUBLESHOOTING

■ Tuner

FM stereo reception is

noisy.

There is distortion, and

clear reception cannot

be obtained even with a

good FM antenna.

The desired station

cannot be tuned in with

the automatic tuning

method.

Previously preset

stations can no longer

be tuned in.

The desired station

cannot be tuned in with

the automatic tuning

method.

There are continuous

crackling and hissing

noises.

There are buzzing and

whining noises

(especially in the

evening).

Problem

Cause

The characteristics of FM stereo

broadcasts may cause this problem

when the transmitter is too far away or

the antenna input is poor.

There is multipath interference.

The station is too weak.

This unit has been disconnected for a

long period.

The signal is weak or the antenna

connections are loose.

Noises result from lightning,

fluorescent lamps, motors, thermostats

and other electrical equipment.

A TV set is being used nearby.

Remedy

Check the antenna connections.

Try using a high-quality directional FM

antenna.

Use the manual tuning method.

Adjust the antenna position to eliminate

multipath interference.

Use a high-quality directional FM antenna.

Use the manual tuning method.

Re-store the stations.

Tighten the AM loop antenna connections

and orient it for best reception.

Use the manual tuning method.

Use an outdoor antenna and a ground wire.

This will help somewhat, but it is difficult to

eliminate all noise.

Move this unit away from the TV.

Refer

to page

—

35, 36

—

■ Remote control

Problem

The remote control

does not work nor

function properly.

Cause

Wrong distance or angle.

Direct sunlight or lighting (from an

inverter type of fluorescent lamp, etc.) is

striking the remote control sensor of this

unit.

The batteries are weak.

The manufacture code has not correctly

set.

Even if the manufacturer code is

correctly set, there are some models that

do not respond to the remote control.

Remedy

The remote control will function within a

maximum range of 6 m (20 feet) and no more

than 30 degrees off-axis from the front panel.

Reposition this unit.

Replace all batteries with new ones.

Set the code correctly.

Try setting another code of the same

manufacturer.

Refer to

page

—

0110V630_52-58_EN(U) 12/27/01, 7:47 PM55

GLOSSARY

■ Dolby Surround

Dolby Surround uses a 4 channel analog recording system

to reproduce realistic and dynamic sound effects: 2 main

left and right channels (stereo), a center channel for

dialog (monaural), and a rear channel for special sound

effects (monaural). The rear channel reproduces sound

within a narrow frequency range.

Dolby Surround is widely used with nearly all video tapes

and laser discs, and in many TV and cable broadcasts as

well. The Dolby Pro Logic decoder built into this unit

employs a digital signal processing system that

automatically stabilizes the volume on each channel to

enhance moving sound effects and directionality.

■ Dolby Digital

Dolby Digital is a digital surround sound system that

gives you completely independent multi-channel audio.

With 3 front channels (left, center, and right), and 2 rear

stereo channels, Dolby Digital provides 5 full-range audio

channels. With an additional channel especially for bass

effects, called LFE (low frequency effect), the system has

a total of 5.1 channels (LFE is counted as 0.1 channel).

By using 2-channel stereo for the rear speakers, more

accurate moving sound effects and surround sound

environment are possible than with Dolby Surround. The

wide dynamic range (from maximum to minimum

volume) reproduced by the 5 full-range channels and the

precise sound orientation generated using digital sound

processing provide listeners with previously unheard of

excitement and realism.

With this unit, any sound environment from monaural up

to a 5.1-channel configuration can be freely selected for

your enjoyment.

Dolby Digital EX creates 6 full-bandwidth output

channels from 5.1-channel sources. This is done using a

matrix decoder that derives 3 surround channels from the

2 in the original recording. For the best results, Dolby

Digital EX should be used with movie sound tracks

recorded with Dolby Digital Surround EX. With this

additional channel, you can experience more dynamic and

realistic moving sound especially with scenes with “fly-

over” and “fly-around” effects.

■ Dolby Pro Logic

Dolby Pro Logic is an improved technique used to

decode vast numbers of existing Dolby Surround

softwares. This new technology enables a discrete 5-

channel playback with 2 main left and right channels, 1

center channel, and 2 rear left and right channels (instead

of only 1 rear channel for conventional Pro Logic

technology). A music mode is also available for 2-channel

sources in addition to the movie mode.

■ DTS (Digital Theater Systems)

Digital Surround

DTS digital surround was developed to replace the analog

soundtracks of movies with a 6-channel digital sound

track, and is now rapidly gaining popularity in movie

theaters around the world. Digital Theater Systems Inc.

has developed a home theater system so that you can

enjoy the depth of sound and natural spatial

representation of DTS digital surround in your home.

This system produces practically distortion-free 6-channel

sound (technically, a left, right and center channels, 2 rear

channels, plus an LFE 0.1 channel as a subwoofer, for a

total of 5.1 channels).

The unit incorporates DTS-ES compatible decoder that

enables 6.1-channel reproduction by adding the rear

center channel to existing 5.1-channel format. (The rear

center channel is created from rear left and right

channels.)

■ LFE 0.1 channel

This channel is for the reproduction of low bass signals.

The frequency range for this channel is 20 Hz to 120 Hz.

This channel is counted as 0.1 because it only enforces a

low frequency range compared to the full-range

reproduced by the other 5 channels in a Dolby Digital or

DTS 5.1 channel systems.

■ CINEMA DSP

DIGITAL

Since the Dolby Surround and DTS systems were

originally designed for use in movie theaters, their effect

is best felt in a theater having many speakers and

designed for acoustic effects. Since home conditions,

such as room size, wall material, number of speakers, and

so on, can differ so widely, it’s inevitable that there are

differences in the sound heard as well. Based on a wealth

of actually measured data, YAMAHA CINEMA DSP uses

YAMAHA original sound field technology to combine

Dolby Pro Logic, Dolby Digital and DTS systems to

provide the visual and audio experience of movie theater

in the listening room of your own home.

■ SILENT CINEMA

YAMAHA has developed a natural, realistic sound effect

DSP algorithm for headphones.

Parameters for headphones have been set for each sound

field so that accurate representations of all the sound field

programs can be enjoyed using headphones.

0110V630_52-58_EN(U) 12/27/01, 7:47 PM56

English

INTRODUCTION PREPARATION

BASIC

OPERAIONT

ADVANCED

OPERATION

ADDITIONAL

INFORMATION

APPENDIX

GLOSSARY

■ Virtual CINEMA DSP

YAMAHA has developed a virtual CINEMA DSP

algorithm that allows you to enjoy DSP sound field

surround effects even without any rear speakers by using

virtual rear speakers.

It is even possible to enjoy virtual CINEMA DSP using a

minimal 2-speaker system that does not include a center

speaker.

■ PCM (Linear PCM)

Linear PCM is a signal format under which an analog

audio signal is digitized, recorded and transmitted without

using any compression. This is used as a method of

recording CDs and DVD audio. The PCM system uses a

technique for sampling the size of the analog signal per

very small unit of time. Standing for “pulse code

modulation”, the analog signal is encoded as pulses and

then modulated for recording.

■ Sampling frequency and number

of quantized bits

When digitizing an analog audio signal, the number of

times the signal is sampled per second is called the

sampling frequency, while the degree of fineness when

converting the sound level into a numeric value is called

the number of quantized bits.

The range of rates that can be played back is determined

based on the sampling rate, while the dynamic range

representing the sound level difference is determined by

the number of quantized bits. In principle, the higher the

sampling frequency, the wider the range of frequencies

that can be played back, and the higher the number of

quantized bits, the more finely the sound level can be

reproduced.

■ S-video signal

With the S-video signal system, the video signal normally

transmitted using a pin cable is separated and transmitted

as the Y signal for the luminance and the C signal for the

chrominance through the S-video cable. Using the S

VIDEO jack eliminates video signal transmission loss and

allows recording and playback of even more beautiful

images.

■ Component video signal

With the component video signal system, the video signal

is separated into the Y signal for the luminance and the

and P

signals for the chrominance. Color can

be reproduced more faithfully with this system because

each of these signals is independent. The component

signal is also called the “color difference signal” because

the luminance signal is subtracted from the color signal.

A monitor with component input jacks is required in order

to use the component signal for output.

0110V630_52-58_EN(U) 12/27/01, 7:47 PM57

SPECIFICATIONS

AUDIO SECTION

• Minimum RMS Output Power for Main, Center, Rear, Rear Center

20 Hz to 20 kHz, 0.06% THD, 8 Ω ....................................... 75 W

1 kHz, 0.06% THD, 8 Ω ........................................................ 80 W

• DIN Standard Output Power

[Europe model]

1 kHz, 0.7% THD, 4 Ω ........................................................ 125 W

• Maximum Power (EIAJ)

[China, Korea and General models]

1 kHz, 10% THD, 8 Ω ......................................................... 110 W

• Dynamic Power (IHF)

8/6/4/2 Ω .......................................................... 90/120/150/190 W

• Damping Factor

20 Hz to 20 kHz, 8 Ω ................................................... 80 or more

• Frequency Response

CD to Main L/R ...................................... 10 Hz to 100 kHz, –3 dB

• Total Harmonic Distortion

20 Hz to 20 kHz, 45 W, 8 Ω, Main L/R ................................ 0.06%

• Signal to Noise Ratio (IHF-A Network)

CD (250 mV, shorted) to Main L/R, Effect Off ................. 100 dB

• Residual Noise (IHF-A Network)

Main L/R ................................................................ 150 µV or less

• Channel Separation (1 kHz/10 kHz)

CD (5.1 kΩ terminated) to Main L/R ........................ 60 dB/45 dB

• Tone Control (Main L/R)

BASS Boost/Cut ...................................................... ±10 dB/50 Hz

TREBLE Boost/Cut ............................................... ±10 dB/20 kHz

• Phones Output ............................................................. 0.34 V/560 Ω

• Input Sensitivity

CD, etc .................................................................... 150 mV/47 kΩ

6CH INPUT ............................................................ 150 mV/47 kΩ

• Output Level

OUT (REC) ........................................................... 150 mV/1.2 kΩ

OUTPUT MAIN/CENTER/REAR CENTER/

REAR (SURROUND) ............................................ 2.2 V/1.2 kΩ

OUTPUT SUBWOOFER ............................................. 4 V/1.2 kΩ

VIDEO SECTION

• Video Signal Type ...................................................... NTSC or PAL

• Composite Video Signal Level ...................................... 1 Vp-p/75 Ω

• S-Video Signal Level

Y ................................................................................. 1 Vp-p/75 Ω

C .......................................................................... 0.286 Vp-p/75 Ω

• Component Video Signal Level

Y ................................................................................. 1 Vp-p/75 Ω

, P

............................................................. 0.7 Vp-p/75 Ω

• Signal to Noise Ratio ............................................................... 50 dB

• Frequency Response (MONITOR OUT)

Composite, S-Video ................................. 5 Hz to 10 MHz, –3 dB

Component ................................................. DC to 30 MHz, –3 dB

FM SECTION

• Tuning Range

[U.S.A. and Canada models] ............................ 87.5 to 107.9 MHz

[Other models] .............................................. 87.50 to 108.00 MHz

• 50 dB Quieting Sensitivity (IHF, 100% mod.)

Mono/Stereo ........................ 2.0 µV (17.3 dBf) /25 µV (39.2 dBf)

• Selectivity (400 kHz) ............................................................... 70 dB

• Signal to Noise Ratio (IHF)

Mono/Stereo .............................................................. 76 dB/70 dB

• Harmonic Distortion (1 kHz)

Mono/Stereo ................................................................. 0.2%/0.3%

• Stereo Separation (1 kHz) ....................................................... 45 dB

• Frequency Response ........................... 20 Hz to 15 kHz +0.5, –2 dB

AM SECTION

• Tuning Range ......................................... 530/531 to 1710/1611 kHz

• Usable Sensitivity ............................................................. 300 µV/m

GENERAL

• Power Supply

[U.S.A. and Canada models] ............................... AC 120 V/60 Hz

[Australia model] ................................................. AC 240 V/50 Hz

[U.K., Europe and Singapore models] ................ AC 230 V/50 Hz

[Korea model] ..................................................... AC 220 V/60 Hz

[China and General models] ..... AC 110/120/220/240 V, 50/60 Hz

• Power Consumption

[U.S.A. and Canada models] .................................. 290 W/370 VA

[Other models] ..................................................................... 290 W

Standby Mode ......................................................... approx. 0.6 W

• AC Outlets

[U.S.A., Canada, Europe and Singapore models]

.......................................................... 2 (Total 100 W maximum)

[China and General models] .................. 2 (Total 50 W maximum)

[U.K. and Australia models] ......................... 1 (100 W maximum)

• Dimension (W x H x D)

.......................... 435 x 161 x 390 mm (17” x 6-7/16” x 15-3/8”)

• Weight ...................................................................... 11.5 kg (25 lbs)

• Accessories ............................................................... Remote control

Batteries

Front VIDEO AUX jack cap

75-ohm/300-ohm antenna adapter (U.K. model)

AM loop antenna

Indoor FM antenna

*Specifications are subject to change without notice.

0110V630_52-58_EN(U) 1/9/02, 7:39 PM58

LIST OF MANUFACTURER CODES

LISTE DES CODES DES FABRICANTS

A TANDY 0941

ABEX 1151

ADMIRA 1141

ADVENTURA 1131

AIKO 1121

AIWA 1481

AKAI 0331, 1101, 1111

ALBA 0431

ALLERON 1091

AMBASSADOR 1081

AMSTRAD 0481, 1081

ANAM 0251, 1041, 1051,

1061, 1071

ANAM NATIONAL 1041

AOC 0361, 1021, 1031,

1111, 1161

ARCHER 1161

AUDIOSONIC 1001

AUDIOVOX 1051, 1161

BAUER 0441

BAUR 1001

BEIJING 1511, 1551, 1561

BELCOR 1031

BELL & HOWELL 0981, 0991

BEON 1001

BRADFORD 1051

BROCKWOOD 1031

BROKSONIC 1161

BUSH 1001

CANDLE 0351, 0361, 0961,

0971, 1111, 1131

CAPEHART 1021

CARVER 0101

CATHAY 1001

CELEBRITY 0951

CENTURION 0411

CHANGHONG 1541, 1551, 1561,

1621

CITIZEN 0351, 0361, 0921,

0931, 0941, 0961,

0971, 1111, 1121,

1131

CLAIRTONE 1011

CLARIVOX 1001

CONCERTO 0351, 0971

CONROWA 1751

CONTEC 0901, 0911, 1011,

1051

CORANDO 0941

CRAIG 0251, 1051

CROWN 0941, 1051

CURTIS MATHES 0161, 0361,

0931, 0941,

0981, 1111

CXC 1051

DAEWOO 0291, 0301, 0331,

0721, 0941, 1001,

1031, 1121, 1191,

1531, 1581, 1591,

1601

DANSAI 1001

DAYTRON 0941, 1031

DECCA 0271, 1001

DIXI 0331, 1001, 1071

DUMONT 0891, 1031

DYNATECH 0881

ELECTROBAND 0951, 1011

ELECTROHOME 0941

ELECTRON 0941

ELIN 1001

ELTA 0331

EMERSON 0001, 0021, 0061,

0071, 0081, 0091,

0111, 0811, 0821,

0831, 0841, 0851,

0861, 0871, 0901,

0921, 0941, 0981,

1011, 1031, 1051,

1081, 1091

ENVISION 0361, 1111

ERRES 1001

ETRON 0331

FERGUSON 1001

FINLUX 1001

FISHER 0171, 0801, 0981

FORMENTI 0441

FORMONTI 1001

FORTRESS 1141

FUJITSU 1091

FUNAI 1051, 1091, 1501,

1521

FUTURETECH 1051

GE 0131, 0161, 0201,

0751, 0761, 0771,

0781, 0791, 0811,

0861, 1041

GEC 0271, 1001

GEMINI 0391

GENEXXA 0431

GIBRALTER 0891, 1031, 1111

GOLDSTAR 0031, 0121, 0351,

0411, 0731, 0741,

0861, 0941, 0971,

1001, 1031, 1111,

1151

GOODMANS/TASHIKO

0271, 0661, 1001

GRANADA 1001

GRUNDIG 1781, 1791, 1801,

1811, 1821, 1831,

1841, 1851, 1861,

1871, 1881

GUNPY 1051, 1091

HARMAN/KARDON

0721

HALLMARK 0861

HANSEATIC 1001

HARVARD 1051, 1061

HINARI 1001, 1091

HITACHI 0181, 0351, 0671,

0681, 0691, 0701,

0711, 0871, 0941,

0971, 1351

HYPSON 1001

IMA 1051

INDIANA 1001

INFINITY REFERENCE

0101

INTERFUNK 1001

ITT 0611

JANEIL 1131

JBL 0101

JCB 0951

JENSEN 0311

JINXING 1531, 1541, 1551,

1561, 1571, 1621,

1631, 1641, 1651,

1691, 1731

JVC (VICTOR) 0261, 0281, 0641,

0651, 0661, 0841

KAWASHO 0901

KAYPANI 1021

KENWOOD 0361, 1031, 1111

KLOSS 0631, 0721, 1131

KTV 0921, 0941, 1011,

1051, 1111

LEYCO 1001

LIESENK & TTER 1001

LLOYTRON 0941

LOEWE 1001

LOGIK 0991, 1771

LUXMAN 0351, 0971

LXI 0101, 0621, 0761,

0861, 0981

MAGNAVOX 0101, 0341, 0391,

0401, 0411, 0421,

0581, 0591, 0601,

0611, 0631, 0661,

0961, 1111

MAJESTIC 0991

MARANTZ 0101, 0221, 0361,

1001, 1111

MARK 1001

MATSUI 0271, 0331, 1001

MEDIATOR 1001

MEGATRON 0691, 0861, 1161

MEI 1011

M-ELECTRONIC 1001

MEMOREX 0331, 0571, 0861,

0971, 0981, 0991,

1771

METZ 1791, 1831, 1891,

1901, 1911, 1921,

1931, 1941

MGA 0361, 0561, 0571,

0861, 1031, 1111

MIDLAND 0751, 0761, 0891,

0941, 1151

MITSUBISHI 0221, 0321, 0561,

0571, 0661, 0861,

1031, 1101, 1381

MONTGOMERY 1091

MOTOROLA 1041, 1141

MTC 0351, 0361, 0881,

0931, 0971, 1011,

1031, 1111

MULTITECH 0881, 1051

NAD 0551, 0621, 0861

NEC 0241, 0351, 0361,

0661, 0971, 1031,

1111, 1321, 1711

NECKERMANN 1001

NEI 1001

NIKKAI 0271, 0431, 1001,

1151

NIKKO 0861, 1111, 1121

NOVABEAM 0721

NTC 1121

ONWA 1051

OPTIMUS 0551

OPTONICA 0541, 1141

ORION 0831, 1001

OSAKI 0271, 1151

OTTO VERSAND 1001

PANASONIC 0101, 0191, 0251,

0751, 1041, 1311,

1371, 1431

PANDA 1541, 1721

PENNY 0161, 0361, 0521,

0531, 0621, 0731,

0751, 0761, 0781,

0791, 0861, 0931,

0941, 1031, 1041,

1111, 1151, 1161

PEONY 1561, 1621

PHILCO 0361, 0581, 0591,

0601, 0611, 0631,

0961, 1031, 1111

PHILIPS 0101, 0401, 1001

PHONOLA 1001

PILOT 0941, 1031, 1111

PIONEER 0511, 0551, 0871

PORTLAND 0941, 1031, 1121

PRICECLUB 0931

PRISM 0751

PROSCAN 0761

PROTECH 1001

PROTON 0501, 0861, 0941,

1021, 1161

PULSAR 0891

PULSER 1031

QUASAR 0251, 0751, 1041

QUELLE 1001

RADIO SHACK 0541, 0941,

1031, 1051,

1151

RADIOLA 1001

RCA 0051, 0141, 0151,

0181, 0411, 0491,

0531, 0761, 0771,

0871, 1031

REALISTIC 0541, 0861, 0941,

0971, 0981, 1031,

1051, 1111, 1151

RHAPSODY 1011

R-LINE 1001

RUNCO 0891, 1111

SAISHO 0331, 1081

SAMPO 0361, 0941, 1021,

1111, 1151

SAMSUNG 0331, 0341, 0351,

0361, 0861, 0931,

0941, 0971, 1001,

1031, 1111, 1151

SAMSUX 0941

SANYO 0171, 0231, 0271,

0661, 0801, 0911,

0981, 1231, 1251,

1261

SBR 1001

SCHEIDER 1001

SCIMITSU 1031

SCOTCH 0861

SCOTT 0831, 0861, 0941,

1031, 1051, 1091

SEARS 0101, 0161, 0171,

0351, 0481, 0521,

0621, 0761, 0801,

0861, 0971, 0981,

1091

SHANGHAI 1561, 1681

SHARP 0461, 0471, 0541,

0661, 0911, 0941,

1141

SHOGUN 1031

SIGNATURE 0991, 1771

SIMPSON 0581, 0961

SOLAVOX 1151

SONOKO 1001

02V630_code(U) 12/27/01, 7:47 PM1

SONTEC 1001

SONY 0371, 0451, 0661,

0841, 0951, 1281,

1441

SOUNDESIGN 0861, 0961, 1051,

1091

SOUNDWAVE 1001

SPECTRICON 1161

SQUAREVIEW 0481

SSS 1031, 1051

STAR-LITE 1051

SUPREM 0951

SUPRE-MACY 1131

SURPA 0351, 0971

SYLVANIA 0101, 0361, 0441,

0581, 0591, 0601,

0611, 0631, 0961,

1111

SYMPHONIC 0481

SYSLINE 1001

TANDY 0271, 0431, 1141

TATUNG 0271, 0881, 1001,

1041, 1161

TCL 1561, 1631, 1701

TECHNICS 0751

TECHWOOD 0351, 0751, 0971

TEKNIKA 0101, 0351, 0571,

0931, 0941, 0961,

0971, 0991, 1031,

1051, 1091, 1121,

1131, 1771

TELETECH 0331

TERA 0501

THAKRAL 1671

THORM 1001

TMK 0351, 0861, 0971,

1081

TOSHIBA 0381, 0521, 0621,

0661, 0931, 0981,

1301

TOSONIC 1011

TOTEVISION 0941

TRICAL 0911

UNIVERSAL 0781, 0791

UNIVERSUM 1001

VECTOR RESEARCH

0361, 1111

VESTEL 1001

VIDEO CONCEPT 1101

VIDIKRON 0101, 0211

VIDTECH 0861, 1031

VIKING 1131

WARDS 0101, 0361, 0451,

0541, 0581, 0591,

0601, 0611, 0771,

0781, 0791, 0861,

0971, 0991, 1031,

1091, 1111, 1771

WATSON 1001

XOGEGO 1611, 1621, 1661,

1741, 1761

YAMAHA 0361, 1031, 1111

YOKO 1001

ZENITH 0011, 0041, 0891,

0991, 1771

ZONDA 1161

CABLE TV

ABC 0256, 0376

ANTRONIX 0136

ARCHER 0136, 0286

BBT 0076

CABLETIME 0166

CABLEVISION 0196

COLOUR VOICE 0306, 0346

COMTRONICS 0216, 0276

EAGLE COMTRONICS

0276

EASTERN 0066

ELECTRICORD 0206

ELECTUS 0266

GE 0116, 0126

GEC CABLE SYSTEM

0196

HAMLIN H5 0676

HAMLIN H6 0666

HAMLIN H6S 0656

HAMLIN H8 0646

HAMLIN H9 0636

JERROLD 0256

JERROLD 400L 0626

JERROLD 450L 0616

JERROLD 550 0606

JERROLD OSD CATV

0596

JERROLD SPRUCER

0436

MAGNAVOX/PHILIPS

0416, 0426

MAMM 0296

MEMOREX 0386

MOVIE TIME 0146, 0206

NORTHCOAST 0016

NSC 0146

OAK 0106

OAK SIGMA 450 0546

OAK SIGMA 550 0536

PANASONIC TZ 120/130

0476

PANASONIC TZ 170/180

0446

PANASONIC TZ140 0466

PANASONIC TZ150/160

0456

PARAGON 0386

PHILIPS 0036, 0216, 0306,

0316, 0326, 0336,

0346

PIONEER 0006, 0086

PIONEER BR50 0846

PIONEER BR60/70/80/81/82

0696

PIONEER BR90 0556

PULSAR 0386

RCA DIGITAL SATELLITE

SYSTEM 0396, 0406

REALISTIC 0136

REGENCY/EASTERN 0686

RUNCO 0386

SAMSUNG 0276

SCIENTIFIC ATLANTA 175/475

0576

SCIENTIFIC ATLANTA 75

0366, 0586

SCIENTIFIC ATLANTA 8650

0566

SIGNAL 0276

SL MARX 0276

SPECTAVISION 0236

STANDARD COMPONENTS

0186

STARCOM V 0256

STARGATE 0276

SYLVANIA/TEXSCAN

0376, 0496

TEKNIKA 0176

TELESERVICE 0056

TELEVIEW 0276

TEXSCAN 0186, 0376

TFC 0026

TOCOM 0226, 0356

TOCOM 5503A 0526

TOCOM 5503VIP/5507 0516

TOCOM TC56 0506

TOSHIBA 0386

TUDI 0046

UNIKA 0136

UNIVERSAL 0136, 0156, 0206,

0286

VIDEOWAY 0096

VIEWSTAR 0216

ZENITH 0246, 0386, 0486

SATELLITE TUNER

ALPHA STAR 0826

CHAPARRAL 0756

ECHOSTAR 0836

GENERAL INSTRUMENT

0776, 0876

HTS 0836

HUGHES NETWORK SYSTEMS

0816

JERROLD 0776, 0786

PANASONIC 0806

PRIMESTAR 0776, 0786

RCA 0766

SONY 0796

(DBS)

HITACHI 0856

MAGNAVOX 0886

MEMOREX 0886

PANASONIC 0896

PHILIPS 0886

SONY 0906

STAR CHOICE 0876

TOSHIBA 0866, 0916

UNIDEN 0886

VCR

A TANDY 0902

ADVENTURA 0992

AIKO 0982

AIWA 0992

AKAI 0262, 0942, 0952,

0962, 0972

AMERICAN HIGH 0932

AMSTRAD 0992

ASA 0002, 0912

ASHA 0922

AUDIO DYNAMICS 0202

AUDIOVOX 0912

BEAUMARK 0922

BELL & HOWELL 0902

BLAUPUNKT 0412

BROKSONIC 0872, 0882, 0892

BUSH 0852

CALIX 0912

CANON 0862, 0932

CCE 0852, 0982

CITIZEN 0912, 0982

COLT 0852

CRAIG 0832, 0842, 0852,

0912, 0922

CURTIS MATHES 0662, 0822,

0932

CYBERNEX 0922

DAEWOO 0802, 0812, 0982

DBX 0202

DYNATECH 0472, 0992

ELECTROHOME 0912

ELECTROPHONIC 0912

EMEREX 0792

EMERSON 0072, 0132, 0142,

0152, 0162, 0172,

0182, 0192, 0212,

0702, 0712, 0722,

0732, 0742, 0752,

0762, 0772, 0782,

0872, 0882, 0892,

0912, 0952, 0992,

1072

FINLUX 0002, 0992

FISHER 0682, 0692, 0842,

0902

FUJI 0672, 0932

FUNAI 0992

GARRARD 0992

GE 0662, 0822, 0932

GO VIDEO 0642, 0652

GOLDSTAR 0082, 0632, 0912

GOODMANS 0402

GRADIENTE 0992

GRANDA 0612, 0902

GRUNDIG 0002

HARLEY DAVIDSON

0992

HARMAN/KARDON

0632, 1082

HARWOOD 0752, 0852

HEADQUARTER 0612

HI-Q 0842

HINARI 0852

HITACHI 0102, 0562, 0572,

0582, 0592, 0602,

0992

ITT 0942

JVC (VICTOR) 0202, 0522, 0532,

0542, 0552

KENWOOD 0202, 0542, 0612,

0632, 0902

KLH 0852

KODAK 0912, 0932

LLOYD 0992

LOGIK 0852

LUXOR 0942

LXI 0022, 0912

MAGNAVOX 0002, 0482, 0492,

0502, 0512, 0932

MAGNIN 0922

MARANTZ 0002, 0202, 0402,

0632, 0932

MARTA 0912

MATSUSHITA 0932

MATSUI 0722

MEI 0222, 0932

MEMOREX 0232, 0242, 0472,

0512, 0612, 0842,

0902, 0912, 0922,

0932, 0992

MGA 0762, 0952

MGA TECHNOLOGY

0922

MINOLTA 0592, 0602

MITSUBISHI 0452, 0462, 0542,

0762, 0952, 1082

MOTOROLA 0472, 0932

MTC 0922, 0992

02V630_code(U) 12/27/01, 7:47 PM2

III

MULTITECH 0852, 0992

NAD 0442

NEC 0122, 0202, 0292,

0422, 0432, 0542,

0632

NIKKO 0912

NOBLEX 0922

OLYMPUS 0412, 0932

OPTIMUS 0442, 0472, 0912

OPTONICA 0402

ORION 0212, 0722, 0742,

0772

OSAKI 0912

PANASONIC 0012, 0052, 0092,

0222, 0372, 0382,

0392, 0412, 0932

PENNY 0202, 0432, 0602,

0632, 0692, 0912,

0922, 0932

PENTAX 0592, 0602

PERDIO 0992

PHILCO 0002, 0932

PHILIPS 0002, 0282, 0402,

0492, 0932

PILOT 0912

PIONEER 0442, 0542

PROSCAN 1002, 1012, 1022,

1032, 1042, 1052,

1062

PULSAR 0512

QUARTER 0612

QUARTZ 0272, 0612

QUASAR 0382, 0392, 0932

RADIO SHACK 0912, 0992

RADIX 0912

RANDEX 0912

RCA 0112, 0382, 0392,

0482, 0592, 0602,

0662, 0822, 0942

REALISTIC 0402, 0472, 0612,

0682, 0842, 0902,

0912, 0922, 0932,

0992

RICOH 0352, 0362

SAISHO 0212, 0582, 0722,

0732, 0742, 0772

SALORA 0612, 0762

SAMSUNG 0212, 0312, 0922,

0962

SANKY 0472, 0512

SANSUI 0292, 0542, 0832

SANYO 0242, 0612, 0842,

0902, 0922

SBR 0002, 0282

SCHEIDER 0852

SCOTT 0342, 0712, 0762,

0872, 0882, 0892

SEARS 0302, 0592, 0602,

0612, 0682, 0692,

0842, 0902, 0912,

0932

SHARP 0402, 0472

SHINTOM 0852

SHOGUN 0922

SINGER 0852

SONY 0032, 0332, 0352,

0362, 0672, 0792,

0932

STS 0602

SUNPAK 0352

SYLVANIA 0002, 0492, 0502,

0762, 0932, 0992

SYMPHONIC 0992

TANDY 0992

TASHIKO 0712, 0992

TEAC 0992

TECHNICS 0932

TEKNIKA 0322, 0912, 0932,

0992

TELEFUNKEN 0252

TMK 0212, 0732, 0772,

0922

TOSHIBA 0062, 0302, 0342,

0622, 0682, 0712,

0762

TOTEVISION 0912, 0922

UNITECH 0922

VECTOR RESEARCH

0202, 0432, 0632

VIDEO CONCEPTS

0202, 0432, 0632,

0952

WARDS 0322, 0402, 0472,

0482, 0602, 0712,

0842, 0852, 0922,

0932, 0992

YAMAHA 0202, 0632

ZENITH 0042, 0362, 0512,

0672

DVD PLAYER

AKAI 0058

DENON 0188

HITACHI 0198

JVC (VICTOR) 0088, 0178

KENWOOD 0148

MAGNAVOX 0128

MITSUBISHI 0138

ONKYO 0068, 0128

PANASONIC 0028

PHILIPS 0098, 0128

PIONEER 0108, 0118

PROSCAN 0158

RCA 0158

SAMSUNG 0078

SHARP 0038

SONY 0018

TECHNICS 0028

THOMSON 0168

TOSHIBA 0048, 0128

YAMAHA 0008, 0028, 0098

ZENITH 0128

LD PLAYER

AIWA 0157

DENON 0147

DISCO VISION 0017

FUNAI 0157

HITACHI (E) 0017

KENWOOD 0087, 0107

MAGNAVOX 0027

MARANTZ 0027

MITSUBISHI 0137

NAD 0137

PANASONIC 0077, 0177

PHILIPS 0027

PIONEER 0017, 0037, 0137

RCA 0167

REALISTIC 0157

SHARP 0127

SONY 0047, 0057, 0117

VICTOR 0097

YAMAHA 0007, 0067

CD PLAYER

ACOUSTIC RESEARCH

1295

ADC 0025, 0065

ADCOM 0205, 0255, 1015

ADS 0265

AIWA 0295, 0945, 1035,

1055

AKAI 0175, 0485, 0535

ALPINE 1215, 1305

AUDIO-TECHNICA 0545

BSR 0245, 0655, 0775

CALIFORNIA AUDIO LAB

0055

CAPETRONIC 1205

CARRERA 0245

CARVER 0285, 1135

CASIO 0345

CROWN 0185

CURTIS MATHES 0345

DENON 0275, 0875, 0885

DEUAL (E) 0505

DYNAMIC BASS (H)

0555

EMERSON 0205, 0325, 1105

EROICA 1275

FISHER 0095, 0555, 0925,

1005

GARRARD 0365

GENEXXA 0305, 0325, 1105

GOLDSTAR 1135, 1225, 1265,

1335

HARMAN/KARDON

0105, 0175,

0465, 0995

HITACHI 0195, 0205, 0505,

0815

INKEL 0115, 0395

JVC (VICTOR) 0315

KENWOOD 0045, 0095, 0405,

0585, 0725, 0735,

0745, 0755, 0895

KYOCERA 0025

LUXMAN 0075, 0425, 0675,

0705, 0715, 0985

MAGNAVOX 0165, 0215, 0645,

0955

MARANTZ 0215, 0235, 0375,

0785, 1345

MCINTOSH 0355, 1085

MCS 0905, 1315

MEMOREX 0205, 0225, 0235,

0305, 0325, 1105

MGA 0135

MISSION 0215

MITSUBISHI 0135, 0445

MTC 1255

NAD 0035, 0615, 0685,

0695

NAKAMICHI 0125, 0435, 0515

NEC 0255, 0905, 0965

NIKKO 0545, 1005

ONKYO 0155, 0455, 0495,

0805, 1155

OPTIMUS 0225, 0245, 0555,

0595, 0845, 0855,

0865, 0895, 0935

PANASONIC 0055, 0825, 1095,

1125

PENNY 0905

PHILIPS 0165, 0215

PIONEER 0305, 0935, 1045

PROTON 0215, 1185

QUASAR 0055

RCA 0205, 0915, 1115

REALISTIC 0205, 0225, 0235,

0325, 0555, 0845

REVOX 1175

ROTEL 0215

SABA TELECOMMANDER (E)

0505

SAE 0215

SAMSUNG 1285

SANSUI 0215, 0625, 0975,

1025, 1105

SANYO 0145, 0555, 0635,

0765

SCOTT 0325, 1105

SEARS 0345

SHARP 0235, 0665, 0895,

1065, 1075

SHERWOOD 0115, 0235, 0395,

0475

SIEMENTS GARRARD

1245

SIGNATURE 0175

SONTEC 1165

SONY 0065, 0565, 0865,

1145

STARON 1235

STS 0025

SYLVANIA 0215

SYMPHONIC 0335

TANDY 0305

TANGBERG 1195

TEAC 0235, 0335, 0385,

0525, 0795, 0835,

1355

TECHNICS 0055, 0605, 1095

TECHWOOD 1325

TELEFUNKEN (E) 0505

THOMSON (E) 0505

TOSHIBA 0035, 0685

VECTOR RESEARCH

0065, 1135

WARDS 0175

YAMAHA 0005, 0015, 0085,

0415, 0545, 0575,

1065

CD RECORDER/CD-

HITACHI 0474

JVC (VICTOR) 0504

MARANTZ 0484, 0494

PHILIPS 0444

PIONEER 0454, 0464

YAMAHA 0414

MD RECORDER

KENWOOD 0384

PIONEER 0424

SHARP 0434

SONY 0394

YAMAHA 0024, 0394, 0404

02V630_code(U) 12/27/01, 7:47 PM3

TAPE DECK

AIWA 0094, 0214, 0224

AKAI 0184

CARVER 0094

DENON 0304

FISHER 0144

GARRARD 0194, 0204

JVC (VICTOR) 0274, 0284, 0294

KENWOOD 0124, 0134, 0154,

0234, 0244, 0264

MAGNAVOX 0094

MARANTZ 0094, 0344

MITSUBISHI 0184

OPTIMUS 0034, 0064, 0204,

0334

ONKYO 0364, 0374

PHILIPS 0094

PIONEER 0034, 0044, 0064

REVOX 0354

SANSUI 0094, 0344

SHARP 0264

SHERWOOD 0334

SONY 0054, 0084, 0324

TEAC 0194, 0254

TECHNICS 0074, 0314

WARDS 0034

YAMAHA 0004, 0014, 0104,

0114, 0164, 0174,

0264

02V630_code(U) 12/27/01, 7:47 PM4

YAMAHA ELECTRONICS CORPORATION, USA 6660 ORANGETHORPE AVE., BUENA PARK, CALIF. 90620, U.S.A.

YAMAHA CANADA MUSIC LTD. 135 MILNER AVE., SCARBOROUGH, ONTARIO M1S 3R1, CANADA

YAMAHA ELECTRONIK EUROPA G.m.b.H. SIEMENSSTR. 22-34, 25462 RELLINGEN BEI HAMBURG, F.R. OF GERMANY

YAMAHA ELECTRONIQUE FRANCE S.A. RUE AMBROISE CROIZAT BP70 CROISSY-BEAUBOURG 77312 MARNE-LA-VALLEE CEDEX02, FRANCE

YAMAHA ELECTRONICS (UK) LTD. YAMAHA HOUSE, 200 RICKMANSWORTH ROAD WATFORD, HERTS WD1 7JS, ENGLAND

YAMAHA SCANDINAVIA A.B. J A WETTERGRENS GATA 1, BOX 30053, 400 43 VÄSTRA FRÖLUNDA, SWEDEN

YAMAHA MUSIC AUSTRALIA PTY, LTD. 17-33 MARKET ST., SOUTH MELBOURNE, 3205 VIC., AUSTRALIA

Printed in Malaysia

V874820

03V630(U)-cv4 12/27/01, 7:47 PM1

Transcripción de documentos

U RX-V630 AV Receiver OWNER’S MANUAL 0100V630(U)-cv1 1 12/27/01, 7:45 PM SAFETY INSTRUCTIONS 10 CAUTION RISK OF ELECTRIC SHOCK DO NOT OPEN CAUTION: TO REDUCE THE RISK OF ELECTRIC SHOCK, DO NOT REMOVE COVER (OR BACK). NO USER-SERVICEABLE PARTS INSIDE. REFER SERVICING TO QUALIFIED SERVICE PERSONNEL. • 11 Explanation of Graphical Symbols The lightning flash with arrowhead symbol, within an equilateral triangle, is intended to alert you to the presence of uninsulated “dangerous voltage” within the product’s enclosure that may be of sufficient magnitude to constitute a risk of electric shock to persons. The exclamation point within an equilateral triangle is intended to alert you to the presence of important operating and maintenance (servicing) instructions in the literature accompanying the appliance. 12 13 WARNING TO REDUCE THE RISK OF FIRE OR ELECTRIC SHOCK, DO NOT EXPOSE THIS UNIT TO RAIN OR MOISTURE. 14 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 Read Instructions – All the safety and operating instructions should be read before the product is operated. Retain Instructions – The safety and operating instructions should be retained for future reference. Heed Warnings – All warnings on the product and in the operating instructions should be adhered to. Follow Instructions – All operating and use instructions should be followed. Cleaning – Unplug this product from the wall outlet before cleaning. Do not use liquid cleaners or aerosol cleaners. Use a damp cloth for cleaning. Attachments – Do not use attachments not recommended by the product manufacturer as they may cause hazards. Water and Moisture – Do not use this product near water – for example, near a bath tub, wash bowl, kitchen sink, or laundry tub; in a wet basement; or near a swimming pool; and the like. Accessories – Do not place this product on an unstable cart, stand, tripod, bracket, or table. The product may fall, causing serious injury to a child or adult, and serious damage to the product. Use only with a cart, stand, tripod, bracket, or table recommended by the manufacturer, or sold with the product. Any mounting of the product should follow the manufacturer’s instructions, and should use a mounting accessory recommended by the manufacturer. A product and cart combination should be moved with care. Quick stops, excessive force, and uneven surfaces may cause the product and cart combination to overturn. 15 16 17 18 19 Ventilation – Slots and openings in the cabinet are provided for ventilation and to ensure reliable operation of the product and to protect it from overheating, and these openings must not be blocked or covered. The openings should never be blocked by placing the product on a bed, sofa, rug, or other similar surface. This product should not be placed in a built-in installation such as a bookcase or rack unless proper ventilation is provided or the manufacturer’s instructions have been adhered to. Power Sources – This product should be operated only from the type of power source indicated on the marking label. If you are not sure of the type of power supply to your home, consult your product dealer or local power company. For products intended to operate from battery power, or other sources, refer to the operating instructions. Grounding or Polarization – This product may be equipped with a polarized alternating current line plug (a plug having one blade wider than the other). This plug will fit into the power outlet only one way. This is a safety feature. If you are unable to insert the plug fully into the outlet, try reversing the plug. If the plug should still fail to fit, contact your electrician to replace your obsolete outlet. Do not defeat the safety purpose of the polarized plug. Power-Cord Protection – Power-supply cords should be routed so that they are not likely to be walked on or pinched by items placed upon or against them, paying particular attention to cords at plugs, convenience receptacles, and the point where they exit from the product. Lightning – For added protection for this product during a lightning storm, or when it is left unattended and unused for long periods of time, unplug it from the wall outlet and disconnect the antenna or cable system. This will prevent damage to the product due to lightning and power-line surges. Power Lines – An outside antenna system should not be located in the vicinity of overhead power lines or other electric light or power circuits, or where it can fall into such power lines or circuits. When installing an outside antenna system, extreme care should be taken to keep from touching such power lines or circuits as contact with them might be fatal. Overloading – Do not overload wall outlets, extension cords, or integral convenience receptacles as this can result in a risk of fire or electric shock. Object and Liquid Entry – Never push objects of any kind into this product through openings as they may touch dangerous voltage points or short-out parts that could result in a fire or electric shock. Never spill liquid of any kind on the product. Servicing – Do not attempt to service this product yourself as opening or removing covers may expose you to dangerous voltage or other hazards. Refer all servicing to qualified service personnel. Damage Requiring Service – Unplug this product from the wall outlet and refer servicing to qualified service personnel under the following conditions: a) When the power-supply cord or plug is damaged, b) If liquid has been spilled, or objects have fallen into the product, c) If the product has been exposed to rain or water, I CAUTION 0101V630_Cau_EN(U) 2 12/27/01, 7:45 PM SAFETY SAFETY INSTRUCTIONS INSTRUCTIONS d) 20 21 22 23 If the product does not operate normally by following the operating instructions. Adjust only those controls that are covered by the operating instructions as an improper adjustment of other controls may result in damage and will often require extensive work by a qualified technician to restore the product to its normal operation, e) If the product has been dropped or damaged in any way, and f) When the product exhibits a distinct change in performance - this indicates a need for service. Replacement Parts – When replacement parts are required, be sure the service technician has used replacement parts specified by the manufacturer or have the same characteristics as the original part. Unauthorized substitutions may result in fire, electric shock, or other hazards. Safety Check – Upon completion of any service or repairs to this product, ask the service technician to perform safety checks to determine that the product is in proper operating condition. Wall or Ceiling Mounting – The unit should be mounted to a wall or ceiling only as recommended by the manufacturer. Heat – The product should be situated away from heat sources such as radiators, heat registers, stoves, or other products (including amplifiers) that produce heat. 24 Outdoor Antenna Grounding – If an outside antenna or cable system is connected to the product, be sure the antenna or cable system is grounded so as to provide some protection against voltage surges and built-up static charges. Article 810 of the National Electrical Code, ANSI/ NFPA 70, provides information with regard to proper grounding of the mast and supporting structure, grounding of the lead-in wire to an antenna discharge unit, size of grounding conductors, location of antenna discharge unit, connection to grounding electrodes, and requirements for the grounding electrode. EXAMPLE OF ANTENNA GROUNDING MAST ANTENNA LEAD IN WIRE GROUND CLAMP ANTENNA DISCHARGE UNIT (NEC SECTION 810–20) ELECTRIC SERVICE EQUIPMENT GROUNDING CONDUCTORS (NEC SECTION 810–21) GROUND CLAMPS Note to CATV system installer: This reminder is provided to call the CATV system installer’s attention to Article 820-40 of the NEC that provides guidelines for proper grounding and, in particular, specifies that the cable ground shall be connected to the grounding system of the building, as close to the point of cable entry as practical. POWER SERVICE GROUNDING ELECTRODE SYSTEM (NEC ART 250. PART H) NEC – NATIONAL ELECTRICAL CODE FCC INFORMATION (for US customers only) 1. 2. 3. IMPORTANT NOTICE : DO NOT MODIFY THIS UNIT! This product, when installed as indicated in the instructions contained in this manual, meets FCC requirements. Modifications not expressly approved by Yamaha may void your authority, granted by the FCC, to use the product. IMPORTANT : When connecting this product to accessories and/or another product use only high quality shielded cables. Cable/s supplied with this product MUST be used. Follow all installation instructions. Failure to follow instructions could void your FCC authorization to use this product in the USA. NOTE : This product has been tested and found to comply with the requirements listed in FCC Regulations, Part 15 for Class “B” digital devices. Compliance with these requirements provides a reasonable level of assurance that your use of this product in a residential environment will not result in harmful interference with other electronic devices. This equipment generates/uses radio frequencies and, if not installed and used according to the instructions found in the users manual, may cause interference harmful to the operation of other electronic devices. Compliance with FCC regulations does not guarantee that interference will not occur in all installations. If this product is found to be the source of interference, which can be determined by turning the unit “OFF” and “ON”, please try to eliminate the problem by using one of the following measures: Relocate either this product or the device that is being affected by the interference. Utilize power outlets that are on different branch (circuit breaker or fuse) circuits or install AC line filter/s. In the case of radio or TV interference, relocate/reorient the antenna. If the antenna lead-in is 300 ohm ribbon lead, change the lead-in to coaxial type cable. If these corrective measures do not produce satisfactory results, please contact the local retailer authorized to distribute this type of product. If you can not locate the appropriate retailer, please contact Yamaha Electronics Corp., U.S.A. 6660 Orangethorpe Ave, Buena Park, CA 90620. The above statements apply ONLY to those products distributed by Yamaha Corporation of America or its subsidiaries. CAUTION II 0101V630_Cau_EN(U) 3 12/27/01, 7:45 PM CAUTION: READ THIS BEFORE OPERATING YOUR UNIT. 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 To assure the finest performance, please read this manual carefully. Keep it in a safe place for future reference. Install this unit in a well ventilated, cool, dry, clean place with at least 30 cm on the top, 20 cm on the left and right, and 10 cm at the back of this unit — away from direct sunlight, heat sources, vibration, dust, moisture, and/or cold. Locate this unit away from other electrical appliances, motors, or transformers to avoid humming sounds. To prevent fire or electrical shock, do not place this unit where it may get exposed to rain, water, and/or any type of liquid. Do not expose this unit to sudden temperature changes from cold to hot, and do not locate this unit in a environment with high humidity (i.e. a room with a humidifier) to prevent condensation inside this unit, which may cause an electrical shock, fire, damage to this unit, and/or personal injury. On the top of this unit, do not place: – Other components, as they may cause damage and/or discoloration on the surface of this unit. – Burning objects (i.e. candles), as they may cause fire, damage to this unit, and/or personal injury. – Containers with liquid in them, as they may cause electrical shock to the user and/or damage to this unit. Do not cover this unit with a newspaper, tablecloth, curtain, etc. in order not to obstruct heat radiation. If the temperature inside this unit rises, it may cause fire, damage to this unit, and/or personal injury. Do not plug in this unit to a wall outlet until all connections are complete. Do not operate this unit upside-down. It may overheat, possibly causing damage. Do not use force on switches, knobs and/or cords. When disconnecting the power cord from the wall outlet, grasp the plug; do not pull the cord. Do not clean this unit with chemical solvents; this might damage the finish. Use a clean, dry cloth. Only voltage specified on this unit must be used. Using this unit with a higher voltage than specified is dangerous and may cause fire, damage to this unit, and/or personal injury. YAMAHA will not be held responsible for any damage resulting from use of this unit with a voltage other than specified. 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 To prevent damage by lightning, disconnect the power cord from the wall outlet during an electrical storm. Take care of this unit so that no foreign objects and/or liquid drops inside this unit. Do not attempt to modify or fix this unit. Contact qualified YAMAHA service personnel when any service is needed. The cabinet should never be opened for any reasons. When not planning to use this unit for long periods of time (i.e. vacation), disconnect the AC power plug from the wall outlet. Be sure to read the “TROUBLESHOOTING” section on common operating errors before concluding that this unit is faulty. Before moving this unit, press STANDBY/ON to set this unit in the standby mode, and disconnect the AC power plug from the wall outlet. VOLTAGE SELECTOR (China and General models only) The VOLTAGE SELECTOR on the rear panel of this unit must be set for your local main voltage BEFORE plugging into the AC main supply. Voltages are 110/120/220/240 V AC, 50/60 Hz. This unit is not disconnected from the AC power source as long as it is connected to the wall outlet, even if this unit itself is turned off. This state is called the standby mode. In this state, this unit is designed to consume a very small quantity of power. IMPORTANT Please record the serial number of this unit in the space below. MODEL: Serial No.: The serial number is located on the rear of the unit. Retain this Owner’s Manual in a safe place for future reference. FOR CANADIAN CUSTOMERS To prevent electric shock, match wide blade of plug to wide slot and fully insert. This Class B digital apparatus complies with Canadian ICES-003. We Want You Listening For A Lifetime YAMAHA and the Electronic Industries Association’s Consumer Electronics Group want you to get the most out of your equipment by playing it at a safe level. One that lets the sound come through loud and clear without annoying blaring or distortion – and, most importantly, without affecting your sensitive hearing. Since hearing damage from loud sounds is often undetectable until it is too late, YAMAHA and the Electronic Industries Association’s Consumer Electronics Group recommend you to avoid prolonged exposure from excessive volume levels. III CAUTION 0101V630_Cau_EN(U) 4 12/27/01, 7:45 PM INTRODUCTION CONTENTS CONTENTS ............................................................ 1 FEATURES ............................................................. 2 GETTING STARTED ............................................ 3 Checking the package contents ................................. 3 Installing batteries in the remote control ................... 3 CONTROLS AND FUNCTIONS ......................... 4 PREPARATION SET MENU ........................................................... 40 Adjusting the items on the SET MENU .................. 40 1 SPEAKER SET (speaker mode settings) ............ 41 2 LFE LEVEL ........................................................ 43 3 SP DLY TIME (speaker delay time) ................... 43 4 D. RANGE (dynamic range) ............................... 44 5 L/R BALANCE (balance of the main left and right speakers) ..................................................... 44 6 HP TONE CTRL (headphone tone control) ........ 44 7 I/O ASSIGN (input/output assignment) .............. 44 8 INPUT MODE (initial input mode) .................... 45 9 DISPLAY SET .................................................... 45 10MEM. GUARD (memory guard) ........................ 45 PREPARATION Front panel ................................................................ 4 Remote control .......................................................... 6 Using the remote control ........................................... 7 Front panel display .................................................... 8 INTRODUCTION ADVANCED OPERATION INTRODUCTION REMOTE CONTROL FEATURES ................... 46 SPEAKER SETUP ................................................. 9 Speakers .................................................................... 9 Speaker placement .................................................... 9 Connecting the speakers .......................................... 10 Before connecting components ............................... 13 Connecting video components ................................ 14 Connecting audio components ................................ 16 Connecting the antennas ......................................... 17 Connecting an external amplifier ............................ 18 Connecting an external decoder .............................. 18 Connecting the power supply cords ........................ 19 Turning on the power .............................................. 19 Before you begin ..................................................... 21 Using the test tone ................................................... 21 Changing parameter settings ................................... 51 PRO LOGIC Music parameter descriptions ....... 51 ADDITIONAL INFORMATION ADVANCED OPERATION SPEAKER MODE SETTINGS .......................... 20 ADJUSTING SPEAKER OUTPUT LEVELS .. 21 ADJUSTING THE LEVEL OF THE EFFECT SPEAKERS ....................................................... 49 ADJUSTING THE DELAY TIME ..................... 50 ADJUSTING THE PARAMETER SETTINGS FOR PRO LOGIC MUSIC ......................... 51 BASIC OPERATION CONNECTIONS .................................................. 13 Control area ............................................................. 46 Setting the manufacturer code ................................. 47 Clearing setup manufacturer codes ......................... 47 Controlling other components ................................. 48 TROUBLESHOOTING ...................................... 52 GLOSSARY .......................................................... 56 SPECIFICATIONS .............................................. 58 BASIC OPERATION BASIC PLAYBACK ............................................ 23 ADDITIONAL INFORMATION Input modes and indications .................................... 25 Selecting a sound field program .............................. 26 DIGITAL SOUND FIELD PROCESSING (DSP) ................................................................. 29 Understanding sound fields ..................................... 29 Hi-Fi DSP programs ................................................ 29 CINEMA-DSP ...................................................... 30 Sound design of CINEMA-DSP ............................. 30 CINEMA-DSP programs ........................................ 32 TUNING ................................................................ 34 Automatic and manual tuning ................................. 34 Presetting stations .................................................... 35 Tuning in to a preset station .................................... 37 Exchanging preset stations ...................................... 37 SLEEP TIMER ..................................................... 38 Setting the sleep timer ............................................. 38 Canceling the sleep timer ........................................ 38 RECORDING ....................................................... 39 English 1 0102V630_1-8_EN(U) 1 12/27/01, 7:45 PM FEATURES Built-in 6-channel power amplifier Other features ◆ Minimum RMS output power (0.06% THD, 20 Hz – 20 kHz, 8Ω) Main: 75 W + 75 W Center: 75 W Rear: 75 W + 75 W Rear center: 75 W ◆ 96-kHz/24-bit D/A converter ◆ “SET MENU” for optimizing this unit for your Audio/Video system ◆ Test tone generator for easier speaker balance adjustment ◆ 6-channel external decoder input ◆ S-video signal input/output capability ◆ Component video input/output capability ◆ Optical and coaxial digital audio signal jacks ◆ Sleep timer ◆ Remote control with preset manufacturer codes Multi-mode digital sound field processing ◆ ◆ ◆ ◆ Dolby Pro Logic/Dolby Pro Logic decoder Dolby Digital/Dolby Digital EX decoder DTS/DTS-ES compatible decoder CINEMA DSP: Combination of YAMAHA DSP technology and Dolby Pro Logic, Dolby Digital or DTS ◆ Virtual CINEMA DSP ◆ SILENT CINEMA DSP Sophisticated AM/FM Tuner ◆ 40-Station random access preset tuning ◆ Automatic preset tuning ◆ Preset station shifting capability (Preset editing) ■ About this manual • y indicates a tip for your operation. • Some operations can be performed by using either the buttons on the main unit or on the remote control. In cases when the button names differ between the main unit and the remote control, the button name on the remote control is given in parentheses. • This manual is printed prior to production. Design and specifications are subject to change in part for the reason of the improvement in operativity ability, and others. In this case, the product has priority. Manufactured under license from Dolby Laboratories. “DTS”, “ES” and “DTS Digital Surround” are trademarks of Digital Theater Systems, Inc. “Dolby”, “Pro Logic”, and the double-D symbol are trademarks of Dolby Laboratories. 2 0102V630_1-8_EN(U) 2 12/27/01, 7:45 PM GETTING STARTED INTRODUCTION Checking the package contents Check your package to make sure it contains the following items. Remote control AM loop antenna Indoor FM antenna (U.S.A., Canada, China, Korea and General models) Front VIDEO AUX jack cap 75-ohm/300-ohm antenna adapter (U.K. model) (Europe, U.K., Australia and Singapore models) SYSTEM POWER STANDBY POWER POWER TV AV CD MD/CD-R TUNER SLEEP DVD D-TV/CBL V-AUX 6CH INPUT VCR 1 VCR2/DVR A AMP + + + TV VOL TV CH VOLUME – – TV MUTE TV INPUT PREPARATION Batteries (4) (AAA, R03, UM-4) TRANSMIT CODE SET – MUTE HALL JAZZ CLUB ROCK CONCERT ENTERTAINMENT 1 2 3 4 TV SPORTS MONO MOVIE MOVIE THEATER 1 MOVIE THEATER 2 5 6 7 8 SELECT EX/ES STEREO 0 +10 /DTS SUR. 9 ENTER EFFECT LEVEL PRESET/CH SET MENU MENU TITLE A/B/C/D/E SELECT + BASIC OPERATION – TEST RETURN DISPLAY REC AUDIO DISC SKIP Insert the batteries in the correct direction by aligning the + and – marks on the batteries with the polarity markings (+ and –) inside the battery compartment. 1 • Change all of the batteries if you notice a decrease in the operating range of the remote control, that the indicator does not flash, or the light becoming dim. • Do not use old batteries together with new ones. • Do not use different types of batteries (such as alkaline and manganese batteries) together. Read the packaging carefully as these different types of batteries may have the same shape and color. • If the batteries have leaked, dispose of them immediately. Avoid touching the leaked material or letting it come into contact with clothing, etc. Clean the battery compartment thoroughly before installing new batteries. Press the part and slide off the battery compartment cover. 2 Insert the four supplied batteries (AAA, R03, UM-4) according to the polarity markings on the inside of the battery compartment. 3 Slide the cover back on so that it snaps into place. English 1 APPENDIX If the remote control is without batteries for more than 2 minutes, or if exhausted batteries remain in the remote control, the contents of the memory may be cleared. When the memory is cleared, insert new batteries, set up the manufacturer code that may have been cleared. 3 3 0102V630_1-8_EN(U) 3 ADDITIONAL INFORMATION 2 ■ Notes on batteries ADVANCED OPERATION Installing batteries in the remote control 12/27/01, 7:45 PM CONTROLS AND FUNCTIONS Front panel 1 2 3 4 5 6 INPUT 7 VOLUME INPUT M0DE 6CH INPUT NATURAL SOUND AV RECEIVER PRESET/TUNING FM/AM EDIT STANDBY /ON TUNING MODE MEMORY AUTO/MAN'L MONO MAN'L/AUTO FM BASS SILENT TREBLE SPEAKERS A B VIDEO AUX STEREO PROGRAM PRESET/TUNING A/B/C/D/E EFFECT – PHONES 8 9 0 q w e + – r + S VIDEO VIDEO t L AUDIO R OPTICAL y PRESET/TUNING FM/AM EDIT TUNING MODE MEMORY AUTO/MAN'L MONO MAN'L/AUTO FM ui o p 1 STANDBY/ON 5 INPUT l / h Turns this unit on, or set it to the standby mode. When you turn this unit on, you will hear a click and there will be a 4 to 5-second delay before this unit can reproduce sound. Selects the input source you want to listen to or watch. Standby mode In this mode, this unit will consume a small amount of power in order to receive infrared-signals from the remote control. 2 Remote control sensor Receives signals from the remote control. 6 VOLUME Controls the output level of all audio channels. This does not affect the OUT (REC) level. 7 6CH INPUT Selects the audio source connected to the 6CH INPUT jacks. This audio takes priority over the source selected with INPUT l / h (or the input selector buttons on the remote control). Shows information about the operational status of this unit. 8 SILENT (PHONES jack) Allows you enjoy DSP effect for private listening with headphones. When you connect headphones, no signals are output to the speakers or the OUTPUT jacks. 4 INPUT MODE 9 SPEAKERS A/B Sets the priority for the types of input signals (AUTO, DTS, ANALOG) to receive when one component is connected to two or more input jacks. Priority cannot be set when 6CH INPUT is selected as the input source. Turns the set of main speakers connected to the A and/or B terminals on or off. 3 Front panel display 4 0102V630_1-8_EN(U) 4 12/27/01, 7:45 PM CONTROLS AND FUNCTIONS 0 STEREO/EFFECT q PROGRAM l / h Selects the DSP program. w PRESET/TUNING l / h i TUNING MODE (AUTO/MAN’L MONO) Switches the tuning mode between automatic and manual. o MEMORY (MAN’L/AUTO FM) Stores the current station in the memory. p FM/AM Switches the reception band between FM and AM. PREPARATION Selects preset station numbers 1 to 8 when the colon (:) appears in the front panel display. Selects the tuning frequency when the colon (:) does not appear. u PRESET/TUNING (EDIT) Switches the function of PRESET/TUNING l / h between selecting a preset station number and tuning (the colon (:) turns on or off). This button is also used to exchange the assignment of two preset stations with each other. INTRODUCTION Switches between normal stereo and DSP effect reproduction. When STEREO is selected, 2-channel signals are directed to the main left and right speakers without effect sounds and all Dolby Digital and DTS signals (except the LFE channel) are mixed down to the main left and right speakers. e A/B/C/D/E Selects preset station groups A to E. r BASS BASIC OPERATION Adjusts the low-frequency response for the main left and right channels. Turn right to increase or turn left to decrease the lowfrequency response. t TREBLE Adjusts the high-frequency response for the main left and right channels. Turn right to increase or turn left to decrease the highfrequency response. ADVANCED OPERATION y VIDEO AUX jacks EO ADDITIONAL INFORMATION Inputs for audio and video signals from a portable external source (game console, etc.). Set the input source to V-AUX to enjoy source signals from these jacks. When the VIDEO AUX jacks on the front panel are not used, you can attach the provided front VIDEO AUX jack cap as shown in the illustration. When the cap is not attached, be sure retain it carefully. X AU VID AL TIC OP L AU DIO R EO VID IDEO SV APPENDIX English 5 0102V630_1-8_EN(U) 5 12/27/01, 7:45 PM CONTROLS AND FUNCTIONS Remote control This section describes the remote control controls and their functions. Make sure that the AMP mode is selected before starting operation. See “REMOTE CONTROL FEATURES” on pages 46 to 48. 1 2 TRANSMIT CODE SET SYSTEM STANDBY POWER POWER TV AV CD MD/CD-R TUNER SLEEP DVD D-TV/CBL V-AUX 6CH INPUT VCR 1 VCR2/DVR 9 3 Input selector buttons 0 Select the input source and set the remote control to operate the selected source component. q 4 DSP program w Select DSP programs for the AMP position. Press a button repeatedly to select a DSP program within that group. e r + + + TV VOL TV CH VOLUME – – – TV MUTE TV INPUT t y HALL JAZZ CLUB ROCK CONCERT 1 2 3 4 TV SPORTS MONO MOVIE MOVIE THEATER 1 MOVIE THEATER 2 5 6 7 8 SELECT EX/ES STEREO 0 +10 /DTS SUR. 9 ENTERTAINMENT ENTER LEVEL PRESET/CH A/B/C/D/E 6 – SELECT + 8 TRANSMIT indicator u Flashes while the remote control is sending signals. 9 STANDBY i Sets this unit in the standby mode. 0 SYSTEM POWER Turns on the power of this unit. TEST 7 Used when changing the setting and to implement the settings. Outputs the test tone to adjust the speaker levels. SET MENU MENU TITLE 6 Multi control section 7 TEST EFFECT 5 5 LEVEL Selects the effect speaker channel to be adjusted. MUTE 4 2 CODE SET Used when setting up the manufacturer code (see page 47). AMP A Outputs infrared control signals. Aim this window at the component you want to operate. 8 POWER 3 1 Infrared window DISPLAY RETURN REC AUDIO DISC SKIP q SLEEP Sets the sleep timer. w 6CH INPUT Selects the audio source connected to the 6CH INPUT jacks. e AMP Sets the remote control to the AMP mode for controlling this unit. r Å Sets the remote control to operate other component (not necessarily connected to this unit) without changing this unit’s input source. t VOLUME +/– Increases or decreases the volume level. y MUTE Mutes the sound. Press again to restore the audio output to the previous volume level. 6 0102V630_1-8_EN(U) 6 12/27/01, 7:45 PM CONTROLS AND FUNCTIONS u STEREO/EFFECT Using the remote control INPUT VOLUME INPUT M0DE 6CH INPUT NATURAL SOUND AV RECEIVER PRESET/TUNING FM/AM EDIT STANDBY /ON TUNING MODE MEMORY AUTO/MAN'L MONO MAN'L/AUTO FM BASS SILENT i SET MENU INTRODUCTION Switches between normal stereo and DSP effect reproduction. When STEREO is selected, 2-channel signals are directed to the main left and right speakers without effect sounds and all Dolby Digital and DTS signals (except the LFE channel) are mixed down to the main left and right speakers. TREBLE SPEAKERS A B VIDEO AUX PROGRAM STEREO PRESET/TUNING A/B/C/D/E EFFECT – PHONES + – + S VIDEO VIDEO L AUDIO R OPTICAL Selects the SET MENU mode. 30° 30° PREPARATION VCR 1 Approximately 6 m (20 feet) VCR2/DVR ■ Handling the remote control ADVANCED OPERATION • Do not spill water or other liquids on the remote control. • Do not drop the remote control. • Do not leave or store the remote control in the following types of conditions: – high humidity or temperature such as near a heater, stove or bath; – dusty places; or – in places subject to extremely low temperatures. BASIC OPERATION The remote control transmits a directional infrared beam. Be sure to aim the remote control directly at the remote control sensor on the main unit during operation. ADDITIONAL INFORMATION APPENDIX English 7 0102V630_1-8_EN(U) 7 12/27/01, 7:45 PM CONTROLS AND FUNCTIONS Front panel display 1 MATRIX 2 VCR2/DVR DIGITAL VIRTUAL SILENT PRO LOGIC / VCR1 V-AUX D-TV/CBL 3 DVD DTS DOLBY DIGITAL PRO LOGIC MOVIE THTR 12 ENTERTAINMENT MD/CD-R TUNER CD STEREO AUTO MUTE VOLUME TUNED MEMORY SLEEP L DSP dB mS PCM 5 4 6 7 8 9 C R LFE RL RC RR 0 q w e r t 1 Processor indicators 0 STEREO indicator Lights up when the t, g, VIRTUAL, PRO LOGIC / or DSP are activated. Lights up when this unit is receiving a strong signal for an FM stereo broadcast while the “AUTO” indicator is lit. MATRIX lights up when the Dolby Digital EX decoder or the DTS-ES compatible decoder is activated. q TUNED indicator 2 Input source indicator w MEMORY indicator Shows the current input source with a cursor. 3 MUTE indicator Flashes while the MUTE function is on. 4 VOLUME level indicator Indicates the volume level. 5 v indicator Lights up when this unit is reproducing PCM (pulse code modulation) digital audio signals. Lights up when this unit is tuned to a station. Flashes to show a station can be stored. e AUTO indicator Shows that this unit is in the automatic tuning mode. r SLEEP indicator Lights up while the sleep timer is on. t Input channel indicator Indicates the channel components of input signals being received. 6 SILENT indicator Lights up when headphones are connected while the digital sound field processor is on. 7 Headphones indicator Lights up when headphones are connected. 8 DSP program indicators The name of the selected DSP program lights up when the ENTERTAINMENT, MOVIE THEATER 1, MOVIE THEATER 2 or V/DTS SURROUND DSP program is selected. 9 Multi-information display Shows the current DSP program name and other information when adjusting or changing settings. 8 0102V630_1-8_EN(U) 8 12/27/01, 7:45 PM PREPARATION SPEAKER SETUP Speaker placement ■ Use of a subwoofer expands your sound field Rear speaker (R) Subwoofer Main speaker (L) 1.8 m (6 feet) Rear center speaker Rear speaker (L) ■ Main speakers Place the main left and right speakers an equal distance from the ideal listening position. The distance between each speaker and each side of the video monitor should also be the same. ■ Center speaker Align the front face of the center speaker with the front face of your video monitor. Place the speaker as close to the monitor as possible (such as directly over or under the monitor) and centrally between the main speakers. ■ Rear speakers Place these speakers behind your listening position, facing slightly inwards, nearly 1.8 m (6 feet) above the floor. ■ Rear center speaker Place the rear center speaker in the center between the rear left and right speakers at the same height from the floor as the rear speakers. ■ Subwoofer Note • If you do not use any of effect speakers (rear, center and/or rear center), change the settings of SPEAKER SET items at the SET MENU to designate the signals to other terminals you connect speakers to. English CAUTION Use magnetically shielded speakers. If this type of speakers still creates the interference with the monitor, place the speakers away from the monitor. 9 0103V630_9-18_EN(U) 9 12/27/01, 7:45 PM APPENDIX The position of the subwoofer is not so critical, because low bass sounds are not highly directional. But it is better to place the subwoofer near the main speakers. Turn it slightly toward the center of the room to reduce wall reflections. ADDITIONAL INFORMATION It is also possible to further expand your system with the addition of a subwoofer. The use of a subwoofer is effective not only for reinforcing bass frequencies from any or all channels, but also for reproducing the LFE (low-frequency effect) channel with high fidelity when playing back Dolby Digital or DTS signals. The YAMAHA Active Servo Processing Subwoofer System is ideal for natural and lively bass reproduction. Main speaker (R) ADVANCED OPERATION The main speakers should be high-performance models and have enough power-handling capacity to accept the maximum output of your audio system. The other speakers do not have to be equal to the main speakers. For precise sound localization, however, it is ideal to use the models of equivalent performance with the main speakers. Center speaker BASIC OPERATION The main speakers are used for the main source sound plus effect sounds. They will probably be the speakers from your present stereo system. The rear speakers are used for effect and surround sounds. The center speaker is for the center sounds (dialog, vocals, etc.). The rear center speaker supplements the rear (left and right) speakers and provides for more realistic front-to-back transitions. Refer to the following diagram when you place the speakers. PREPARATION This unit has been designed to provide the best soundfield quality with a 6-speaker system, using main left and right speakers, rear left and right speakers, a center speaker, and a rear center speaker. If you use different brands of speakers (with different tonal qualities) in your system, the tone of a moving human voice and other types of sound may not shift smoothly. We recommend that you use speakers from the same manufacturer or speakers with the same tonal quality. INTRODUCTION Speakers SPEAKER SETUP Connecting the speakers Be sure to connect the left channel (L), right channel (R), “+” (red) and “–” (black) properly. If the connections are faulty, no sound will be heard from the speakers, and if the polarity of the speaker connections is incorrect, the sound will be unnatural and lack bass. CAUTION • Use speakers with the specified impedance shown on the rear panel of this unit. • Do not let the bare speaker wires touch each other or any metal part of this unit. This could damage this unit and/or the speakers. If necessary, use the SET MENU to change the speaker mode settings according to the number and size of the speakers in your configuration after you finish connecting your speakers. ■ Speaker cables A speaker cord is actually a pair of insulated cables running side by side. One cable is colored or shaped differently, perhaps with a stripe, groove or ridge. 10 mm (3/8”) 1 2 1 Remove approximately 10 mm (3/8”) of insulation from each of the speaker cables. 2 Twist the exposed wires of the cable together to prevent short circuits. ■ Connecting to the SPEAKERS terminals 2 Red: positive (+) Black: negative (–) 3 1 1 2 Unscrew the knob. 3 Tighten the knob to secure the wire. Insert one bare wire into the hole in the side of each terminal. (U.S.A. model) y Banana plug (U.S.A., Canada, Australia, China, Korea and General models) • Banana plug connections are also possible. First, tighten the knob and then insert the banana plug connector into the end of the corresponding terminal. (U.S.A. model) ■ MAIN SPEAKERS terminals One or two speaker systems can be connected to these terminals. When using only one speaker system, it can be connected to either the MAIN A or the MAIN B terminals. ■ REAR SPEAKERS terminals A rear speaker system can be connected to these terminals. ■ CENTER SPEAKER terminals A center speaker can be connected to these terminals. ■ REAR CENTER SPEAKER terminals A rear center speaker can be connected to these terminals. 10 0103V630_9-18_EN(U) 10 12/27/01, 7:45 PM SPEAKER SETUP Main B speaker Right Main A speaker Left Right Left Center speaker 2 VIDEO AUDIO L R S VIDEO + DVD COMPONENT VIDEO PB/CB PR/CR GND B Y DVD AC OUTLETS IN MAIN D-TV /CBL DVD UNBAL. D-TV /CBL R FM ANT 6CH INPUT VIDEO MONITOR OUT OUTPUT MAIN A OR B: 8 A+B:16 : 8 CENTER REAR CENTER : 8 : 8 REAR REAR CENTER MIN. /SPEAKER MIN. /SPEAKER MIN. /SPEAKER MIN. /SPEAKER MIN. /SPEAKER CENTER R L IMPEDANCE SELECTOR 5 4 6 Right 7 Left Rear speaker ADVANCED OPERATION Subwoofer system 3 REAR (SURROUND) SET BEFORE POWER ON BASIC OPERATION DIGITAL OUTPUT S VIDEO L OUTPUT L MAIN MAIN A OR B :4 MIN. /SPEAKER A+B :8 MIN. /SPEAKER CENTER :6 MIN. /SPEAKER REAR CENTER :6 MIN. /SPEAKER REAR :6 MIN. /SPEAKER SUB WOOFER REAR (SURROUND) R L R MONITOR OUT SUB WOOFER CENTER + + SURROUND MD/CD-R OPTICAL – – OUT VCR 1 75 MD/CD-R – TUNER AM ANT OUT (REC) MD /CD-R IN (PLAY) – PREPARATION – IN CD + A VCR 2 /VDR CD CENTER + VIDEO OUT COAXIAL OPTICAL D-TV/CBL 3 SPEAKERS REAR CENTER L MAIN R AUDIO DIGITAL INPUT INTRODUCTION 1 Rear center speaker 1 4 2 ADDITIONAL INFORMATION 5 7 6 The diagram shows the speaker layout in the listening room. When using a subwoofer with built-in amplifier, including the YAMAHA Active Servo Processing Subwoofer System, connect the input jack of the subwoofer system to this jack. Low bass signals distributed from the main, center and/or rear channels are directed to this jack in accordance with your SPEAKER SET selections. The LFE (low-frequency effect) signals generated when Dolby Digital or DTS is decoded are also directed to this jack in accordance with your SPEAKER SET selections. 11 0103V630_9-18_EN(U) 11 12/27/01, 7:45 PM English Notes • The cut-off frequency of the SUBWOOFER jack is 90 Hz. • If you do not use a subwoofer, designate the signals to the main left and right speakers by changing the setting of SPEAKER SET item “1E BASS” on the SET MENU to MAIN. • Use the control on the subwoofer to adjust its volume level. It is also possible to adjust the volume level by using this unit’s remote control (see “ADJUSTING THE LEVEL OF THE EFFECT SPEAKERS” on page 49). APPENDIX ■ SUBWOOFER jack SPEAKER SETUP ■ IMPEDANCE SELECTOR switch WARNING Do not change setting of the IMPEDANCE SELECTOR switch when the power of this unit is on, this may damage the unit. If this unit fails to turn on when STANDBY/ON (or SYSTEM POWER) is pressed, the IMPEDANCE SELECTOR switch may not be fully slid to either position. If so, slide the switch all the way to either position when this unit is in the standby mode. Select the switch position (left or right) according to the impedance of the speakers in your system. Be sure to move this switch only when this unit is in the standby mode. IMPEDANCE SELECTOR switch Switch position Speaker Main MAIN A OR B: 8 A+B:16 : 8 CENTER REAR CENTER: 8 : 8 REAR MAIN A OR B :4 MIN. /SPEAKER A+B :8 MIN. /SPEAKER CENTER :6 MIN. /SPEAKER REAR CENTER :6 MIN. /SPEAKER REAR :6 MIN. /SPEAKER MIN. /SPEAKER MIN. /SPEAKER MIN. /SPEAKER MIN. /SPEAKER MIN. /SPEAKER SET BEFORE POWER ON Impedance level If you use one set of main speakers, the impedance of each speaker must be 4 Ω or higher. If you use two sets of main speakers, the impedance of each speaker must be 8 Ω or higher. IMPEDANCE SELECTOR Left SPEAKERS REAR CENTER L MAIN R + CENTER + + – – A – Center The impedance must be 6 Ω or higher. Rear Center The impedance must be 6 Ω or higher. Rear – – OMPONENT VIDEO R/CR PB/CB B Y REAR (SURROUND) R L Main If you use one set of main speakers, the impedance of each speaker must be 8 Ω or higher. If you use two sets of main speakers, the impedance of each speaker must be 16 Ω or higher. [Canada model only] The impedance of each speaker must be 8 Ω or higher. Center The impedance must be 8 Ω or higher. Rear Center The impedance must be 8 Ω or higher. + + R L OUTPUT L R MAIN MAIN A OR B :4 MIN. /SPEAKER A+B :8 MIN. /SPEAKER CENTER :6 MIN. /SPEAKER REAR CENTER :6 MIN. /SPEAKER REAR :6 MIN. /SPEAKER The impedance of each speaker must be 6 Ω or higher. MAIN A OR B: 8 A+B:16 : 8 CENTER REAR CENTER: 8 : 8 REAR REAR CENTER MIN. /SPEAKER MIN. /SPEAKER MIN. /SPEAKER MIN. /SPEAKER MIN. /SPEAKER CENTER R REAR (SURROUND) L SET BEFORE POWER ON IMPEDANCE SELECTOR (U.S.A. model) Right Rear The impedance of each speaker must be 8 Ω or higher. 12 0103V630_9-18_EN(U) 12 12/27/01, 7:45 PM CONNECTIONS This unit has digital jacks for direct transmission of digital signals through either coaxial or fiber optic cables. You can use the digital jacks to input PCM, Dolby Digital and DTS bitstreams. To enjoy multi-channel sound track of DVD software, etc. with DSP effect, you need to make digital connection. All digital input jacks are acceptable for 96-kHz sampling digital signals. CAUTION Do not connect this unit or other components to the mains power until all connections between the components have been completed. BASIC OPERATION DIGITAL INPUT jacks (pages 13-16) Note • The OPTICAL jacks on this unit conform to the EIA standard. If you use a fiber optic cable that does not conform to this standard, this unit may not function properly. Antenna input terminals (page 17) Speaker terminals (pages 10-11) MAIN R AUDIO DIGITAL INPUT AUDIO SPEAKERS REAR CENTER L + VIDEO S VIDEO VIDEO L R ADVANCED OPERATION Video component jacks (pages 14-15) Audio component jacks (page 16) L VCR 2 /VDR DVD – IN CD COMPONENT VIDEO PR/CR PB/CB GND DVD D-TV /CBL SURROUND DVD UNBAL. D-TV /CBL FM ANT SUB WOOFER 6CH INPUT R REAR (SURROUND) R L R MAIN L REAR CENTER CENTER R S VIDEO L OUTPUT MONITOR OUT DIGITAL OUTPUT + + MAIN SUB WOOFER CENTER – B Y IN MD/CD-R OPTICAL – – OUT VCR 1 75 MD/CD-R – TUNER AM ANT OUT (REC) MD /CD-R IN (PLAY) + ADDITIONAL INFORMATION R CD CENTER + A OUT COAXIAL OPTICAL D-TV/CBL PREPARATION • Be sure all connections are made correctly, that is to say L (left) to L, R (right) to R, “+” to “+” and “–” to “–”. Some components require different connection methods and have different jack names. Refer to the operation instructions for each component to be connected to this unit. • When you connect other YAMAHA audio components (such as a tape deck, MD recorder and CD player or changer), connect them to the jack with the same number labels as !, #, $ etc. YAMAHA applies this labeling system to all its products. • After you have completed all connections, check them again to make sure they are correct. • The name of jack corresponds to input selector. INTRODUCTION ■ Connecting to digital jacks Before connecting components REAR (SURROUND) L VIDEO MONITOR OUT OUTPUT SUBWOOFER OUTPUT jack (page 11) DIGITAL OUTPUT jack (page 16) APPENDIX 6CH INPUT jacks (page 18) AC OUTLETS (page 19) OUTPUT jacks (page 18) English 13 0103V630_9-18_EN(U) 13 12/27/01, 7:45 PM CONNECTIONS Connecting video components Refer to the connection examples on the next page. ■ Types of video jacks There are three types of video jacks as follows: COMPONENT VIDEO S VIDEO VIDEO 2 1 PR/CR PB/CB Y 3 1 VIDEO jack Conventional composite video signal. 2 S VIDEO jack Transmits color and luminance separately and achives high-quality color reproduction. 3 COMPONENT VIDEO jacks Transmit color difference (PB/CB, PR/CR) and luminance separately and provide the best quality picture. • Each type of video jack works independently. Signals input through the composite video, S-video and component jacks are only output through the corresponding composite video, S-video, and component jacks. • Use a commercially available cable specified for connecting each type of jacks. • The description of the component video jacks may differ depending on the component (e.g. Y, CB, CR/Y, PB, PR/Y, B-Y, R-Y etc.). When using these jacks, refer also to the operation instructions for the component being connected. ■ Connecting a video monitor Connect the video input jack on your video monitor to the MONITOR OUT VIDEO jack. Note • If you connect this unit with a source component using S-video (or Component video) jacks, you also need to connect your video monitor using S-video (or Component video) jacks. ■ Connecting a DVD player/digital TV/cable TV Connect the optical digital audio signal output jack on your component to the DIGITAL INPUT jack and connect the video signal output jack on the component to the VIDEO jack on this unit. Then connect AUDIO jacks on your component to the AUDIO jacks on this unit. y • If your video component has an S-video output or component video output, connect the S-video signal output jack on the component to the S VIDEO jack or connect the component video signal output jacks on the component to the COMPONENT VIDEO jacks. • The AUDIO jacks are available for a video component which does not have optical digital output jack. However, multichannel reproduction cannot be obtained with audio signals input from AUDIO jacks. ■ Connecting a game console or camcorder Connect the optical digital audio signal output jack on your video component to the OPTICAL jack on the front panel and connect video signal output jack on the component to the VIDEO jack on the front panel. y • If your video component has an S-video output, connect the Svideo signal output jack on the component to the S VIDEO jack. • The AUDIO jacks are available for a video component such as a camcorder which does not have optical digital output jack. ■ Connecting a VCR or DVR (digital video recorder) Connect the audio signal input jacks on your video component to the AUDIO OUT jacks and connect the video signal input jack on the video component to the VIDEO OUT jack on this unit for picture recording. Connect the audio signal output jacks on your component to the AUDIO IN jacks and connect the video signal output jack on the component to the VIDEO IN jack on this unit to play a source from your recording component. Second VCR or digital video recorder can be connected using VCR 2/DVR jacks. y • If your video component has an S-video input, connect the Svideo signal input jack on the component to the S VIDEO OUT jack. • If your video component has an S-video output, connect the Svideo signal output jack on the component to the S VIDEO IN jack. Notes • Once you have connected a recording component to this unit, keep its power turned on while using this unit. If the power is off, this unit may distort the sound from other components. • S-video and component video signals pass independently through this unit’s video circuit. Make sure to connect this unit to both a source component and a recording component using the video jacks of the same system. 14 0103V630_9-18_EN(U) 14 12/27/01, 7:45 PM CONNECTIONS O VCR 1 AUDIO INPUT R L L AUDIO DIGITAL INPUT VIDEO INPUT AUDIO V V VIDEO S VIDEO L R VIDEO OUTPUT VIDEO OUTPUT V R INTRODUCTION AUDIO OUTPUT TV/digital TV/ cable TV OPTICAL OUTPUT VIDEO PREPARATION OUT R CD L VCR 2 /VDR IN CD TUNER AM ANT COAXIAL OPTICAL D-TV/CBL OUT VCR 1 DVD OUT (REC) MD /CD-R IN (PLAY) MD/CD-R MAIN D-TV /CBL SURROUND DVD COMPONENT VIDEO PR/CR PB/CB GND Y DVD IN 75 UNBAL. D-TV /CBL FM ANT MONITOR OUT SUB WOOFER CENTER DIGITAL OUTPUT VIDEO S VIDEO 6CH INPUT MONITOR OUT OUTPUT BASIC OPERATION MAIN A OR B :4 MIN. /SPEAKER A+B :8 MIN. /SPEAKER CENTER :6 MIN. /SPEAKER REAR CENTER :6 MIN. /SPEAKER REAR :6 MIN. /SPEAKER SUB WOOFER MD/CD-R OPTICAL V V R L VIDEO INPUT VIDEO OUTPUT AUDIO OUTPUT ADVANCED OPERATION O OPTICAL OUTPUT DVD player Video monitor INPUT VOLUME INPUT M0DE PRESET/TUNING ADDITIONAL INFORMATION 6CH INPUT FM/AM EDIT TUNING MODE MEMORY AUTO/MAN'L MONO MAN'L/AUTO FM BASS TREBLE VIDEO AUX A/B/C/D/E + – + S VIDEO VIDEO L AUDIO R APPENDIX – OPTICAL indicates signal direction VIDEO OUTPUT Game console or camcorder indicates left analog cables R indicates right analog cables O indicates optical cables V indicates video cables O OPTICAL OUTPUT 15 0103V630_9-18_EN(U) 15 12/27/01, 7:45 PM English V L CONNECTIONS y Connecting audio components • The AUDIO jacks are available for an CD recorder or MD recorder which does not have optical digital input or output jack. ■ Connecting a CD player Connect the coaxial digital output jack on your CD player to the DIGITAL INPUT CD jack. Notes • Once you have connected a recording component to this unit, keep its power turned on while using this unit. If the power is off, this unit may distort the sound from other components. • DIGITAL OUTPUT jack and analog OUT (REC) jacks are independent. Only digital signals are output from DIGITAL OUTPUT jack and analog signals from OUT (REC) jacks. y • The AUDIO jacks are available for a CD player which does not have coaxial digital output jack. ■ Connecting a CD recorder or MD recorder Connect the optical digital signal input jack on your CD recorder or MD recorder to the DIGITAL OUTPUT MD/ CD-R jack for digital recording. Connect the optical digital output jack on your CD recorder or MD recorder to the DIGITAL INPUT MD/ CD-R jack to play a source from your recording component. AUDIO AUDIO DIGITAL INPUT VIDEO L R S VIDEO VIDEO OUT COAXIAL OUTPUT R CD C L VCR 2 /VDR IN CD COAXIAL OPTICAL D-TV/CBL CD player DVD OPTICAL OUTPUT MD/CD-R OUT OUT (REC) MD /CD-R IN (PLAY) VCR 1 MAIN D-TV /CBL SURROUND DVD IN O O CD recorder or MD recorder OPTICAL INPUT SUB WOOFER MD/CD-R OPTICAL SUB WOOFER CENTER DIGITAL OUTPUT 6CH INPUT S VIDEO OUTPUT VIDEO MONITOR OUT indicates signal direction C indicates coaxial cables O indicates optical cables 16 0103V630_9-18_EN(U) 16 12/27/01, 7:45 PM CONNECTIONS Connecting the antennas ■ Connecting the AM loop antenna Set up the AM loop antenna, then connect it. 2 Press and hold the tab to insert the AM loop antenna lead wires into the AM ANT and GND terminals. 3 Orient the AM loop antenna for the best reception. Connect each antenna correctly to the designated terminals. AM loop antenna (included) Indoor FM antenna (included) EO VIDEO TUNER AM ANT PREPARATION 1 INTRODUCTION Both AM and FM indoor antennas are included with this unit. In general, these antennas should provide sufficient signal strength. GND DVD 75 UNBAL. BASIC OPERATION D-TV /CBL FM ANT MONIT OUT VIDEO R OUT FREQUENCY STEP Ground (GND terminal) For maximum safety and minimum interference, connect the antenna GND terminal to a good earth ground. A good earth ground is a metal stake driven into moist earth. 11 (7/16) 8 (5/16) 6 (1/14) Cut the external sleeve of the 75-ohm coaxial cable and prepare it for connection. 3 Lead wire A properly installed outdoor antenna provides clearer reception than an indoor one. If you experience poor reception quality, an outdoor antenna may improve the quality. Consult the nearest authorized YAMAHA dealer or service center about the outdoor antennas. FREQUENCY STEP switch (China and General models) Because the interstation frequency spacing FM/AM differs in different areas, set the FREQUENCY STEP switch (located on the rear panel) according to the frequency spacing in your area. North, Central and South America: 100 kHz/10 kHz Other area: 50 kHz/9 kHz Before setting this switch, disconnect the AC power plug of this unit from the AC outlet. 50kHz/9kHz ADDITIONAL INFORMATION Open the cover of the included 75-ohm/300-ohm antenna adapter. Unit: mm (inch) • The AM loop antenna should be placed away from this unit. • The AM loop antenna should always be connected, even if an outdoor AM antenna is connected to this unit. ADVANCED OPERATION Notes 75-ohm/300-ohm antenna adapter (U.K. model) 1 2 100kHz/10kHz Cut the lead wire and remove it. Clamp with pliers. 5 Clamp with pliers. Insert the wire into the slot. Snap the cover into place. English Insert the cable wire into the slot, and clamp it with pliers. 17 0103V630_9-18_EN(U) 17 APPENDIX 4 FREQUENCY STEP 12/27/01, 7:45 PM CONNECTIONS Connecting an external amplifier If you want to increase the power output to the speakers, or want to use another amplifier, connect an external amplifier to the OUTPUT jacks as follows. Note • When RCA pin plugs are connected to the OUTPUT jacks for output to an external amplifier, signals are output from the SPEAKERS terminals as well. 1 2 3 4 Connecting an external decoder This unit is equipped with 6 additional input jacks (MAIN left and right, CENTER, SURROUND left and right, and SUBWOOFER) for discrete multi-channel input from an external decoder, sound processor, or pre-amplifier. Connect the output jacks on your external decoder to the 6CH INPUT jacks. Be sure to match the left and right outputs to the left and right input jacks for the main and surround channels. Notes OUTPUT SUB WOOFER L R MAIN REAR CENTER CENTER OUTPUT R REAR (SURROUND) L 5 • When you select 6CH INPUT as the input source, this unit automatically turns off the digital sound field processor, and you cannot listen to DSP programs. • When you select 6CH INPUT as the input source, settings of “1 SPEAKER SET” on the SET MENU do not apply (except for “1F MAIN Lv”). 1 SUBWOOFER jack When using a subwoofer with built-in amplifier, including the YAMAHA Active Servo Processing Subwoofer System, connect the input jack of the subwoofer system to this jack. Low bass signals distributed from the main, center and/or rear channels are directed to this jack in accordance with your SPEAKER SET selections. The LFE (low-frequency effect) signals generated when Dolby Digital or DTS is decoded are also directed to this jack in accordance with your SPEAKER SET selections. Notes • The cut-off frequency of the SUBWOOFER jack is 90 Hz. • If you do not use a subwoofer, designate the signals to the main left and right speakers by changing the settings of SPEAKER SET item “1E BASS” on the SET MENU. • Use the control on the subwoofer to adjust its volume level. It is also possible to adjust the volume level by using this unit’s remote control (see “ADJUSTING THE LEVEL OF THE EFFECT SPEAKERS” on page 49). 2 MAIN jacks Main channel line output jacks. Note • The signals output through these jacks are affected by the BASS and TREBLE settings. 3 REAR CENTER jack Rear center channel line output jack. 4 CENTER jack Center channel line output jack. 5 REAR (SURROUND) jacks Rear channel line output jacks. 18 0103V630_9-18_EN(U) 18 12/27/01, 7:45 PM CONNECTIONS Connecting the power supply cords Turning on the power VOLTAGE SELECTOR 1 INPUT VOLUME INPUT M0DE 6CH INPUT NATURAL SOUND AV RECEIVER PRESET/TUNING FM/AM EDIT STANDBY /ON TUNING MODE VOLTAGE SELECTOR MEMORY INTRODUCTION When all connections are complete, turn on the power of this unit. AUTO/MAN'L MONO MAN'L/AUTO FM BASS SILENT TREBLE SPEAKERS A B VIDEO AUX STEREO PROGRAM A/B/C/D/E PRESET/TUNING EFFECT + – + S VIDEO VIDEO L AUDIO R PREPARATION – PHONES OPTICAL AC OUTLETS SWITCHED 120V 60Hz 100W MAX. TOTAL TRANSMIT CODE SET SYSTEM POWER TV AV CD MD/CD-R TUNER SLEEP DVD D-TV/CBL V-AUX 6CH INPUT VCR 1 VCR1/DVR A AMP POWER + + + TV VOL TV CH VOLUME – – TV MUTE TV INPUT 1 – MUTE ■ Connecting the AC power cord Plug in this unit to the wall outlet. HALL 1 ■ AC OUTLETS (SWITCHED) ROCK CONCERT ENTERTAINMENT Press STANDBY/ON (SYSTEM POWER on the remote control) to turn on the power of this unit. SYSTEM POWER STANDBY /ON or Front panel Remote control The level of the main volume, and then the current DSP program name appear on the front panel display. 2 APPENDIX ■ VOLTAGE SELECTOR (China and General models) ADDITIONAL INFORMATION Turn on the video monitor connected to this unit. ADVANCED OPERATION U.S.A., Canada, China, Europe, Singapore and General models .............................................. 2 OUTLETS U.K. and Australia model ................................ 1 OUTLET Use these outlets to connect the power cords from your components to this unit. The power to the AC OUTLETS is controlled by this unit’s STANDBY/ON (or SYSTEM POWER and STANDBY). These outlets will supply power to any source component connected to this unit whenever this unit is turned on. The maximum power (total power consumption of components) that can be connected to the AC OUTLETS varies depending on the area which it was purchasing. China and General models ......................................... 50 W Other models ........................................................... 100 W JAZZ CLUB BASIC OPERATION (General model) STANDBY POWER The VOLTAGE SELECTOR on the rear panel of this unit must be set for your local main voltage BEFORE plugging into the AC main supply. Voltages are 110/120/ 220/240 V AC, 50/60 Hz. English 19 0104V630_19-22_EN(U) 19 12/27/01, 7:45 PM SPEAKER MODE SETTINGS This unit has 6 SPEAKER SET items on the SET MENU that you must set according to the number of speakers in your configuration and their size. The following table summarizes these SPEAKER SET items, and shows the initial settings as well as other possible settings. If the initial settings shown in the following table are not appropriate for your speaker configuration, see “1 SPEAKER SET” on pages 41-43 to change the settings. Summary of SPEAKER SET items 1A through 1F Item Description Possible settings (default setting indicated in bold) 1A CENTER Sets center speaker availability and size. LRG/SML/NON 1B MAIN Sets main speaker size. LARGE/SMALL 1C REAR LR Sets rear L/R speakers availability and size. LRG/SML/NON 1D REAR CT Sets rear center speaker availability and size. LRG/SML/NON 1E BASS Sets the speaker(s) to be used to output low bass signals. 1F MAIN Lv Sets the main speaker level. SWFR/MAIN/BOTH Nrm (Normal)/–10 dB 20 0104V630_19-22_EN(U) 20 12/27/01, 7:45 PM ADJUSTING SPEAKER OUTPUT LEVELS INTRODUCTION This section explains how to adjust speaker output levels using the test tone generator. When this adjustment is complete, the output level heard at the listening position should be the same from each speaker. This is important for best performance of the digital sound field processor, and the various decoders (Dolby Digital, Dolby Pro Logic, Dolby Pro Logic and DTS). Using the test tone Use the test tone to balance the output levels of the speakers. The adjustment of each speaker output level should be made at your listening position using the remote control. 3 Note INPUT VOLUME INPUT M0DE 6CH INPUT NATURAL SOUND AV RECEIVER PRESET/TUNING FM/AM EDIT STANDBY /ON TUNING MODE MEMORY AUTO/MAN'L MONO MAN'L/AUTO FM Before you begin BASS SILENT TREBLE SPEAKERS A B VIDEO AUX STEREO PROGRAM A/B/C/D/E PRESET/TUNING EFFECT – PHONES INPUT + – + S VIDEO VIDEO L AUDIO R OPTICAL PREPARATION • Since this unit cannot enter the test mode while headphones are connected to this unit, be sure to unplug the headphones from the PHONES jack when using the test tone. VOLUME INPUT M0DE 6CH INPUT NATURAL SOUND AV RECEIVER FM/AM AMP VCR 1 VCR2/DVR + + + TV CH VOLUME A EDIT TUNING MODE MEMORY AUTO/MAN'L MONO MAN'L/AUTO FM BASS TREBLE SPEAKERS SILENT A VIDEO AUX PROGRAM STEREO B PRESET/TUNING TV VOL A/B/C/D/E EFFECT – PHONES + – + BASIC OPERATION PRESET/TUNING STANDBY /ON S VIDEO VIDEO L AUDIO R – – TV MUTE TV INPUT – 1 3 OPTICAL MUTE HALL 1 4 MOVIE THEATER 2 5 6 7 8 SELECT EX/ES STEREO 0 +10 ENTER 9 EFFECT 4 2,5 SPEAKERS A B – MENU + SELECT TEST DISPLAY RETURN 2 Press TEST to output the test tone. AMP TEST RETURN TREBLE + – + VOLUME + or VOLUME – Front panel APPENDIX Adjust the volume of this unit so you can hear the test tone. The test tone is heard (in order) from the main left speaker, center speaker, main right speaker, rear right speaker, rear center, rear left speaker, and the subwoofer. The tone is produced for 2.5 seconds from each speaker. ADDITIONAL INFORMATION Press AMP. 3 – SET MENU A/B/C/D/E 1 Set the BASS and TREBLE controls on the front panel to the center position. BASS PRESET/CH TITLE ADVANCED OPERATION 2 Press SPEAKERS A or B to select the main speakers to be used. If you are using two sets of the main speakers, press both A and B. ENTERTAINMENT 3 MOVIE THEATER 1 LEVEL 1 ROCK CONCERT 2 MONO MOVIE /DTS SUR. 2 JAZZ CLUB 1 TV SPORTS Remote control English 21 0104V630_19-22_EN(U) 21 12/27/01, 7:46 PM ADJUSTING SPEAKER OUTPUT LEVELS LEFT RIGHT 4 CENTER *SUBWOOFER Adjust the level of the effect speakers using j / i so that it matches the level of the main speakers. While adjusting, the test tone is heard from the selected speaker. PRESET/CH – SELECT + Note LEFT SURROUND RIGHT SURROUND • To adjust the level of the main speakers, use VOLUME knob (or VOLUME +/– on the remote control). 5 REAR CENTER * Subwoofer test tone is output after the rear left speaker (LEFT SURROUND). The front panel display shows which speaker is outputting the test tone. Note • If the test tone cannot be heard, turn down the volume, set this unit to standby mode and check the speaker connections. When adjustment is complete, press TEST to stop the test tone. TEST RETURN Notes • If “1A CENTER” on the SET MENU is set to NON, the center channel sound is automatically output from the main left and right speakers. • If “1C REAR LR” on the SET MENU is set to NON, the output level of the rear left, right and center speakers cannot be adjusted in step 4. The test tone will be circulated skipping the rear left and right speakers and the rear center speaker. • If “1D REAR CT” on the SET MENU is set to NON, the output level of the rear center speaker cannot be adjusted in step 4. The test tone will be circulated skipping the rear center speaker. • If “1E BASS” on the SET MENU is set to MAIN, the test tone will be circulated skipping the subwoofer. y • It is not necessary to readjust the speaker levels once they are set (as long as you do not change the speakers). You can enjoy listening to or watching the input source at the desired volume simply by adjusting the VOLUME knob (or VOLUME +/– on the remote control). • If the output level of the effect speakers (center, rear left, rear right, and rear center) cannot be increased enough to match the level of the main speakers, set “1F MAIN Lv” on SET MENU to –10 dB (see page 43). This setting decreases the main speaker output level to about one-third of the normal level. After you have set “1F MAIN Lv” on the SET MENU to –10 dB, adjust the levels for the center and rear speakers again. 22 0104V630_19-22_EN(U) 22 12/27/01, 7:46 PM BASIC PLAYBACK 4 6 4 INPUT VOLUME INPUT M0DE 6CH INPUT NATURAL SOUND AV RECEIVER PRESET/TUNING FM/AM EDIT STANDBY /ON TUNING MODE MEMORY 4 Press INPUT l / h repeatedly (one of the input selector buttons on the remote control) to select the input source. The selected input source name and input mode appear on the front panel display for a few seconds. AUTO/MAN'L MONO MAN'L/AUTO FM CD BASS SILENT A B MD/CD-R TUNER DVD D-TV/CBL V-AUX VCR 1 VCR2/DVR TREBLE SPEAKERS VIDEO AUX STEREO PROGRAM A/B/C/D/E PRESET/TUNING INTRODUCTION 1 INPUT EFFECT – PHONES + – + S VIDEO VIDEO L AUDIO R OPTICAL or 6 7 Front panel PREPARATION 3 Remote control TRANSMIT CODE SET SYSTEM POWER POWER STANDBY POWER TV AV CD MD/CD-R TUNER SLEEP DVD D-TV/CBL V-AUX 6CH INPUT VCR 1 VCR2/DVR A AMP 1 VCR2/DVR VCR1 V-AUX D-TV/CBL DVD MD/CD-R TUNER CD VOLUME 4 4 L + + TV CH VOLUME – – – TV MUTE TV INPUT Selected input source MUTE JAZZ CLUB ROCK CONCERT ENTERTAINMENT 1 2 3 4 TV SPORTS MONO MOVIE MOVIE THEATER 1 MOVIE THEATER 2 5 /DTS SUR. 9 6 7 8 SELECT EX/ES STEREO 0 +10 ENTER 7 EFFECT Press STANDBY/ON (SYSTEM POWER on the remote control) to turn on the power. STANDBY /ON 6CH INPUT 6CH INPUT SYSTEM POWER or or Front panel Front panel Remote control ADVANCED OPERATION 1 To select the audio source connected to the 6CH INPUT jacks (When combining with a video source) • You need to select the input to which the video source component is connected before selecting audio source. Press 6CH INPUT until “6CH INPUT” appears on the front panel display. BASIC OPERATION 6 + TV VOL HALL R Remote control Turn on the video monitor connected to this unit. 3 Press SPEAKERS A or B to select the main speakers to be used. If you are using two sets of main speakers, press both A and B. SPEAKERS A B Note • If “6CH INPUT” is shown on the front panel display, no other source can be played. To select another input source, first press 6CH INPUT to turn off “6CH INPUT” from the front panel display. ADDITIONAL INFORMATION 2 APPENDIX English 23 0105V630_23-28_EN(U) 23 12/27/01, 7:46 PM BASIC PLAYBACK 5 6 Start playback or select a broadcast station on the source component. Refer to the operation instructions for the component. Adjust the volume to the desired level. The volume level is displayed digitally. Example: –70 dB Control range: VOLUME MUTE (minimum) to 0 dB (maximum) The volume level indicator also shows the current volume level as a bar graph. If desired, use BASS and TREBLE. These controls only effect the sound from the main speakers. ■ BGV (background video) function The BGV function allows you to enjoy video images from a video source together with sounds from an audio source. For example, you can enjoy listening to classical music while having beautiful scenery from a video source on the video monitor. Select a source from the video group, then select a source from the audio group using the input selector buttons on the remote control. BGV selections cannot be made with INPUT l / h on the front panel. CD VOLUME MD/CD-R TUNER DVD D-TV/CBL V-AUX VCR 1 VCR2/DVR + or VOLUME – BASS – TREBLE + – ■ To mute the sound 1 Remote control + Front panel MUTE y • You can also cancel mute by pressing VOLUME +/–, etc. • During muting, the “MUTE” indicator flashes on the front panel display. Notes • If you increase or decrease the high-frequency or the lowfrequency sound to an extreme level, the tonal quality from the center and rear speakers may not match that of the main left and right speakers. • If you have connected a recording component to the VCR 1 OUT, VCR 2/DVR OUT, or MD/CD-R OUT jacks, and you notice distortion or low volume during playback of other components, try turning the recording component on. 7 Press MUTE on the remote control. To resume the audio output, press MUTE again. Select a DSP program if desired. Use PROGRAM l / h (DSP program buttons on the remote control) to select a DSP program. See pages 29 to 33 for details about DSP programs. When using the remote control, press AMP before selecting a DSP program. PROGRAM or HALL JAZZ CLUB ROCK CONCERT 1 2 3 4 TV SPORTS MONO MOVIE MOVIE THEATER 1 MOVIE THEATER 2 5 /DTS SUR. 9 ■ When you have finished using this unit 1 Press STANDBY/ON (STANDBY on the remote control) to set this unit in the standby mode. STANDBY STANDBY /ON or Front panel ENTERTAINMENT 6 7 8 SELECT EX/ES STEREO 0 +10 ENTER EFFECT Front panel Remote control 24 0105V630_23-28_EN(U) 24 12/27/01, 7:46 PM Remote control BASIC PLAYBACK ■ Notes on 96-kHz sampling digital signals Input modes and indications Each time you turn on the power of this unit, the input mode is set according to “8 INPUT MODE” setting on the SET MENU (see page 45 for details). 1 INPUT MODE CD MD/CD-R TUNER DVD D-TV/CBL V-AUX VCR 1 VCR2/DVR or Front panel VCR1 V-AUX D-TV/CBL DVD MD/CD-R TUNER CD VOLUME DVD AUTO L R Input mode AUTO: ADDITIONAL INFORMATION Notes APPENDIX • When AUTO is selected, this unit automatically determines the type of signal. If this unit detects a Dolby Digital or DTS signal, the decoder automatically switches to the appropriate setting. • When playing a disc encoded with Dolby Digital or DTS on some LD or DVD players, the sound output delays for a moment when playback resumes after a search because the digital signal is selected again. • When playing a LD source that has not been digitally recorded, the sound may not be output for some LD players. In this case, set the input mode to ANALOG. ADVANCED OPERATION In this mode, the input signal is selected automatically as follows: 1) Digital signal 2) Analog signal DTS: In this mode, only the digital input signal encoded with DTS is selected, even if another signal is input at the same time. ANALOG: In this mode, only the analog input signal is selected, even if a digital signal is input at the same time. • If the digital output data of the player has been processed in any way, you may not be able to perform DTS decoding even if you make a digital connection between this unit and the player. • If you play a source encoded with a DTS signal and set the input mode to ANALOG, this unit may reproduce the noise of an unprocessed DTS signal. In this case, connect the source to a digital input jack and set the input mode to AUTO or DTS. • If you switch the input mode to ANALOG while playing a source encoded with a DTS signal, this unit reproduces no sound. • If you play a source encoded with a DTS signal with the input mode set to AUTO; – This unit automatically switches to the DTSdecoding mode (The “t” indicator lights up) after having detected the DTS signal. When playback of the DTS source is completed, the “t” indicator may flash. While this indicator is flashing, only DTS source can be played. If you want to play a normal PCM source soon, set the input mode back to AUTO. – When the input mode is set to AUTO and a search or skip operation is performed during playback of a DTS source, the “t” indicator may flash. If this status continues for longer than 30 seconds, this unit will automatically switch from “DTS-decoding” mode to PCM digital signal input mode. The “t” indicator will turn off. BASIC OPERATION VCR2/DVR Remote control ■ Notes on playing DTS-CD/LDs PREPARATION Press INPUT MODE (the input selector button that you have pressed to select the input source on the remote control) repeatedly until the desired input mode is shown on the front panel display. The digital input jacks of this unit can handle 96-kHz sampling digital signals. Note the following when 96-kHz sampling digital signal is input to this unit: – DSP programs cannot be selected. – Sound will be output as 2-channel stereo from only the main left and right speakers. (There may be sound output from the subwoofer depending on the SPEAKER MODE settings on the SET MENU.) Therefore, the level of the effect speakers cannot be adjusted while listening to such a source. INTRODUCTION This unit comes with a variety input jacks. You can select the type of input signals you desire. English 25 0105V630_23-28_EN(U) 25 12/27/01, 7:46 PM BASIC PLAYBACK 3 Selecting a sound field program You can enhance your listening experience by selecting a DSP program. For details about each program, see pages 29 to 33. INPUT After selecting the desired program, press the same button repeatedly to select the desired sub-program if available. Example: Pressing MOVIE THEATER 1 repeatedly switches the sub-program between “Sci-Fi” and “Spectacle”. VOLUME INPUT M0DE 6CH INPUT NATURAL SOUND AV RECEIVER PRESET/TUNING HALL JAZZ CLUB ROCK CONCERT 1 2 3 4 TV SPORTS MONO MOVIE MOVIE THEATER 1 MOVIE THEATER 2 FM/AM ENTERTAINMENT EDIT STANDBY /ON TUNING MODE MEMORY AUTO/MAN'L MONO MAN'L/AUTO FM 5 BASS SILENT TREBLE SPEAKERS A B /DTS SUR. VIDEO AUX PROGRAM STEREO A/B/C/D/E PRESET/TUNING 6 7 8 SELECT EX/ES STEREO 0 +10 9 EFFECT – PHONES + – + S VIDEO VIDEO L AUDIO R ENTER OPTICAL EFFECT PROGRAM l / h Program name VCR2/DVR VCR1 V-AUX D-TV/CBL DVD MD/CD-R TUNER CD VOLUME TRANSMIT CODE SET PRO LOGIC / MOVIE THTR 1 SYSTEM STANDBY POWER POWER TV AV CD MD/CD-R TUNER SLEEP DVD D-TV/CBL V-AUX 6CH INPUT VCR 1 VCR2/DVR A AMP POWER DSP + + + TV CH VOLUME – – – TV MUTE TV INPUT HALL JAZZ CLUB ROCK CONCERT 1 2 3 4 TV SPORTS MONO MOVIE MOVIE THEATER 1 MOVIE THEATER 2 5 6 7 8 SELECT EX/ES STEREO 0 +10 ENTER 9 ENTERTAINMENT 2,3 1 Press AMP. 2 Press one of the DSP program buttons on the remote control to select the desired program. The name of the selected program appears on the front panel display. AMP HALL JAZZ CLUB ROCK CONCERT 1 2 3 4 TV SPORTS MONO MOVIE MOVIE THEATER 1 MOVIE THEATER 2 5 9 RR Notes EFFECT /DTS SUR. C R • There are 9 programs with sub-programs available with this unit. However, the selection depends on the input signal format and not all sub-programs can be used with all input signal formats. • The digital sound field processor cannot be used when a source connected to the 6CH INPUT jacks of this unit is selected or when 96-kHz sampling digital signals are input to this unit. • The acoustics of your listening room affect the DSP program. Minimize the sound reflections in your room to maximize the effect created by the program. • When you select an input source, this unit automatically selects the last DSP program used with that source. • When you set this unit in the standby mode, the current source and DSP program are memorized and are automatically selected when you turn on the power again. • If a Dolby Digital or DTS signal is input when the input mode is set to AUTO, the DSP program (No. 7–9) automatically switches to the appropriate decoding program. • When a monaural source is being played with PRO LOGIC/ Normal or PRO LOGIC/Enhanced, or PRO LOGIC Movie, no sound will be heard from the main speakers and the rear speakers. Sound can only be heard from the center speaker. (If “1A CENTER” on the SET MENU is set to NON, the center channel sound is output from the main speakers.) MUTE /DTS SUR. L LFE RL Sub-program name 1 TV VOL DGTLzSci-Fi ENTERTAINMENT 6 7 8 SELECT EX/ES STEREO 0 +10 ENTER EFFECT Program name VCR2/DVR VCR1 V-AUX D-TV/CBL DVD MD/CD-R TUNER y CD VOLUME PRO LOGIC / DSP MOVIE THTR 1 DGTL Spectacle Sub-program name L C R LFE RL RR • You can also select DSP program by pressing PROGRAM l / h on the front panel. • Select a program based on your listening preference. Program names are just for reference. 26 0105V630_23-28_EN(U) 26 12/27/01, 7:46 PM BASIC PLAYBACK ■ Selecting PRO LOGIC 4 INPUT VOLUME INPUT M0DE Press SELECT repeatedly to select the decoder; PRO LOGIC or PRO LOGIC . HALL JAZZ CLUB ROCK CONCERT 1 2 3 4 TV SPORTS MONO MOVIE MOVIE THEATER 1 MOVIE THEATER 2 5 6CH INPUT ENTERTAINMENT 6 7 8 SELECT EX/ES STEREO 0 +10 NATURAL SOUND AV RECEIVER /DTS SUR. PRESET/TUNING 9 FM/AM ENTER EDIT STANDBY /ON TUNING MODE EFFECT MEMORY AUTO/MAN'L MONO MAN'L/AUTO FM BASS TREBLE SPEAKERS SILENT A B VIDEO AUX PROGRAM STEREO A/B/C/D/E PRESET/TUNING 5 EFFECT – PHONES + – + S VIDEO VIDEO L AUDIO R OPTICAL HALL TRANSMIT CODE SET SYSTEM POWER POWER TV AV CD MD/CD-R DVD VCR 1 D-TV/CBL STANDBY TUNER V-AUX VCR2/DVR JAZZ CLUB ROCK CONCERT ENTERTAINMENT POWER 1 2 3 4 SLEEP TV SPORTS MONO MOVIE MOVIE THEATER 1 MOVIE THEATER 2 5 6 7 8 SELECT EX/ES STEREO 0 +10 6CH INPUT /DTS SUR. AMP A + + TV CH VOLUME – – TV MUTE TV INPUT ENTER EFFECT – y MUTE HALL JAZZ CLUB ROCK CONCERT 1 2 3 4 TV SPORTS MONO MOVIE MOVIE THEATER 1 MOVIE THEATER 2 6 7 8 SELECT EX/ES STEREO 0 +10 ENTER 5 /DTS SUR. 3,4,5 9 • You can select PRO LOGIC, PRO LOGIC Movie, and PRO LOGIC Music by pressing PROGRAM l / h on the front panel repeatedly. ENTERTAINMENT EFFECT Select a 2-channel source and start playback on the source component. 2 Press AMP. 3 Press q/DTS SUR. The previously selected sub program appears on the front panel display. ADVANCED OPERATION 1 AMP JAZZ CLUB ROCK CONCERT 1 2 3 4 TV SPORTS MONO MOVIE MOVIE THEATER 1 MOVIE THEATER 2 5 /DTS SUR. 9 ADDITIONAL INFORMATION HALL ENTERTAINMENT 6 7 8 SELECT EX/ES STEREO 0 +10 ENTER EFFECT Remote control VCR1 V-AUX D-TV/CBL DVD MD/CD-R PRO LOGIC TUNER APPENDIX VCR2/DVR CD VOLUME PRO LOGIC / DSP PRO LOGIC BASIC OPERATION + TV VOL 9 2 PREPARATION PROGRAM l / h After selecting on the decoder (PRO LOGIC ), select the mode appropriate for the source by pressing q/DTS SUR. The selection switches as follow; PRO LOGIC Movie ↔ PRO LOGIC Music INTRODUCTION You can enjoy the 2-channel sources decoded into five or six discrete channels by selecting PRO LOGIC in program No. 9. L R English 27 0105V630_23-28_EN(U) 27 12/27/01, 7:46 PM BASIC PLAYBACK ■ Playing Dolby Digital Surround EX or DTS ES software ■ SILENT CINEMA DSP Press EX/ES to turn on the Dolby Digital EX or DTS-ES compatible decoder. The MATRIX indicator lights up. EX/ES +10 MATRIX VCR2/DVR VCR1 V-AUX D-TV/CBL DVD MD/CD-R TUNER DIGITAL MOVIE THTR 1 Spectacle EX DSP The display changes AUTO → Matrix6.1 → OFF each time the EX/ES button is pressed. AUTO: Matrix6.1: OFF: This mode automatically switches Dolby Digital EX and DTS-ES compatible depending on the signal. Rear center speaker does not work for 5.1 channel sources. This setting produces 6-channel playback of the input source using the Dolby Digital EX or DTS-ES compatible decoder. The rear center speaker can be used when playing a 5.1-channel source. Rear center speaker does not work in this setting. (Except for when the DSP program “6ch” is selected.) You can enjoy a powerful sound field similar to what you could expert from actual speakers with SILENT CINEMA DSP. You can listen to SILENT CINEMA DSP by connecting your headphones to the PHONES jack while the digital sound field processor is on. Enjoy all the DSP program using the headphones. The “SILENT” indicator lights up on the front panel display. (When sound effects are off, you listen to the source with normal stereo reproduction.) Notes • This feature is not available when 6CH INPUT is selected or 96-kHz sampling digital signals are input to this unit. • The sound of LFE channel will be mixed and output from the headphone. ■ Normal stereo reproduction 1 Press STEREO to turn off the sound effect for normal stereo reproduction. Press STEREO again to turn the sound effect back on. STEREO STEREO or ENTER EFFECT EFFECT Front panel Remote control Notes • No sound will be output from the rear center speaker if you have set “1C REAR LR” or “1D REAR CT” on the SET MENU to NON. • The setting becomes AUTO once this unit turns into standby mode. • Some Dolby Digital Surround EX or DTS ES software may not contain the signal that is necessary for this unit to switch to the Dolby Digital EX or DTS-ES compatible decoding mode. To turn on the decoder when playing such a source, select “Matrix6.1”. ■ Virtual CINEMA DSP With Virtual CINEMA DSP, you can enjoy all DSP programs without rear speakers. It creates virtual speakers to reproduce a natural sound field. You can listen to virtual CINEMA DSP by setting “1C REAR LR” in the SET MENU to NON. Sound field processing changes to VIRTUAL CINEMA DSP automatically. Note • This unit is not set in the virtual CINEMA DSP mode even if “1C REAR LR” is set to NON in the following cases: – when the 6ch Stereo, DOLBY DIGITAL Normal, Pro Logic Normal, Pro Logic , or DTS Normal program is selected; – when the sound effect is turned off; – when 6CH INPUT is selected as the input source; – when 96-kHz sampling digital signals are input to this unit; – when using the test tone; or – when connecting the headphones. Notes • If you turn off the sound effects, no sound is output from the center speaker, rear speakers, or rear center speaker. • If you turn off the sound effects while a Dolby Digital or DTS signal is being output, the dynamic range of the signal is automatically compressed and the sounds of the center and rear speaker channels are mixed and output from the main speakers. • The volume may be greatly reduced when you turn off the sound effects or if you set “4 D. RANGE” on the SET MENU to MIN. In this case turn on the sound effect. • The sound of LFE channel will be directed to the main left and right or the subwoofer (or both) channels depending on the setting of “1E BASS” on the SET MENU. y During stereo reproduction, you can display information such as the type, format and sampling frequency of the signal input from the components connected to this unit. (While playing a source) 1 2 Press AMP. Press d to display the information about the input signal. PRESET/CH – SELECT 28 0105V630_23-28_EN(U) 28 12/29/01, 9:38 PM + DIGITAL SOUND FIELD PROCESSING (DSP) PREPARATION A sound field is defined as the “characteristic sound reflections of a particular space.” In concert halls and other music venues, we hear early reflections and reverberations as well as the direct sound produced by the artist(s). The variations in the early reflections and other reverberations among the different music venues is what gives each venue its special and recognizable sound quality. YAMAHA sent teams of sound engineers all around the world to measure the sound reflections of famous concert halls and music venues, and collect detailed sound field information such as the direction, strength, range, and delay time of those reflections. Then we stored this enormous amount of data in the ROM chips of this unit. INTRODUCTION Understanding sound fields ■ Recreating a sound field BASIC OPERATION Recreating the sound field of a concert hall or an opera house requires localizing the virtual sound sources in your listening room. The traditional stereo system that uses only two speakers is not capable of recreating a realistic sound field. YAMAHA’s DSP requires four effect speakers to recreate sound fields based on the measured sound field data. The processor controls the strength and delay time of the signals output from the four effect speakers to localize the virtual sound sources and fully encompass the listener. Hi-Fi DSP programs No. Program ADVANCED OPERATION The following list gives you a brief description of the sound fields produced by each of the DSP programs. Keep in mind that most of these are precise digital recreations of actual acoustic environments. Features A large round concert hall with a rich surround effect. Pronounced reflections from all directions emphasize the extension of sounds. The sound field has a great deal of presence, and your virtual seat is near the center, close to the stage. 2 JAZZ CLUB This is the sound field at stage front in “The Bottom Line”, a famous New York jazz club, that seats up to 300 people. Its wide left to right seating arrangement offers a real and vibrant sound. 3 ROCK CONCERT The ideal program for lively, dynamic rock music. The data for this program was recorded at LA’s “hottest” rock club. The listener’s virtual seat is at the center-left of the hall. 4 ENTERTAINMENT/ Disco This program recreates the acoustic environment of a lively disco in the heart of a big city. The sound is dense and highly concentrated. It is also characterized by a high-energy, “immediate” sound. ENTERTAINMENT/ 6ch Stereo Using this program increases the listening position range. This is a sound field suitable for background music at parties, etc. APPENDIX CONCERT HALL ADDITIONAL INFORMATION 1 English 29 0106V630_29-33_EN(U) 29 12/27/01, 7:46 PM CINEMA-DSP Sound design of CINEMA-DSP Filmmakers intend for the dialog to be located right on the screen, the effect sound a little farther back, the music spread even farther back, and the surround sound around the listener. Of course, all of these sounds must be synchronized with the images on the screen. CINEMA-DSP is an upgraded version of YAMAHA DSP specially designed for movie soundtracks. CINEMA-DSP integrates the DTS, Dolby Digital, and Dolby Pro Logic surround sound technologies with YAMAHA DSP sound field programs to provide a surround sound field. It recreates comprehensive movie sound design in your audio room. In CINEMA-DSP sound field programs, YAMAHA’s exclusive DSP processing is added to the Main left and right, and Center channels, so the listener can enjoy realistic dialogue, depth of sound, smooth transition between sound sources, and a surround sound field that goes beyond the screen. When a DTS or Dolby Digital signal is detected, the CINEMA-DSP sound field processor automatically chooses the most suitable sound field program for that signal. L SURROUND SOUND FIELD PRESENCE SOUND FIELD DIALOG EFFECT MUSIC R SURROUND SOUND FIELD In addition to the DSP, this unit is equipped with a variety of precise decoders; Dolby Pro Logic decoder for Dolby Surround sources, Dolby Pro Logic decoder for Dolby Surround and 2-channel sources, Dolby Digital/DTS decoder for multi-channel sources and Dolby Digital EX or DTS-ES compatible decoder for adding a rear center channel. You can select CINEMA-DSP programs to optimize these decoders and the DSP sound patterns depending on the input source. 30 0106V630_29-33_EN(U) 30 12/27/01, 7:46 PM CINEMA-DSP ■ Dolby Digital/DTS + DSP sound field effect Left surround DSP sound field Right surround DSP sound field ■ Dolby Digital EX/DTS-ES compatible + DSP sound field effect ■ Dolby Pro Logic + DSP sound field effect Surround DSP sound field ADDITIONAL INFORMATION ■ Dolby Pro Logic ADVANCED OPERATION Most movie software has 4-channel (left, center, right, and surround) sound information encoded by Dolby Surround matrix processing and stored on the left and right tracks. These signals are processed by the Dolby Pro Logic decoder. The MOVIE THEATER programs are designed to recreate the spaciousness and delicate nuances of sound that tend to be lost in the encoding and decoding processes. Presence DSP sound field BASIC OPERATION These programs provide you with the maximum experience of the spacious surround effects by adding an extra rear center DSP sound field created from the rear center channel. PREPARATION These programs use YAMAHA’s tri-field DSP processing on each of the Dolby Digital or DTS signals for the front, left surround, and right surround channels. This processing enables this unit to reproduce the immense sound field and surround expression of a Dolby Digitalor DTS-equipped movie theater without sacrificing the clear separation of all channels. Presence DSP sound field INTRODUCTION The 6-channel soundtracks found on 70-mm film produce precise sound field localization and rich, deep sound without using matrix processing. This unit’s MOVIE THEATER programs provide the same quality of sound and sound localization that 6-channel soundtracks do. The built-in Dolby Digital or DTS decoder brings the professional-quality sound designed for movie theaters into your home. With this unit’s MOVIE THEATER programs, you can use Dolby Digital or DTS technology to recreate a dynamic sound that gives you the feeling of being in a public theater. Dolby Pro Logic decodes Dolby Surround software into 5 discrete full-range channels (3 channels in front and 2 channels in rear). There are 2 modes; MOVIE for movies and MUSIC for 2-channel audio sources. APPENDIX English 31 0106V630_29-33_EN(U) 31 12/27/01, 7:46 PM CINEMA-DSP CINEMA-DSP programs ■ For movie programs: No. 7 to 9 This unit automatically chooses the appropriate decoder and DSP sound field pattern according to the input signal format. Table of Program Names for Each Input Format Input No. 2 channel 5.1 channel 6.1 channel * Stereo DOLBY DIGITAL DTS DOLBY DIGITAL EX DTS-ES compatible 70 mm Spectacle DGTL Spectacle DTS Spectacle Spectacle EX Spectacle ES 70 mm Sci-Fi DGTL Sci-Fi DTS Sci-Fi Sci-Fi EX Sci-Fi ES 70 mm Adventure DGTL Adventure DTS Adventure Adventure EX Adventure ES 70 mm General DGTL General DTS General General EX General ES — Normal — Dolby D EX — — Enhanced — Enhanced EX — — — Normal — DTS-ES — — Enhanced — Enhanced ES Normal — — — — Enhanced — — — — Movie — — — — Music — — — — Program 7 8 9 MOVIE THEATER 1 MOVIE THEATER 2 DOLBY DIGITAL DTS DIGITAL SUR PRO LOGIC PRO LOGIC * means the Dolby Digital EX decoder or the DTS-ES compatible decoder is ON. y • If a Dolby Digital signal or DTS signal is input when the input mode is set to AUTO, the DSP program will automatically switch to the Dolby Digital playback sound field or DTS playback sound field. • If Dolby Digital Surround EX software or DTS ES software is played when AUTO is selected by pressing the EX/ES button on the remote control, the Dolby Digital EX or DTS-ES compatible decoder usually turns on and the corresponding DSP program is selected. • EX/ES on the remote control can be used to play Dolby Digital or DTS 5.1 channel sources with the rear center speaker. In this case the program name changes to the corresponding name for 6.1 channel. • When playing a 6.1 channel source with the Dolby Digital EX decoder or the DTS-ES compatible decoder turned off, the program name changes to the corresponding name for 5.1 channel. Notes • The “ ” indicator does not light up when selecting program No. 9 except in Enhanced mode. • When playing a monaural source with a CINEMA DSP program, the source signal is directed to the center channel, main and rear speakers output effect sounds. 32 0106V630_29-33_EN(U) 32 12/27/01, 7:46 PM CINEMA-DSP The following list gives you a brief description of the sound fields produced by each of the DSP programs. Keep in mind that most of these are precise digital recreations of actual acoustic environments. Select the DSP program that you feel sounds best regardless of the name and description given for it below. 7 MOVIE THEATER 2 This program creates the extremely wide sound field of a 70-mm movie theater. It precisely reproduces the source sound in detail, making both the video and the sound field incredibly real. This is ideal for any kind of video source encoded with Dolby Surround, Dolby Digital or DTS (especially large-scale movie productions). Sci-Fi This program clearly reproduces dialog and sound effects in the latest sound form of science fiction films, thus creating a broad and expansive cinematic space amid the silence. You can enjoy science fiction films in a virtual-space sound field that includes Dolby Surround, Dolby Digital and DTS-encoded software employing the most advanced techniques. Adventure This program is ideal for precisely reproducing the sound design of the newest 70-mm and multichannel soundtrack films. The sound field is made to be similar to that of the newest movie theaters, so the reverberations of the sound field itself are restrained as much as possible. General This program is for reproducing sounds from 70-mm and multichannel soundtrack films, and is characterized by a soft and extensive sound field. The presence sound field is relatively narrow. It spatially spreads all around and toward the screen, restraining the echo effect of conversations without losing clarity. Enhanced Mode ■ For audio-video sources: No. 4 to 6 No. Features This program adds a deep and spatial feeling to video game sounds. ENTERTAINMENT/ Concert Video This program adds a deep and spatial feeling to concert video sounds. 5 TV SPORTS With this program, you can enjoy watching various TV programs such as news, variety shows, music programs or sports programs. In a stereo broadcast of a sports game, the commentator is oriented at the center position, and the shouts and the atmosphere in the stadium spread on the surround side, while their spread to the rear is properly restrained. 6 MONO MOVIE This program is provided for reproducing monaural video sources (such as old movies). The program produces the optimum reverberation to create sound depth by using only the presence sound field. APPENDIX ENTERTAINMENT/ Game ADDITIONAL INFORMATION 4 Program ADVANCED OPERATION This program ideally simulates the multi-surround speaker systems of the 35-mm film theaters. Dolby Pro Logic decoding, Dolby Digital decoding or DTS decoding and digital sound field processing create precise effects without altering the original sound orientation. The surround effects produced by this sound field wrap around the viewer naturally from the back to the left and right, and toward the screen. BASIC OPERATION 9 Spectacle PREPARATION 8 Features Program MOVIE THEATER 1 INTRODUCTION No. English 33 0106V630_29-33_EN(U) 33 12/27/01, 7:46 PM TUNING 4 Automatic and manual tuning There are 2 ways to tune; automatic and manual. Automatic tuning is effective when station signals are strong and there is no interference. Press PRESET/TUNING l / h once to begin automatic tuning. Press h to tune in to a higher frequency, or press l to tune in to a lower frequency. PRESET/TUNING /DVR ■ Automatic tuning VCR1 V-AUX D-TV/CBL DVD MD/CD-R TUNER TUNED A AM 144O 1 INPUT When tuned in to a station, the “TUNED” indicator lights up and the frequency of the received station is shown on the front panel display. VOLUME INPUT M0DE 6CH INPUT NATURAL SOUND AV RECEIVER PRESET/TUNING FM/AM y EDIT STANDBY /ON TUNING MODE MEMORY AUTO/MAN'L MONO MAN'L/AUTO FM BASS A B • Use the manual tuning method if the tuning search does not stop at the desired station because the signal is weak. TREBLE SPEAKERS SILENT VIDEO AUX STEREO PROGRAM PRESET/TUNING A/B/C/D/E EFFECT – PHONES + – 4 1 + S VIDEO VIDEO L AUDIO R OPTICAL ■ Manual tuning If the signal from the station you want to select is weak, you must tune in to it manually. 33 2 1 Select TUNER and the reception band following steps 1 and 2 described in “Automatic tuning” at left. 2 Press TUNING MODE (AUTO/MAN’L MONO) so that the “AUTO” indicator goes off from the front panel display. Press INPUT l / h (TUNER on the remote control) to select TUNER as the input source. SYSTEM INPUT or STANDBY POWER MD/CD-R TUNER SLEEP DVD D-TV/CBL V-AUX 6CH INPUT VCR 1 VCR2/DVR A AMP POWER POWER TV AV CD TUNING MODE Front panel AUTO AUTO/MAN'L MONO Goes off If the colon (:) appears on the front panel display, press PRESET/TUNING (EDIT) to turn it off. Remote control 2 Press FM/AM to select the reception band. “FM” or “AM” appears on the front panel display. PRESET/TUNING or 3 Press TUNING MODE (AUTO/MAN’L MONO) so that the “AUTO” indicator lights up on the front panel display. /DVR VCR1 V-AUX D-TV/CBL DVD MD/CD-R TUNER TUNED EDIT FM/AM 3 A AM 144O Press PRESET/TUNING l / h to tune in to the desired station manually. Hold down the button to continue the tuning search. PRESET/TUNING TUNING MODE AUTO Lights up AUTO/MAN'L MONO Note If the colon (:) appears on the front panel display, press PRESET/TUNING (EDIT) to turn it off. /DVR PRESET/TUNING VCR1 V-AUX D-TV/CBL DVD MD/CD-R • Manually tuning in to an FM station will automatically change the reception mode to monaural to increase the signal quality. TUNER TUNED EDIT A AM 144O 34 0107V630_34-39_EN(U) 34 12/27/01, 7:46 PM TUNING Notes Presetting stations INPUT VOLUME INPUT M0DE 6CH INPUT NATURAL SOUND AV RECEIVER PRESET/TUNING FM/AM EDIT STANDBY /ON TUNING MODE MEMORY AUTO/MAN'L MONO MAN'L/AUTO FM BASS SILENT TREBLE SPEAKERS A VIDEO AUX STEREO B PROGRAM PRESET/TUNING A/B/C/D/E EFFECT – PHONES + – + S VIDEO VIDEO L AUDIO R OPTICAL 1 Press FM/AM to select the FM band. FM/AM 2 TUNING MODE AUTO AUTO/MAN'L MONO 3 Lights up ADDITIONAL INFORMATION Press and hold MEMORY (MAN’L/AUTO FM) for more than 3 seconds. The preset number and the “MEMORY” and “AUTO” indicators flash. Then, after about 5 seconds, automatic preset tuning begins from the frequency currently displayed toward the higher frequencies. Memory back-up The memory back-up circuit prevents the stored data from being lost even if this unit is set in the standby mode, the power cord is disconnected from the AC outlet, or the power supply is temporarily cut due to power failure. However, if the power is cut for more than one week, the preset stations may be cleared. If so, store the stations again. ADVANCED OPERATION Press TUNING MODE (AUTO/MAN’L MONO) so that the “AUTO” indicator lights up on the front panel display. BASIC OPERATION 23 1 Automatic preset tuning options You can select the preset number from which this unit will store FM stations and/or begin tuning toward lower frequencies. After pressing MEMORY in step 3: 1. Press A/B/C/D/E and PRESET/TUNING l / h to select the preset number under which the first station will be stored. Automatic preset tuning will stop when stations have all been stored up to E8. 2. Press PRESET/TUNING (EDIT) to turn off the colon (:) and then press PRESET/TUNING l to begin tuning toward lower frequencies. PREPARATION You can use the automatic preset tuning feature to store FM stations. This function enables this unit to automatically tune in to FM stations with strong signals, and to store up to 40 (8 stations x 5 groups) of those stations in order. This feature enables you to easily tune in to any preset station by selecting the preset station number (see page 37). INTRODUCTION ■ Automatically presetting stations (for FM stations) • Any stored station data existing under a preset number is cleared when you store a new station under that preset number. • When a station data is stored under a preset number, the frequency and reception band are also stored. • You can manually replace a preset station with another FM or AM station by simply following the procedure in the section “Manually presetting stations” on page 36. • If the number of the received stations does not reach E8, automatic preset tuning has automatically stopped after searching all stations. • Only FM stations with sufficient signal strength are stored automatically by automatic preset tuning. If the station you want to store is weak in signal strength, tune in to it manually in the monaural mode, and store it by following the procedure in “Manually presetting stations” on page 36. MEMORY MAN'L/AUTO FM VCR1 V-AUX D-TV/CBL DVD MD/CD-R TUNER AUTO MEMORY A1:FM APPENDIX VCR2/DVR CD VOLUME L R When automatic preset tuning is completed, the front panel display shows the frequency of the last preset station. English 35 0107V630_34-39_EN(U) 35 12/27/01, 7:47 PM TUNING ■ Manually presetting stations 4 You can also store up to 40 stations (8 stations x 5 groups) manually. INPUT VOLUME INPUT M0DE 6CH INPUT NATURAL SOUND AV RECEIVER PRESET/TUNING Press PRESET/TUNING l / h to select a preset station number (1 to 8) while the “MEMORY” indicator is flashing. Press h to select a higher preset station number. Press l to select a lower preset station number. PRESET/TUNING FM/AM EDIT STANDBY /ON TUNING MODE MEMORY AUTO/MAN'L MONO MAN'L/AUTO FM BASS TREBLE SPEAKERS SILENT A B VIDEO AUX STEREO PROGRAM PRESET/TUNING A/B/C/D/E EFFECT – PHONES + – + S VIDEO VIDEO L AUDIO R OPTICAL VCR2/DVR VCR1 V-AUX D-TV/CBL DVD MD/CD-R TUNER CD VOLUME TUNED MEMORY 4 3 1 C3:AM 63O kHz 2,5 5 Tune in to a station. See page 34 for tuning instructions. VCR2/DVR VCR1 V-AUX D-TV/CBL DVD MD/CD-R TUNER CD VOLUME TUNED A AM 63O kHz L R When tuned in to a station, the front panel display shows the frequency of received station. 2 L R Press MEMORY (MAN’L/AUTO FM) on the front panel while the “MEMORY” indicator is flashing. MEMORY The station band and MAN'L/AUTO FM frequency appear on the front panel display with the preset group and number you have selected. Press MEMORY (MAN’L/AUTO FM). The “MEMORY” indicator flashes for about 5 seconds. VCR2/DVR VCR1 V-AUX D-TV/CBL DVD MD/CD-R TUNER CD VOLUME TUNED C3:AM 63O kHz L R Shows the displayed station has been stored as C3. MEMORY MEMORY MAN'L/AUTO FM 6 Repeat steps 1 to 5 to store other stations. Flashes Notes 3 Press A/B/C/D/E repeatedly to select a preset station group (A to E) while the “MEMORY” indicator is flashing. The group letter appears and make sure that the colon (:) appears on the front panel display. • Any stored station data existing under a preset number is cleared when you store a new station under that preset number. • The reception mode (stereo or monaural) is stored along with the station frequency. A/B/C/D/E VCR2/DVR VCR1 V-AUX D-TV/CBL DVD MD/CD-R TUNER CD VOLUME TUNED MEMORY C :AM 63O kHz L R 36 0107V630_34-39_EN(U) 36 12/27/01, 7:47 PM TUNING Tuning in to a preset station Exchanging preset stations INPUT You can exchange the assignment of two preset stations. The example below describes the procedure for exchanging preset station “E1” with “A5”. VOLUME INPUT M0DE 6CH INPUT NATURAL SOUND AV RECEIVER INPUT VOLUME INPUT M0DE 6CH INPUT NATURAL SOUND AV RECEIVER PRESET/TUNING FM/AM EDIT STANDBY /ON TUNING MODE MEMORY PRESET/TUNING FM/AM AUTO/MAN'L MONO MAN'L/AUTO FM EDIT STANDBY /ON BASS SILENT A B TUNING MODE MEMORY AUTO/MAN'L MONO MAN'L/AUTO FM TREBLE SPEAKERS VIDEO AUX STEREO PROGRAM PRESET/TUNING A/B/C/D/E BASS – + – + S VIDEO VIDEO L AUDIO R TREBLE SPEAKERS SILENT EFFECT PHONES A OPTICAL B VIDEO AUX STEREO PROGRAM PRESET/TUNING INTRODUCTION You can tune any desired station simply by selecting the preset station number under which it was stored. A/B/C/D/E EFFECT – PHONES 1,3 1,3 – + S VIDEO VIDEO L AUDIO R OPTICAL PREPARATION 2 1 + 2,4 EFFECT LEVEL PRESET/CH SET MENU 1 2 MENU TITLE A/B/C/D/E – + SELECT TEST DISPLAY RETURN Tune in to preset station “E1” by using the A/B/C/D/E and PRESET/TUNING l / h. See “Tuning in to a preset station” at left. 2 Press and hold PRESET/TUNING (EDIT) for more than 3 seconds. “E1” and the “MEMORY” indicator flash on the front panel display. AUDIO DISC SKIP 1 Press A/B/C/D/E (A/B/C/D/E on the remote control) to select the preset station group. The preset group letter appears on the front panel display and changes each time you press A/B/C/D/E. VCR1 V-AUX D-TV/CBL DVD MD/CD-R TUNER CD TUNED MEMORY EDIT E1:FM 87.5 MHz SET MENU A/B/C/D/E or MENU Front panel Remote control Press PRESET/TUNING l / h (PRESET u / d on the remote control) to select a preset station number (1 to 8). The preset group and number appear on the front panel display along with the station band, frequency and the “TUNED” indicator lights up. VCR2/DVR SELECT Front panel D-TV/CBL DVD MD/CD-R TUNER CD A5:FM 9O.6 MHz + L R Press PRESET/TUNING (EDIT) again. The stations stored at the two preset assignments are exchanged. VCR2/DVR VCR1 V-AUX D-TV/CBL DVD MD/CD-R TUNER CD PRESET/TUNING MEMORY Remote control EDIT EDIT E1-A5 VCR1 V-AUX D-TV/CBL DVD MD/CD-R TUNER APPENDIX Shows the exchange of stations has been completed. VCR2/DVR CD TUNED E1:FM 87.5 ADDITIONAL INFORMATION – V-AUX VOLUME PRESET/TUNING or VCR1 TUNED MEMORY 4 PRESET/CH Tune in to preset station “A5” by using the A/B/C/D/E and PRESET/TUNING l / h. “A5” and the “MEMORY” indicator flash on the front panel display. ADVANCED OPERATION 3 A/B/C/D/E 2 VCR2/DVR PRESET/TUNING BASIC OPERATION 1 REC MHz English 37 0107V630_34-39_EN(U) 37 12/27/01, 7:47 PM SLEEP TIMER Use this feature to automatically set this unit in the standby mode after the amount of time you have set. The sleep timer is useful when you are going to sleep while this unit is playing or recording a source. The sleep timer also automatically turns off the external component(s) connected to AC OUTLET(S). Canceling the sleep timer 1 The sleep timer can only be set with the remote control. Press SLEEP repeatedly until “SLEEP OFF” appears on the front panel display. After a few seconds, “SLEEP OFF” disappears, the “SLEEP” indicator goes off and the display returns to the previous indication. SLEEP y • By connecting a commercially available timer to this unit, you can also set a wake-up timer. Refer to the operation instructions of the timer. y • The sleep timer setting can also be canceled by setting this unit in the standby mode by using STANDBY on the remote control (or STANDBY/ON on the front panel) or by disconnecting the AC power cord from the AC outlet. Setting the sleep timer TRANSMIT CODE SET SYSTEM 1 STANDBY POWER POWER TV AV CD MD/CD-R TUNER SLEEP DVD D-TV/CBL V-AUX 6CH INPUT VCR 1 VCR2/DVR A AMP POWER + + + TV VOL TV CH VOLUME – – TV MUTE TV INPUT 2 – MUTE 1 Select a source and start playback on the source component. 2 Press SLEEP repeatedly to set the amount of time. Each time you press SLEEP, the front panel display changes as shown below. VCR2/DVR VCR1 V-AUX D-TV/CBL DVD SLEEP MD/CD-R TUNER CD SLEEP SLEEP DSP PCM 3 12Omin VOLUME L R The “SLEEP” indicator lights up on the front panel display soon after the sleep timer has been set. The display then returns to the previous indication. VCR2/DVR VCR1 V-AUX D-TV/CBL DVD MD/CD-R TUNER CD SLEEP DSP PCM CONCERT HALL VOLUME L R 38 0107V630_34-39_EN(U) 38 12/27/01, 7:47 PM RECORDING 1 2 INPUT VOLUME INPUT M0DE 6CH INPUT NATURAL SOUND AV RECEIVER PRESET/TUNING FM/AM EDIT STANDBY /ON TUNING MODE MEMORY BASS SILENT TREBLE SPEAKERS A B VIDEO AUX STEREO PROGRAM PRESET/TUNING A/B/C/D/E EFFECT – PHONES + – + S VIDEO VIDEO L AUDIO R OPTICAL TRANSMIT CODE SET 2 POWER STANDBY POWER TV AV CD MD/CD-R TUNER SLEEP DVD D-TV/CBL V-AUX 6CH INPUT VCR 1 VCR2/DVR A AMP + + + TV VOL TV CH VOLUME – – – TV MUTE TV INPUT HALL JAZZ CLUB ■ Special considerations when recording DTS software MUTE ROCK CONCERT ENTERTAINMENT Turn on the power of this unit and all connected component. 2 Select the source component you want to record from. CD MD/CD-R TUNER SLEEP DVD D-TV/CBL V-AUX 6CH INPUT VCR 1 VCR2/DVR A AMP INPUT or For LDs, DVDs and CDs encoded with DTS, when your player is compatible with the DTS format, follow its operation instruction to make a setting so that the analog signal will be output from the player. ADVANCED OPERATION 1 The DTS signal is a digital bitstream. Attempting to digitally record the DTS bitstream will result in noise being recorded. Therefore, if you want to use this unit to record sources that have DTS signals recorded on them, the following considerations and adjustments need to be made. BASIC OPERATION If you playback a video source that uses scrambled or encoded signals to prevent it from being dubbed, the picture itself may be disturbed due to those signals. SYSTEM POWER PREPARATION AUTO/MAN'L MONO MAN'L/AUTO FM Notes • Do a test recording before you start an actual recording. • When this unit is set in the standby mode, you cannot record between the components connected to this unit. • The setting of BASS, TREBLE, VOLUME, “5 L/R BALANCE” on the SET MENU and DSP programs does not effect the recorded material. • A source connected to the 6CH INPUT jacks on this unit cannot be recorded. • A given input source is not output to the same OUT (REC) channel. (For example, the signal input from VCR 1 IN is not output to VCR 1 OUT.) • Check the copyright laws in your country to record from records, CDs, radio, etc. Recording of copyrighted material may infringe copyright laws. INTRODUCTION Recording adjustments and other operations are performed from the recording components. Refer to the operation instructions for these components. ■ Timer playback/recording Remote control 3 Start playback (or select a broadcast station) on the source component. 4 Start recording on the recording component. This unit can perform playback or recording with an external timer (not supplied). Refer to the operating instructions for the component and the timer to be used. Notes • Stored data, such as input source, will be reflected when playback or recording with the timer. • If you do not want any sound output when recording with a timer, turn the volume down. APPENDIX Memory back-up The memory back-up circuit prevents the stored data (input source, volume level, set menu settings and so on) from being lost even if this unit is disconnected from the AC outlet. However, if the timer is turned off for more than one week, the stored data will be lost. ADDITIONAL INFORMATION Front panel English 39 0107V630_34-39_EN(U) 39 12/27/01, 7:47 PM ADVANCED OPERATION SET MENU The SET MENU consists of 10 items including the speaker mode setting. Choose the appropriate item and adjust or select the values as necessary. Adjusting the items on the SET MENU y • You can adjust the items on the SET MENU while playing a source. Items 1 Adjustment should be made with the remote control. VCR 1 Initial settings SPEAKER SET A CENTER B MAIN C REAR LR D REAR CT E BASS F MAIN Lv VCR2/DVR AMP A + + + TV VOL TV CH VOLUME – – TV MUTE TV INPUT – MUTE LRG (large) LARGE LRG (large) LRG (large) BOTH Nrm (Normal) HALL JAZZ CLUB ROCK CONCERT ENTERTAINMENT 1 2 3 4 TV SPORTS MONO MOVIE MOVIE THEATER 1 MOVIE THEATER 2 5 6 7 8 SELECT EX/ES STEREO 0 +10 ENTER /DTS SUR. 9 3,6 PRESET/CH SET MENU MENU TITLE A/B/C/D/E – SELECT LFE LEVEL SP/HP 3 SP DLY TIME CENTER REAR CNTR 0 ms 3 ms 4 D. RANGE SP/HP MAX 5 L/R BALANCE 0 dB for L/R 6 HP TONE CTRL BASS/TRBL 0 dB 2 + TEST RETURN DISPLAY AUDIO 2 6 EFFECT LEVEL REC 7 1 4,5 DISC SKIP 0 dB Note • Some items require extra steps. 1 Press AMP. 2 Press SET MENU to enter the SET MENU. AMP SET MENU MENU A/B/C/D/E I/O ASSIGN A (component video input) [A] DVD [B] D-TV/CBL B (optical output) (1) MD/CDR C (optical input) (2) MD/CDR (3) DVD (4) D-TV/CBL D (coaxial input) (5) CD 8 INPUT MODE AUTO 9 DISPLAY SET DIMMER 0 10 MEM. GUARD OFF 3 Press u/d repeatedly to select the item you want to adjust (1 to 10). PRESET/CH – SELECT + y • By pressing SET MENU repeatedly, you can select items in the same order as when pressing d. 4 Press j / i once to enter the setup mode of the selected item. The last setting you adjusted appears on the front panel display. PRESET/CH – SELECT + PRESET/CH • In the descriptions for each item from the following page, the default setting is indicated in bold. Depending on the item, press u/d to select a sub item. 40 0108V630_40-45_EN(U) 40 12/27/01, 7:47 PM – SELECT + SET MENU 5 Press j / i repeatedly to change the setting of the item. PRESET/CH – + SELECT 1 SPEAKER SET (speaker mode settings) 6 Press u/d repeatedly until the menu disappears or simply press one of the DSP program group buttons to exit SET MENU. PRESET/CH SELECT + or JAZZ CLUB ROCK CONCERT 1 2 3 4 TV SPORTS MONO MOVIE MOVIE THEATER 1 MOVIE THEATER 2 5 /DTS SUR. 9 ENTERTAINMENT 6 7 8 SELECT EX/ES STEREO 0 +10 ■ 1A CENTER (center speaker mode) ENTER EFFECT Choices: LRG (large), SML (small), NON (none) LRG Select this if you have a large center speaker. The entire range of the center channel signal is directed to the center speaker. NON Select this if you do not have a center speaker. All of the center channel signal are directed to the main left and right speakers. ADVANCED OPERATION SML Select this if you have a small center speaker. The lowfrequency signals (90 Hz and below) of the center channel are directed to the speakers selected with “1E BASS”. BASIC OPERATION Memory back-up The memory back-up circuit prevents the stored data from being lost even if this unit is in the standby mode. However, if the power cord is disconnected from the AC outlet, or the power supply is cut for more than one week, the stored data will be lost. If so, adjust the items again. By adding a center speaker to your speaker configuration, this unit can provide better dialog localization for several listeners and superior synchronization of sound and images. PREPARATION – HALL Notes • When 96-kHz sampling digital signals are input to this unit, some items are not affected. • When 6CH INPUT is selected as the input source, level adjustments in items 1A through 1E are not affected. INTRODUCTION Use this feature to select suitable output modes for your speaker configuration. ADDITIONAL INFORMATION APPENDIX English 41 0108V630_40-45_EN(U) 41 12/27/01, 7:47 PM SET MENU ■ 1B MAIN (main speaker mode) Choices: LARGE, SMALL LARGE Select this if you have large main speakers. The entire range of the main left and right channel signal is directed to the main left and right speakers. SMALL Select this if you have small main speakers. The lowfrequency signals (90 Hz and below) of the main channel are directed to the speakers selected with “1E BASS”. ■ 1C REAR LR (rear speaker mode) Choices: LRG (large), SML (small), NON (none) LRG Select this if you have large rear left and right speakers or if a rear subwoofer is connected to the rear speakers. The entire range of the rear channel signal is directed to the rear left and right speakers. SML Select this if you have small rear left and right speakers. The low-frequency signals (90 Hz and below) of the rear channel are directed to the speakers selected with “1E BASS”. NON Select this if you do not have rear speakers. y • This unit is set in the virtual CINEMA DSP mode when you select NON for “1C REAR LR”. In this case, the rear center speaker will automatically be set to “NON” and the “1D REAR CT” item will be skipped. ■ 1D REAR CT (rear center speaker mode) By adding a rear center speaker to your speaker configuration, this unit can provide more realistic frontto-back and transitions. Choices: LRG (large), SML (small), NON (none) LRG Select this if you have a large rear center speaker. The entire range of the rear center channel signal is directed to the rear center speaker. SML Select this if you have a small rear center speaker. The low-frequency signals (90 Hz and below) of the rear center channel are directed to the speakers selected with “1E BASS”. NON Select this if you do not have a rear center speaker. All of the rear center channel signal are directed to the rear left and right speakers. ■ 1E BASS (LFE/bass out mode) LFE signals carry low-frequency effects when this unit decodes a Dolby Digital or DTS signal. Low-frequency signals are defined as 90 Hz and below. The Lowfrequency signals can be directed to both main left and right speakers, and the subwoofer (subwoofer can be used for both stereo reproduction and the DSP program). Choices: SWFR (subwoofer), MAIN, BOTH SWFR Select this if you use a subwoofer. The LFE signals are directed to the subwoofer. MAIN Select this if you do not use a subwoofer. The LFE signals are directed to the main speakers. BOTH The LFE signals are directed to the subwoofer. Lowfrequency signals designated to the main channels in accordance with other speaker mode settings are directed to both main speakers and a subwoofer. Note • When you select MAIN for “1E BASS”, the low-frequency signals (90 Hz and below) of the main channel are directed to the main speakers even if you select SMALL for the main speaker mode. 42 0108V630_40-45_EN(U) 42 12/27/01, 7:47 PM SET MENU ■ 1F MAIN Lv (main level mode) Choices: Nrm (Normal), –10 dB Nrm Select this if you can match the output level of your effect speakers with that of your main speakers when using the test tone. 2 LFE LEVEL Control range: SPEAKER ............ –20 to 0 dB HEADPHONE ..... –20 to 0 dB Initial setting: 0 dB Press d/u to select the item to be adjusted. 2 Press j to adjust the LFE level. 1 0 to 5 ms 0 to 30 ms 0 ms 3 ms Press j / i to increase or decrease the delay of the center and the rear center channel sounds. Center speaker image Note ADVANCED OPERATION 1 Control range: CENTER .......................... REAR CNTR (center) ...... Initial setting: CENTER .......................... REAR CNTR (center) ...... BASIC OPERATION Use this feature to adjust the output level of the LFE (low-frequency effect) channel when playing back a Dolby Digital or DTS signal. The LFE signal carries the low-frequency special effect sound which is only added to certain scenes. Use this feature to adjust the delay of the center and the rear center channel sounds. This feature works when there is sound output from the center speakers, with a source like Dolby Digital or DTS, etc. Ideally, the center speaker and the rear center speaker should be the same distance from the main listening position as the left and right speakers. However, in most home situations, the center speaker or the rear center speaker are placed in line with the main speakers or the rear speakers. By delaying the sound from the center speaker and the rear center speaker, the apparent distance from the center speaker and the rear center speaker to the main listening position can be adjusted to make it seem the same as the distance between the main left and right speaker, and the rear left and right speakers to the listening position. Adjusting the delay time for the center speaker is especially important for giving depth to the dialogue. PREPARATION –10 dB Select this if you cannot match the output level of your effect speakers with that of your main speakers when using the test tone. 3 SP DLY TIME (speaker delay time) INTRODUCTION Change this setting if you cannot match the output level of the center, rear (L/R), and rear center speakers with the main speakers because of unusually high-efficiency performance from the main speakers. C L RL C R RC RR ADDITIONAL INFORMATION • Adjust the LFE level according to the capacity of your subwoofer or headphones. RC • Increasing the delay by 1 ms simulates moving the speakers about 30 cm (one foot) farther away from the listening position. APPENDIX y English 43 0108V630_40-45_EN(U) 43 12/27/01, 7:47 PM SET MENU 4 D. RANGE (dynamic range) Use this feature to adjust the dynamic range. This setting is effective only when this unit is decoding Dolby Digital signals. Choices: MAX, STD (standard), MIN (minimum) MAX Select the “MAX” for feature films. STD Select the “STD” for general use. MIN Select the “MIN” for listening to sources at low volume levels. 5 L/R BALANCE (balance of the main left and right speakers) Use this feature to adjust the balance of the output level from the main left and right speakers. Control range: 20 steps for L/R Initial setting: 0 dB for L/R 1 Press i to decrease the output level for the main left speaker. Press j for the main right speaker. 7 I/O ASSIGN (input/output assignment) It is possible to assign jacks according to the component to be used if this unit’s COMPONENT VIDEO input jack or DIGITAL INPUT/OUTPUT jack settings (component names for jacks) differ from that component. This makes it possible to change the jack assignment and effectively connect more components. Once you assign, you can select that component with INPUT l / h (or the input selector buttons on the remote control). ■ 7A CMPNT-V INPUT for COMPONENT VIDEO INPUT jacks [A] and [B] Choices: ■ 7B OPTICAL OUT for OPTICAL OUTPUT jack (1) Choices: 6 HP TONE CTRL (headphone tone control) Control range (dB): BASS ............... TRBL (treble) .. Initial setting: BASS ............... TRBL ............... –6 to +3 –6 to +3 0 dB 0 dB (1) MD/CD-R, CD, V-AUX, VCR 2/ DVR, VCR 1, D-TV/CBL, DVD ■ 7C OPTICAL IN for OPTICAL INPUT jacks (2) to (4) Choices: Use this feature to adjust the level of the bass and treble when you use your headphones. [A] DVD, V-AUX, VCR 2/DVR, VCR 1, D-TV/CBL [B] DVD, V-AUX, VCR 2/DVR, VCR 1, D-TV/CBL (2) MD/CD-R, CD, VCR 2/DVR, VCR 1, D-TV/CBL, DVD (3) MD/CD-R, CD, VCR 2/DVR, VCR 1, D-TV/CBL, DVD (4) MD/CD-R, CD, VCR 2/DVR, VCR 1, D-TV/CBL, DVD ■ 7D COAXIAL IN for COAXIAL INPUT jack (5) Choices: (5) MD/CD-R, CD, V-AUX, VCR 2/ DVR, VCR 1, D-TV/CBL, DVD Notes • You cannot select an item more than once for the same type of jack. • When you connect a component to both the COAXIAL and OPTICAL jacks, priority is given to the input signals from the COAXIAL jack. 44 0108V630_40-45_EN(U) 44 12/27/01, 7:47 PM SET MENU 8 INPUT MODE (initial input mode) INTRODUCTION Use this feature to designate the input mode for sources connected to the DIGITAL INPUT jacks when you turn on this unit (see page 25 for details about the input mode). Choices: AUTO, LAST PREPARATION AUTO Select this to allow this unit to automatically detect the type of input signal and select the appropriate input mode. LAST Select this to set this unit to automatically select the last input mode used for the respective source. 9 DISPLAY SET BASIC OPERATION ■ DIMMER You can adjust the brightness of the front panel display. Control range: –4 to 0 Initial setting: 0 10 MEM. GUARD (memory guard) ADVANCED OPERATION Use this feature to prevent accidental changes to settings on this unit. Choices: ON, OFF ADDITIONAL INFORMATION Select ON to protect the following features: • All SET MENU items • Center, rear speakers, rear center, and subwoofer levels • DSP program parameters Notes • When this item is set to ON, you cannot use the test tone. • When this item is set to ON, you cannot select any other SET MENU items. APPENDIX English 45 0108V630_40-45_EN(U) 45 12/27/01, 7:47 PM REMOTE CONTROL FEATURES In addition to controlling this unit, the remote control can operate other A/V components made by YAMAHA and other manufacturers. To control other components, you must set up the remote control with the manufacturer codes. Control area ■ Controlling this unit ■ Controlling other component The shaded areas below can be used to control this unit when the AMP mode is selected. Press AMP to select the AMP mode. The shaded areas below can be used to control other components. Each button has a different function depending on the selected components. Select the component to be controlled by pressing an input selector button. TRANSMIT CODE SET SYSTEM Å button and input selector buttons POWER TV AV CD MD/CD-R TUNER SLEEP DVD D-TV/CBL V-AUX 6CH INPUT POWER TRANSMIT CODE SET VCR 1 Press AMP to control this unit. STANDBY POWER VCR2/DVR AMP A + + + TV VOL TV CH VOLUME – – – TV MUTE TV INPUT HALL JAZZ CLUB ROCK CONCERT ENTERTAINMENT 1 2 3 4 TV SPORTS MONO MOVIE MOVIE THEATER 1 MOVIE THEATER 2 5 6 7 8 SELECT EX/ES STEREO 0 +10 MUTE /DTS SUR. 9 The buttons in the dotted lines (SYSTEM POWER, STANDBY, SLEEP, 6CH INPUT, VOLUME +/– and MUTE) function in any mode. Å button and input selector buttons switch the control area for each component. * Å button is to operate the other components that are not connected to this unit. Factory setting: Å...VCR SYSTEM STANDBY POWER MD/CD-R TUNER SLEEP DVD D-TV/CBL V-AUX 6CH INPUT VCR 1 VCR2/DVR A AMP POWER POWER TV AV CD + VOLUME + TV VOL – +– TV CH MUTE – TV MUTE TV INPUT HALL JAZZ CLUB ENTER EFFECT LEVEL PRESET/CH SET MENU A/B/C/D/E – SELECT 3 4 MOVIE THEATER 1 MOVIE THEATER 2 5 6 7 8 SELECT EX/ES STEREO 0 +10 /DTS SUR. DISPLAY RETURN ENTERTAINMENT 2 MONO MOVIE + TEST ROCK CONCERT 1 TV SPORTS MENU TITLE 9 ENTER EFFECT REC LEVEL AUDIO DISC SKIP PRESET/CH SET MENU MENU TITLE A/B/C/D/E – SELECT + TEST RETURN DISPLAY REC AUDIO DISC SKIP Component control area You can control up to 9 different components. You can set up manufacturer code and program other remote control functions for each component (see page 48). 46 0109V630_46-51_EN(U) 46 12/27/01, 7:47 PM REMOTE CONTROL FEATURES Setting the manufacturer code The following table shows factory-set component (Library: component category) and the manufacturer code for each component control. ■ Clearing setup manufacturer code for the component control 1 Press an input selector button or Å to select the component control for which you want to clear the manufacturer code. Code Component category (Library) Manufacturer CD CD YAMAHA 0005 MD/CD-R MD YAMAHA 0024 TUNER TUNER YAMAHA 0003 DVD DVD YAMAHA 0098 D-TV/CBL – – – V-AUX – – – – – – – – – A – – – 2 POWER MD/CD-R TUNER SLEEP DVD D-TV/CBL V-AUX 6CH INPUT VCR 1 VCR2/DVR A AMP POWER TV AV CD Press CODE SET by using a ballpoint pen or similar object. The TRANSMIT indicator flashes twice. TRANSMIT CODE SET Note 1 CD MD/CD-R TUNER SLEEP DVD D-TV/CBL V-AUX 6CH INPUT VCR 1 VCR2/DVR A AMP • If you do not press any button within 30 seconds after step 2, the clearing process is canceled. If this happens, start over from step 1. 3 Press CODE SET using a ballpoint pen or similar object. The TRANSMIT indicator flashes twice. Enter the code number “0000”. The TRANSMIT indicator flashes twice, and the manufacturer code for the selected component is cleared. ADVANCED OPERATION 2 Press an input selector button or Å to select the component you want to set up. y • You can clear all setup manufacturer codes at once by entering the code number “9990”. ADDITIONAL INFORMATION TRANSMIT CODE SET 3 Press the numeric buttons to enter the four digit manufacturer’s code for the component to be used. Refer to “LIST OF MANUFACTURER’S CODES” at the end of this manual. JAZZ CLUB ROCK CONCERT 1 2 3 4 TV SPORTS MONO MOVIE MOVIE THEATER 1 MOVIE THEATER 2 5 /DTS SUR. 9 APPENDIX HALL ENTERTAINMENT 6 7 8 SELECT EX/ES STEREO 0 +10 BASIC OPERATION VCR 1 VCR 2/DVR SYSTEM STANDBY POWER PREPARATION Component control (buttons) INTRODUCTION You can control other components by setting a manufacturer code. Codes can be set for each of the 9 component controls. Clearing setup manufacturer codes ENTER EFFECT The TRANSMIT indicator flashes twice. English Notes • If the manufacturer of your component has more than one code, try each of them until you find the correct one. • If you wait for more than 30 seconds during step 3, the setup process is canceled. If this happens, start over from step 2. 47 0109V630_46-51_EN(U) 47 12/27/01, 7:47 PM REMOTE CONTROL FEATURES Controlling other components You can operate other components when you have set the manufacturer code for your component. Note, however, that some buttons may not operate your component. Once you select an input source, the remote control switches to the mode for operating the component. TRANSMIT CODE SET 1 2 SYSTEM POWER POWER TV AV CD MD/CD-R STANDBY POWER TUNER SLEEP DVD D-TV/CBL V-AUX 6CH INPUT VCR 1 VCR2/DVR A AMP TV MUTE TV INPUT HALL JAZZ CLUB ROCK CONCERT 1 2 3 4 TV SPORTS MONO MOVIE MOVIE THEATER 1 MOVIE THEATER 2 MUTE 7 5 /DTS SUR. 9 3 4 ENTERTAINMENT 6 7 8 SELECT EX/ES STEREO 0 +10 ENTER w EFFECT + + + TV VOL TV CH VOLUME – – TV MUTE TV INPUT 8 LEVEL PRESET/CH SET MENU MENU TITLE e A/B/C/D/E – 9 – 0 RETURN + SELECT TEST 5 6 DVD player VCR TV, digital/cable TV MUTE HALL JAZZ CLUB ROCK CONCERT 1 2 3 CD player ENTERTAINMENT 4 DISPLAY REC AUDIO q DISC SKIP CD/MD recorder Tuner 1 AV POWER *1Power *1Power *3VCR power *1Power *1Power *1Power 2 TV POWER *2TV power *2TV power *2TV power *2TV power *2TV power *2TV power 3 TV CH + *2TV channel up *2TV channel up TV channel up *2TV channel up *2TV channel up *2TV channel up TV CH – *2TV channel down *2TV channel down TV channel down *2TV channel down *2TV channel down *2TV channel down 4 TV VOL + *2TV volume up *2TV volume up TV volume up *2TV volume up *2TV volume up *2TV volume up TV VOL – *2TV volume down *2TV volume down TV volume down *2TV volume down *2TV volume down *2TV volume down *2TV mute *2TV mute TV mute *2TV mute *2TV mute *2TV mute 5 TV MUTE 6 TV INPUT * TV input * TV input TV input * TV input * TV input *2TV input 7 1-9, 0, +10 Numeric buttons Numeric buttons Numeric buttons Numeric buttons Numeric buttons Preset stations (1-8) 8 TITLE 9 PRESET/CH u PRESET/CH d 2 Up VCR channel up Preset up VCR channel down Preset down Left Right q REC/DISC SKIP 2 Down PRESET/CH i SELECT 2 Title PRESET/CH j 0 RETURN 2 Select Return Disc skip Rec *3VCR rec Disc skip Play Play *3VCR play Play Play e Search backward Search backward *3VCR search backward Search backward Search backward r Search forward Search forward *3VCR search forward Search forward Search forward Pause *3VCR pause w AUDIO d Audio Pause t Skip backward y Skip forward a w ENTER e MENU r DISPLAY Rec (MD) Pause Pause Skip backward Skip backward Skip forward Skip forward Stop Stop *3VCR stop Stop Stop Title/Index Enter Enter Index Index Display Display Menu A/B/C/D/E Display *1 This button functions only when the original remote control of the component has POWER button. *2 These buttons can operate your TV without switching the input if the manufacturer code is set in D-TV/CBL. *3 These buttons can operate your VCR without switching the input to VCR if the manufacturer code is set in VCR. 48 0109V630_46-51_EN(U) 48 12/27/01, 7:47 PM r ADJUSTING THE LEVEL OF THE EFFECT SPEAKERS 3 Adjustment should be made with the remote control. Press j / i to adjust the speaker output level. • The control range for the center or rear left and right speakers is from +10 dB to –10 dB. • The control range for the subwoofer is from 0 dB to –20 dB. PRESET/CH TRANSMIT CODE SET SYSTEM POWER TV AV CD MD/CD-R DVD D-TV/CBL VCR 1 VCR2/DVR + + STANDBY POWER TUNER SLEEP MUTE V-AUX 6CH INPUT JAZZ CLUB ROCK CONCERT 1 2 3 4 TV SPORTS MONO MOVIE MOVIE THEATER 1 MOVIE THEATER 2 5 6 7 8 SELECT EX/ES STEREO 0 +10 /DTS SUR. AMP A HALL 9 PRESET/CH LEVEL TV VOL TV CH VOLUME – – – TV MUTE TV INPUT HALL JAZZ CLUB SET MENU MENU TITLE A/B/C/D/E – SELECT + TEST DISPLAY RETURN MUTE ROCK CONCERT REC ENTERTAINMENT AUDIO 2 2 3 DISC SKIP Press AMP. AMP Notes • When the speaker output modes for “1A CENTER” and “1C REAR LR” are set to NON, and “1E BASS” to MAIN, the output level of those speakers cannot be adjusted because there is no sound coming from these speakers. • When you adjust the output level with LEVEL, the settings you made with the test tone will be changed. • We recommend adjusting the speakers by following the steps described in “Using the test tone” on pages 21 and 22. ■ For 6ch Stereo (While playing a source) 2 + LEVEL You can adjust the volume level for each channel in 6channel stereo mode. Control range: 0 to 100% • CT level (Center level) • RL level (Rear left level) • RR level (Rear right level) • RC level (Rear center level) ADVANCED OPERATION Press LEVEL repeatedly to select the speaker(s) you want to adjust. Each time you press LEVEL, the selected speaker changes and appears on the front panel display as follows: center, rear right, rear center, rear left and subwoofer. TITLE Rear right speaker output level Rear center speaker output level Select 6ch Stereo. 3 Press j / i to adjust the speaker output level. Press u / d repeatedly to select the speaker(s) you want to adjust. Memory back-up The memory back-up circuit prevents the stored data from being lost even if this unit is in the standby mode. However, if the power cord is disconnected from the AC outlet, or the power supply is cut for more than one week, the stored data will be lost. If so, set the output level again. Subwoofer output level APPENDIX Rear left speaker output level 1 2 ADDITIONAL INFORMATION Center speaker output level BASIC OPERATION 1 SELECT ENTER EFFECT + – ENTERTAINMENT PREPARATION 1 POWER INTRODUCTION You can adjust the output level of each effect speaker (center, rear left and right, rear center and subwoofer) while listening to a source. y English • Once you press LEVEL, you can also select the speaker(s) to be adjusted by pressing d / u. PRESET/CH LEVEL – TITLE SELECT + 49 0109V630_46-51_EN(U) 49 12/27/01, 7:47 PM ADJUSTING THE DELAY TIME You can adjust the time difference between the beginning of the sound from the main speakers and the beginning of the sound effect from the rear speakers. The larger the value, the later the sound effect is generated. The delay time can be individually adjusted to all DSP programs. Adjustment should be made with the remote control. TRANSMIT CODE SET SYSTEM POWER POWER TV AV CD MD/CD-R DVD VCR 1 1 The following table shows factory-set delay time. D-TV/CBL VCR2/DVR STANDBY POWER TUNER SLEEP MUTE V-AUX 6CH INPUT AMP A HALL JAZZ CLUB ROCK CONCERT 1 2 3 4 TV SPORTS MONO MOVIE MOVIE THEATER 1 MOVIE THEATER 2 5 6 7 8 SELECT EX/ES STEREO 0 +10 ENTER /DTS SUR. 9 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6. 7. 8. 9. Preset value (ms) 45 30 15 26 36 21 10 69 23 15 15 15 20 15 15 15 20 15 15 15 20 15 15 15 15 5 5 5 20 5 5 5 15 5 + + TV CH VOLUME – – – LEVEL PRESET/CH TV MUTE MENU TV INPUT JAZZ CLUB 50 SELECT + TEST MUTE HALL SET MENU A/B/C/D/E – ROCK CONCERT ENTERTAINMENT RETURN DISPLAY REC AUDIO 3 4 DISC SKIP 1 Press AMP. AMP (While playing a source) 2 Select a DSP program you want to adjust the delay time. 3 Press u / d so that “DELAY” appears on the front panel display. PRESET/CH – 4 SELECT + DELAY Press j / i to adjust the delay time. Notes • Adding too much delay will cause an unnatural effect with some sources. • The sound is momentarily interrupted while adjusting the delay time. Memory back-up The memory back-up circuit prevents the stored data from being lost even if this unit is in the standby mode. However, if the power cord is disconnected from the AC outlet, or the power supply is cut for more than one week, the stored data will be lost. If so, adjust the delay time again. 50 0109V630_46-51_EN(U) 2 EFFECT + TV VOL TITLE Program CONCERT HALL JAZZ CLUB ROCK CONCERT DISCO GAME CONCERT VIDEO TV SPORTS MONO MOVIE 70 mm SPECTACLE DGTL SPECTACLE DTS SPECTACLE Spectacle EX/ES 70 mm SCI-FI Sci-Fi EX/ES DGTL SCI-FI DTS SCI-FI 70 mm ADVENTURE DGTL ADVENTURE DTS ADVENTURE Adventure EX/ES 70 mm GENERAL DGTL GENERAL DTS GENERAL General EX/ES PRO LOGIC/NORMAL DOLBY DIGITAL/NORMAL DTS DIGITAL SUR./NORMAL Dolby D EX/DTS-ES PRO LOGIC/ENHANCED DOLBY DIGITAL/ENHANCED DTS DIGITAL SUR./ENHANCED Enhanced EX/ES PRO LOGIC Movie PRO LOGIC Music ENTERTAINMENT 12/27/01, 7:47 PM ADJUSTING THE PARAMETER SETTINGS FOR PRO LOGIC You can adjust the values of PRO LOGIC Music parameters so the sound fields are recreated accurately in your listening room. Adjustments should be made with the remote control. TRANSMIT CODE SET SYSTEM AV CD MD/CD-R DVD VCR 1 1 D-TV/CBL VCR2/DVR STANDBY POWER TUNER SLEEP MUTE V-AUX 6CH INPUT JAZZ CLUB ROCK CONCERT 1 2 3 4 TV SPORTS MONO MOVIE MOVIE THEATER 1 MOVIE THEATER 2 5 6 7 8 SELECT EX/ES STEREO 0 +10 /DTS SUR. AMP A HALL 9 ENTERTAINMENT 2 ENTER EFFECT + + + LEVEL PRESET/CH TV CH VOLUME – – – TV MUTE TV VOL TV INPUT JAZZ CLUB 3 4 A/B/C/D/E – + SELECT TEST ROCK CONCERT DISPLAY RETURN MUTE HALL SET MENU MENU TITLE REC ENTERTAINMENT AUDIO • You cannot change parameter values when “10 MEM. GUARD” on the SET MENU is set to ON. Memory back-up The memory back-up circuit prevents the stored data from being lost even if this unit is set in the standby mode, the power cord is disconnected from the AC outlet, or the power supply is temporarily cut due to power failure. However, if the power is cut for more than one week, the parameter value you edited will return to the factory setting. If so, edit the parameter value again. ■ PANORAMA 1 Press AMP. 2 Select PRO LOGIC AMP Function: Choices: 9 ■ DIMENSION Function: Gradually adjusts the soundfield either towards the front or towards the rear. Control range: –3 (towards the rear) to +3 (towards the front), initial setting is STD (standard). SELECT 0 Press u / d to select the parameter. – Press j / i to change the parameter value. + PRESET/CH – SELECT + Function: Adjusts the center image from all three front speakers to varying degrees. The larger the value, adjusts the center image towards the main left and right speakers. Control range: 0 (center channel sound is output only from center speaker) to 7 (center channel sound is output only from main left and right speakers), initial setting is 3. APPENDIX 5 SELECT ADDITIONAL INFORMATION 4 ■ CT WIDTH (Center width) PRESET/CH ADVANCED OPERATION /DTS SUR. Music. Turning the function on extends the front stereo image to include the surround speakers for wraparound effect. OFF/ON, initial setting is OFF. BASIC OPERATION PRO LOGIC Music parameter descriptions DISC SKIP 3 PREPARATION POWER TV INTRODUCTION Note Changing parameter settings POWER MUSIC Repeat steps 3 and 4 above as necessary to change other parameters. English 51 0109V630_46-51_EN(U) 51 12/29/01, 3:52 PM TROUBLESHOOTING Refer to the chart below when this unit does not function properly. If the problem you are experiencing is not listed below or if the instruction below does not help, set this unit to the standby mode, disconnect the power cord, and contact the nearest authorized YAMAHA dealer or service center. ■ General Problem This unit fails to turn on when STANDBY/ ON (or SYSTEM POWER) is pressed, or enters in the standby mode soon after the power has been turned on. No sound. The picture does not appear. Cause Remedy The power cord is not connected or the plug is not completely inserted. Firmly connect the power cord. — The IMPEDANCE SELECTOR switch on the rear panel is not fully set to either the left or right position. Set the switch fully to the left or right position when this unit is in the standby mode. 12 The protection circuitry has been activated. Make sure all speaker wire connections on this unit and on all speakers are secure and that the wire for each connection does not touch anything other than its respective connection. 10, 11 This unit has been exposed to a strong external electric shock (such as lightning and strong static electricity). Set this unit in the standby mode, disconnect the power cord, plug it back in after 30 seconds, then start operating. Incorrect input or output cable connections. Connect the cables properly. If the problem persists, the cables may be defective. 10 – 16 An appropriate input source has not been selected. Select an appropriate input source with INPUT l / h or 6CH INPUT (or the input selector buttons). 23 The speaker connections are not secure. Secure the connections. The main speakers to be used have not been selected properly. Select the main speakers with SPEAKERS A and/or B. 23 The volume is turned down. Turn up the volume. 24 The sound is muted. Press MUTE or any operation buttons of this unit to cancel a mute and adjust the volume. — Digital signals which this unit cannot reproduce are being input to this unit by playing a CD-ROM, etc. Play a source whose signals this unit can reproduce. — The output and input for the picture are connected to different types of video jacks. Make connections using the same type of video jacks (S VIDEO, VIDEO (composite), or COMPONENT VIDEO) for both the input and output. 52 0110V630_52-58_EN(U) Refer to page 52 12/27/01, 7:47 PM — 10, 11 14, 15 TROUBLESHOOTING Problem Cause The sound suddenly goes off. The protection circuit has been activated because of a short circuit, etc. Check the IMPEDANCE SELECTOR switch is set to the appropriate position and then turn this unit back on. 12 Check the speaker wires are not touching each other and then turn this unit back on. — The sleep timer has functioned. Turn on the power, and play the source again. — The sound is muted. Press MUTE or any operation buttons of this unit to cancel a mute and adjust the volume. — Incorrect cable connections. Connect the cables properly. If the problem persists, the cables may be defective. 10, 11 Incorrect setting of “5 L/R BALANCE” on the SET MENU. Adjust it to the appropriate position. 44 The sound effect is off. Press STEREO/EFFECT to turn it on. 28 A Dolby Surround, Dolby Digital or DTS decoding DSP program is being used with material not encoded with Dolby Surround, Dolby Digital or DTS. Select another DSP program. No sound from the center speaker. — Raise the level of the center speaker. 49 “1A CENTER” on the SET MENU is set to NON. Select the appropriate mode for your center speaker. 41 One of the Hi-Fi DSP programs (1 to 4) has been selected (except for 6ch Stereo). Select another DSP program. — The output level of the rear speakers is set to minimum. Raise the output level of the rear speakers. A monaural source is being played with program 9. Select another DSP program. “1E BASS” on the SET MENU is set to MAIN when a Dolby Digital or DTS signal is being played. Select SWFR or BOTH. 42 “1E BASS” on the SET MENU is set to SWFR or MAIN when a 2-channel source is being played. Select BOTH. 42 Poor bass reproduction. 26 – 33 APPENDIX The source does not contain low bass signals (90 Hz and below). 49 — Select MAIN. 42 The speaker mode settings (main, center, rear, or rear center) on the SET MENU does not match your speaker configuration. Select the appropriate position for each speaker based on the size of the speakers in your configuration. 41 – 43 53 0110V630_52-58_EN(U) 53 12/27/01, 7:47 PM English “1E BASS” on the SET MENU is set to SWFR or BOTH and your system does not include a subwoofer. ADDITIONAL INFORMATION No sound from the subwoofer. 26 – 33 ADVANCED OPERATION The output level of the center speaker is set to minimum. The source encoded with a Dolby Digital or DTS signal does not have a center channel signal. No sound from the rear speakers. 26 – 33 BASIC OPERAIONT A 96-kHz sampling digital signal is being input to this unit. PREPARATION No sound from the effect speakers. Refer to page INTRODUCTION Only the speaker on one side can be heard. Remedy TROUBLESHOOTING Problem Cause No sound from the rear center speaker. Remedy Refer to page “1C REAR LR” or “1D REAR CT” on the SET MENU is set to NON. Select LRG or SML. 42 The Dolby Digital EX decoder or the DTS-ES compatible decoder is not on. Press the EX/ES button on the remote control to turn it on. 28 A “humming” sound can be heard. Incorrect cable connections. Firmly connect the audio plugs. If the problem persists, the cables may be defective. The volume level cannot be increased, or the sound is distorted. The component connected to the OUT (REC) jacks of this unit is turned off. Turn on the power to the component. The sound effect cannot be recorded. It is not possible to record the sound effect by a recording component. A source cannot be recorded by a digital recording component connected to the DIGITAL OUTPUT jack of this unit. A source component is not connected to the DIGITAL INPUT jacks of this unit. Connect the source component to the DIGITAL INPUT jacks of this unit. — The sound field parameters and some other settings on this unit cannot be changed. “10 MEM. GUARD” in the SET MENU is set to ON. Set “10 MEM. GUARD” in the SET MENU to OFF. — This unit does not operate properly. The internal microcomputer has been frozen by an external electric shock (such as lightning or excessive static electricity) or by a power supply with low voltage. Disconnect the AC power cord from the outlet and then plug it in again after about 30 seconds. — “CHECK SP WIRES” appears on the front panel display. Speaker cables are short circuited. Make sure all speaker cables are connected correctly. — There is noise interference from digital or high-frequency equipment, or this unit. This unit is too close to the digital or high-frequency equipment. Move this unit further away from such equipment. — This unit suddenly turns into the standby mode. The internal temperature becomes too high and the overheat protection circuitry has been activated. Wait until this unit cools down and then turn it back on. — 54 — — 54 0110V630_52-58_EN(U) 10 – 16 12/27/01, 7:47 PM TROUBLESHOOTING ■ Tuner Problem Cause 17 Use the manual tuning method. 34 There is distortion, and clear reception cannot be obtained even with a good FM antenna. There is multipath interference. Adjust the antenna position to eliminate multipath interference. — The desired station cannot be tuned in with the automatic tuning method. The station is too weak. Use a high-quality directional FM antenna. 17 Use the manual tuning method. 34 Previously preset stations can no longer be tuned in. This unit has been disconnected for a long period. Re-store the stations. The desired station cannot be tuned in with the automatic tuning method. The signal is weak or the antenna connections are loose. Tighten the AM loop antenna connections and orient it for best reception. 17 Use the manual tuning method. 34 There are continuous crackling and hissing noises. Noises result from lightning, fluorescent lamps, motors, thermostats and other electrical equipment. Use an outdoor antenna and a ground wire. This will help somewhat, but it is difficult to eliminate all noise. 17 There are buzzing and whining noises (especially in the evening). A TV set is being used nearby. Move this unit away from the TV. — 35, 36 BASIC OPERAIONT AM Check the antenna connections. Try using a high-quality directional FM antenna. PREPARATION FM The characteristics of FM stereo broadcasts may cause this problem when the transmitter is too far away or the antenna input is poor. Refer to page INTRODUCTION FM stereo reception is noisy. Remedy ADVANCED OPERATION ■ Remote control The remote control does not work nor function properly. Cause Remedy Refer to page The remote control will function within a maximum range of 6 m (20 feet) and no more than 30 degrees off-axis from the front panel. 7 Direct sunlight or lighting (from an inverter type of fluorescent lamp, etc.) is striking the remote control sensor of this unit. Reposition this unit. — The batteries are weak. Replace all batteries with new ones. 3 The manufacture code has not correctly set. Set the code correctly. 47 Try setting another code of the same manufacturer. — — English Even if the manufacturer code is correctly set, there are some models that do not respond to the remote control. APPENDIX Wrong distance or angle. 55 0110V630_52-58_EN(U) 55 12/27/01, 7:47 PM ADDITIONAL INFORMATION Problem GLOSSARY ■ Dolby Surround Dolby Surround uses a 4 channel analog recording system to reproduce realistic and dynamic sound effects: 2 main left and right channels (stereo), a center channel for dialog (monaural), and a rear channel for special sound effects (monaural). The rear channel reproduces sound within a narrow frequency range. Dolby Surround is widely used with nearly all video tapes and laser discs, and in many TV and cable broadcasts as well. The Dolby Pro Logic decoder built into this unit employs a digital signal processing system that automatically stabilizes the volume on each channel to enhance moving sound effects and directionality. ■ Dolby Digital Dolby Digital is a digital surround sound system that gives you completely independent multi-channel audio. With 3 front channels (left, center, and right), and 2 rear stereo channels, Dolby Digital provides 5 full-range audio channels. With an additional channel especially for bass effects, called LFE (low frequency effect), the system has a total of 5.1 channels (LFE is counted as 0.1 channel). By using 2-channel stereo for the rear speakers, more accurate moving sound effects and surround sound environment are possible than with Dolby Surround. The wide dynamic range (from maximum to minimum volume) reproduced by the 5 full-range channels and the precise sound orientation generated using digital sound processing provide listeners with previously unheard of excitement and realism. With this unit, any sound environment from monaural up to a 5.1-channel configuration can be freely selected for your enjoyment. Dolby Digital EX creates 6 full-bandwidth output channels from 5.1-channel sources. This is done using a matrix decoder that derives 3 surround channels from the 2 in the original recording. For the best results, Dolby Digital EX should be used with movie sound tracks recorded with Dolby Digital Surround EX. With this additional channel, you can experience more dynamic and realistic moving sound especially with scenes with “flyover” and “fly-around” effects. ■ Dolby Pro Logic Dolby Pro Logic is an improved technique used to decode vast numbers of existing Dolby Surround softwares. This new technology enables a discrete 5channel playback with 2 main left and right channels, 1 center channel, and 2 rear left and right channels (instead of only 1 rear channel for conventional Pro Logic technology). A music mode is also available for 2-channel sources in addition to the movie mode. ■ DTS (Digital Theater Systems) Digital Surround DTS digital surround was developed to replace the analog soundtracks of movies with a 6-channel digital sound track, and is now rapidly gaining popularity in movie theaters around the world. Digital Theater Systems Inc. has developed a home theater system so that you can enjoy the depth of sound and natural spatial representation of DTS digital surround in your home. This system produces practically distortion-free 6-channel sound (technically, a left, right and center channels, 2 rear channels, plus an LFE 0.1 channel as a subwoofer, for a total of 5.1 channels). The unit incorporates DTS-ES compatible decoder that enables 6.1-channel reproduction by adding the rear center channel to existing 5.1-channel format. (The rear center channel is created from rear left and right channels.) ■ LFE 0.1 channel This channel is for the reproduction of low bass signals. The frequency range for this channel is 20 Hz to 120 Hz. This channel is counted as 0.1 because it only enforces a low frequency range compared to the full-range reproduced by the other 5 channels in a Dolby Digital or DTS 5.1 channel systems. ■ CINEMA DSP ■ SILENT CINEMA YAMAHA has developed a natural, realistic sound effect DSP algorithm for headphones. Parameters for headphones have been set for each sound field so that accurate representations of all the sound field programs can be enjoyed using headphones. 56 0110V630_52-58_EN(U) 56 D I G I T A L Since the Dolby Surround and DTS systems were originally designed for use in movie theaters, their effect is best felt in a theater having many speakers and designed for acoustic effects. Since home conditions, such as room size, wall material, number of speakers, and so on, can differ so widely, it’s inevitable that there are differences in the sound heard as well. Based on a wealth of actually measured data, YAMAHA CINEMA DSP uses YAMAHA original sound field technology to combine Dolby Pro Logic, Dolby Digital and DTS systems to provide the visual and audio experience of movie theater in the listening room of your own home. 12/27/01, 7:47 PM GLOSSARY YAMAHA has developed a virtual CINEMA DSP algorithm that allows you to enjoy DSP sound field surround effects even without any rear speakers by using virtual rear speakers. It is even possible to enjoy virtual CINEMA DSP using a minimal 2-speaker system that does not include a center speaker. With the S-video signal system, the video signal normally transmitted using a pin cable is separated and transmitted as the Y signal for the luminance and the C signal for the chrominance through the S-video cable. Using the S VIDEO jack eliminates video signal transmission loss and allows recording and playback of even more beautiful images. ■ PCM (Linear PCM) ■ Component video signal Linear PCM is a signal format under which an analog audio signal is digitized, recorded and transmitted without using any compression. This is used as a method of recording CDs and DVD audio. The PCM system uses a technique for sampling the size of the analog signal per very small unit of time. Standing for “pulse code modulation”, the analog signal is encoded as pulses and then modulated for recording. With the component video signal system, the video signal is separated into the Y signal for the luminance and the PB/CB and PR/CR signals for the chrominance. Color can be reproduced more faithfully with this system because each of these signals is independent. The component signal is also called the “color difference signal” because the luminance signal is subtracted from the color signal. A monitor with component input jacks is required in order to use the component signal for output. ■ Sampling frequency and number of quantized bits PREPARATION ■ S-video signal INTRODUCTION ■ Virtual CINEMA DSP BASIC OPERAIONT ADVANCED OPERATION When digitizing an analog audio signal, the number of times the signal is sampled per second is called the sampling frequency, while the degree of fineness when converting the sound level into a numeric value is called the number of quantized bits. The range of rates that can be played back is determined based on the sampling rate, while the dynamic range representing the sound level difference is determined by the number of quantized bits. In principle, the higher the sampling frequency, the wider the range of frequencies that can be played back, and the higher the number of quantized bits, the more finely the sound level can be reproduced. ADDITIONAL INFORMATION APPENDIX English 57 0110V630_52-58_EN(U) 57 12/27/01, 7:47 PM SPECIFICATIONS AUDIO SECTION FM SECTION • Minimum RMS Output Power for Main, Center, Rear, Rear Center 20 Hz to 20 kHz, 0.06% THD, 8 Ω ....................................... 75 W 1 kHz, 0.06% THD, 8 Ω ........................................................ 80 W • Tuning Range [U.S.A. and Canada models] ............................ 87.5 to 107.9 MHz [Other models] .............................................. 87.50 to 108.00 MHz • DIN Standard Output Power [Europe model] 1 kHz, 0.7% THD, 4 Ω ........................................................ 125 W • 50 dB Quieting Sensitivity (IHF, 100% mod.) Mono/Stereo ........................ 2.0 µV (17.3 dBf) /25 µV (39.2 dBf) • Maximum Power (EIAJ) [China, Korea and General models] 1 kHz, 10% THD, 8 Ω ......................................................... 110 W • Dynamic Power (IHF) 8/6/4/2 Ω .......................................................... 90/120/150/190 W • Damping Factor 20 Hz to 20 kHz, 8 Ω ................................................... 80 or more • Selectivity (400 kHz) ............................................................... 70 dB • Signal to Noise Ratio (IHF) Mono/Stereo .............................................................. 76 dB/70 dB • Harmonic Distortion (1 kHz) Mono/Stereo ................................................................. 0.2%/0.3% • Stereo Separation (1 kHz) ....................................................... 45 dB • Frequency Response ........................... 20 Hz to 15 kHz +0.5, –2 dB • Frequency Response CD to Main L/R ...................................... 10 Hz to 100 kHz, –3 dB AM SECTION • Total Harmonic Distortion 20 Hz to 20 kHz, 45 W, 8 Ω, Main L/R ................................ 0.06% • Usable Sensitivity ............................................................. 300 µV/m • Signal to Noise Ratio (IHF-A Network) CD (250 mV, shorted) to Main L/R, Effect Off ................. 100 dB GENERAL • Residual Noise (IHF-A Network) Main L/R ................................................................ 150 µV or less • Channel Separation (1 kHz/10 kHz) CD (5.1 kΩ terminated) to Main L/R ........................ 60 dB/45 dB • Tone Control (Main L/R) BASS Boost/Cut ...................................................... ±10 dB/50 Hz TREBLE Boost/Cut ............................................... ±10 dB/20 kHz • Phones Output ............................................................. 0.34 V/560 Ω • Input Sensitivity CD, etc .................................................................... 150 mV/47 kΩ 6CH INPUT ............................................................ 150 mV/47 kΩ • Output Level OUT (REC) ........................................................... 150 mV/1.2 kΩ OUTPUT MAIN/CENTER/REAR CENTER/ REAR (SURROUND) ............................................ 2.2 V/1.2 kΩ OUTPUT SUBWOOFER ............................................. 4 V/1.2 kΩ VIDEO SECTION • Video Signal Type ...................................................... NTSC or PAL • Composite Video Signal Level ...................................... 1 Vp-p/75 Ω • S-Video Signal Level Y ................................................................................. 1 Vp-p/75 Ω C .......................................................................... 0.286 Vp-p/75 Ω • Tuning Range ......................................... 530/531 to 1710/1611 kHz • Power Supply [U.S.A. and Canada models] ............................... AC 120 V/60 Hz [Australia model] ................................................. AC 240 V/50 Hz [U.K., Europe and Singapore models] ................ AC 230 V/50 Hz [Korea model] ..................................................... AC 220 V/60 Hz [China and General models] ..... AC 110/120/220/240 V, 50/60 Hz • Power Consumption [U.S.A. and Canada models] .................................. 290 W/370 VA [Other models] ..................................................................... 290 W Standby Mode ......................................................... approx. 0.6 W • AC Outlets [U.S.A., Canada, Europe and Singapore models] .......................................................... 2 (Total 100 W maximum) [China and General models] .................. 2 (Total 50 W maximum) [U.K. and Australia models] ......................... 1 (100 W maximum) • Dimension (W x H x D) .......................... 435 x 161 x 390 mm (17” x 6-7/16” x 15-3/8”) • Weight ...................................................................... 11.5 kg (25 lbs) • Accessories ............................................................... Remote control Batteries Front VIDEO AUX jack cap 75-ohm/300-ohm antenna adapter (U.K. model) AM loop antenna Indoor FM antenna *Specifications are subject to change without notice. • Component Video Signal Level Y ................................................................................. 1 Vp-p/75 Ω PB/CB, PR/CR ............................................................. 0.7 Vp-p/75 Ω • Signal to Noise Ratio ............................................................... 50 dB • Frequency Response (MONITOR OUT) Composite, S-Video ................................. 5 Hz to 10 MHz, –3 dB Component ................................................. DC to 30 MHz, –3 dB 58 0110V630_52-58_EN(U) 58 1/9/02, 7:39 PM LIST OF MANUFACTURER CODES LISTE DES CODES DES FABRICANTS ELECTRON ELIN ELTA EMERSON 0941 1001 0331 0001, 0021, 0061, 0071, 0081, 0091, 0111, 0811, 0821, 0831, 0841, 0851, 0861, 0871, 0901, 0921, 0941, 0981, 1011, 1031, 1051, 1081, 1091 ENVISION 0361, 1111 ERRES 1001 ETRON 0331 FERGUSON 1001 FINLUX 1001 FISHER 0171, 0801, 0981 FORMENTI 0441 FORMONTI 1001 FORTRESS 1141 FUJITSU 1091 FUNAI 1051, 1091, 1501, 1521 FUTURETECH 1051 GE 0131, 0161, 0201, 0751, 0761, 0771, 0781, 0791, 0811, 0861, 1041 GEC 0271, 1001 GEMINI 0391 GENEXXA 0431 GIBRALTER 0891, 1031, 1111 GOLDSTAR 0031, 0121, 0351, 0411, 0731, 0741, 0861, 0941, 0971, 1001, 1031, 1111, 1151 GOODMANS/TASHIKO 0271, 0661, 1001 GRANADA 1001 GRUNDIG 1781, 1791, 1801, 1811, 1821, 1831, 1841, 1851, 1861, 1871, 1881 GUNPY 1051, 1091 HARMAN/KARDON 0721 HALLMARK 0861 HANSEATIC 1001 HARVARD 1051, 1061 HINARI 1001, 1091 HITACHI 0181, 0351, 0671, 0681, 0691, 0701, 0711, 0871, 0941, 0971, 1351 HYPSON 1001 IMA 1051 INDIANA 1001 INFINITY REFERENCE 0101 INTERFUNK 1001 ITT 0611 JANEIL 1131 JBL 0101 JCB 0951 JENSEN 0311 JINXING 1531, 1541, 1551, 1561, 1571, 1621, 1631, 1641, 1651, 1691, 1731 TV A TANDY 0941 ABEX 1151 ADMIRA 1141 ADVENTURA 1131 AIKO 1121 AIWA 1481 AKAI 0331, 1101, 1111 ALBA 0431 ALLERON 1091 AMBASSADOR 1081 AMSTRAD 0481, 1081 ANAM 0251, 1041, 1051, 1061, 1071 ANAM NATIONAL 1041 AOC 0361, 1021, 1031, 1111, 1161 ARCHER 1161 AUDIOSONIC 1001 AUDIOVOX 1051, 1161 BAUER 0441 BAUR 1001 BEIJING 1511, 1551, 1561 BELCOR 1031 BELL & HOWELL 0981, 0991 BEON 1001 BRADFORD 1051 BROCKWOOD 1031 BROKSONIC 1161 BUSH 1001 CANDLE 0351, 0361, 0961, 0971, 1111, 1131 CAPEHART 1021 CARVER 0101 CATHAY 1001 CELEBRITY 0951 CENTURION 0411 CHANGHONG 1541, 1551, 1561, 1621 CITIZEN 0351, 0361, 0921, 0931, 0941, 0961, 0971, 1111, 1121, 1131 CLAIRTONE 1011 CLARIVOX 1001 CONCERTO 0351, 0971 CONROWA 1751 CONTEC 0901, 0911, 1011, 1051 CORANDO 0941 CRAIG 0251, 1051 CROWN 0941, 1051 CURTIS MATHES 0161, 0361, 0931, 0941, 0981, 1111 CXC 1051 DAEWOO 0291, 0301, 0331, 0721, 0941, 1001, 1031, 1121, 1191, 1531, 1581, 1591, 1601 DANSAI 1001 DAYTRON 0941, 1031 DECCA 0271, 1001 DIXI 0331, 1001, 1071 DUMONT 0891, 1031 DYNATECH 0881 ELECTROBAND 0951, 1011 ELECTROHOME 0941 JVC (VICTOR) 0261, 0281, 0641, 0651, 0661, 0841 KAWASHO 0901 KAYPANI 1021 KENWOOD 0361, 1031, 1111 KLOSS 0631, 0721, 1131 KTV 0921, 0941, 1011, 1051, 1111 LEYCO 1001 LIESENK & TTER 1001 LLOYTRON 0941 LOEWE 1001 LOGIK 0991, 1771 LUXMAN 0351, 0971 LXI 0101, 0621, 0761, 0861, 0981 MAGNAVOX 0101, 0341, 0391, 0401, 0411, 0421, 0581, 0591, 0601, 0611, 0631, 0661, 0961, 1111 MAJESTIC 0991 MARANTZ 0101, 0221, 0361, 1001, 1111 MARK 1001 MATSUI 0271, 0331, 1001 MEDIATOR 1001 MEGATRON 0691, 0861, 1161 MEI 1011 M-ELECTRONIC 1001 MEMOREX 0331, 0571, 0861, 0971, 0981, 0991, 1771 METZ 1791, 1831, 1891, 1901, 1911, 1921, 1931, 1941 MGA 0361, 0561, 0571, 0861, 1031, 1111 MIDLAND 0751, 0761, 0891, 0941, 1151 MITSUBISHI 0221, 0321, 0561, 0571, 0661, 0861, 1031, 1101, 1381 MONTGOMERY 1091 MOTOROLA 1041, 1141 MTC 0351, 0361, 0881, 0931, 0971, 1011, 1031, 1111 MULTITECH 0881, 1051 NAD 0551, 0621, 0861 NEC 0241, 0351, 0361, 0661, 0971, 1031, 1111, 1321, 1711 NECKERMANN 1001 NEI 1001 NIKKAI 0271, 0431, 1001, 1151 NIKKO 0861, 1111, 1121 NOVABEAM 0721 NTC 1121 ONWA 1051 OPTIMUS 0551 OPTONICA 0541, 1141 ORION 0831, 1001 OSAKI 0271, 1151 OTTO VERSAND 1001 PANASONIC 0101, 0191, 0251, 0751, 1041, 1311, 1371, 1431 PANDA 1541, 1721 PENNY 0161, 0361, 0521, 0531, 0621, 0731, 0751, 0761, 0781, 0791, 0861, 0931, 0941, 1031, 1041, 1111, 1151, 1161 PEONY 1561, 1621 PHILCO 0361, 0581, 0591, 0601, 0611, 0631, 0961, 1031, 1111 PHILIPS 0101, 0401, 1001 PHONOLA 1001 PILOT 0941, 1031, 1111 PIONEER 0511, 0551, 0871 PORTLAND 0941, 1031, 1121 PRICECLUB 0931 PRISM 0751 PROSCAN 0761 PROTECH 1001 PROTON 0501, 0861, 0941, 1021, 1161 PULSAR 0891 PULSER 1031 QUASAR 0251, 0751, 1041 QUELLE 1001 RADIO SHACK 0541, 0941, 1031, 1051, 1151 RADIOLA 1001 RCA 0051, 0141, 0151, 0181, 0411, 0491, 0531, 0761, 0771, 0871, 1031 REALISTIC 0541, 0861, 0941, 0971, 0981, 1031, 1051, 1111, 1151 RHAPSODY 1011 R-LINE 1001 RUNCO 0891, 1111 SAISHO 0331, 1081 SAMPO 0361, 0941, 1021, 1111, 1151 SAMSUNG 0331, 0341, 0351, 0361, 0861, 0931, 0941, 0971, 1001, 1031, 1111, 1151 SAMSUX 0941 SANYO 0171, 0231, 0271, 0661, 0801, 0911, 0981, 1231, 1251, 1261 SBR 1001 SCHEIDER 1001 SCIMITSU 1031 SCOTCH 0861 SCOTT 0831, 0861, 0941, 1031, 1051, 1091 SEARS 0101, 0161, 0171, 0351, 0481, 0521, 0621, 0761, 0801, 0861, 0971, 0981, 1091 SHANGHAI 1561, 1681 SHARP 0461, 0471, 0541, 0661, 0911, 0941, 1141 SHOGUN 1031 SIGNATURE 0991, 1771 SIMPSON 0581, 0961 SOLAVOX 1151 SONOKO 1001 I 02V630_code(U) 1 12/27/01, 7:47 PM SONTEC SONY 1001 0371, 0451, 0661, 0841, 0951, 1281, 1441 SOUNDESIGN 0861, 0961, 1051, 1091 SOUNDWAVE 1001 SPECTRICON 1161 SQUAREVIEW 0481 SSS 1031, 1051 STAR-LITE 1051 SUPREM 0951 SUPRE-MACY 1131 SURPA 0351, 0971 SYLVANIA 0101, 0361, 0441, 0581, 0591, 0601, 0611, 0631, 0961, 1111 SYMPHONIC 0481 SYSLINE 1001 TANDY 0271, 0431, 1141 TATUNG 0271, 0881, 1001, 1041, 1161 TCL 1561, 1631, 1701 TECHNICS 0751 TECHWOOD 0351, 0751, 0971 TEKNIKA 0101, 0351, 0571, 0931, 0941, 0961, 0971, 0991, 1031, 1051, 1091, 1121, 1131, 1771 TELETECH 0331 TERA 0501 THAKRAL 1671 THORM 1001 TMK 0351, 0861, 0971, 1081 TOSHIBA 0381, 0521, 0621, 0661, 0931, 0981, 1301 TOSONIC 1011 TOTEVISION 0941 TRICAL 0911 UNIVERSAL 0781, 0791 UNIVERSUM 1001 VECTOR RESEARCH 0361, 1111 VESTEL 1001 VIDEO CONCEPT 1101 VIDIKRON 0101, 0211 VIDTECH 0861, 1031 VIKING 1131 WARDS 0101, 0361, 0451, 0541, 0581, 0591, 0601, 0611, 0771, 0781, 0791, 0861, 0971, 0991, 1031, 1091, 1111, 1771 WATSON 1001 XOGEGO 1611, 1621, 1661, 1741, 1761 YAMAHA 0361, 1031, 1111 YOKO 1001 ZENITH 0011, 0041, 0891, 0991, 1771 ZONDA 1161 CABLE TV ABC 0256, 0376 ANTRONIX 0136 ARCHER 0136, 0286 BBT 0076 CABLETIME 0166 CABLEVISION 0196 COLOUR VOICE 0306, 0346 COMTRONICS 0216, 0276 EAGLE COMTRONICS 0276 EASTERN 0066 ELECTRICORD 0206 ELECTUS 0266 GE 0116, 0126 GEC CABLE SYSTEM 0196 HAMLIN H5 0676 HAMLIN H6 0666 HAMLIN H6S 0656 HAMLIN H8 0646 HAMLIN H9 0636 JERROLD 0256 JERROLD 400L 0626 JERROLD 450L 0616 JERROLD 550 0606 JERROLD OSD CATV 0596 JERROLD SPRUCER 0436 MAGNAVOX/PHILIPS 0416, 0426 MAMM 0296 MEMOREX 0386 MOVIE TIME 0146, 0206 NORTHCOAST 0016 NSC 0146 OAK 0106 OAK SIGMA 450 0546 OAK SIGMA 550 0536 PANASONIC TZ 120/130 0476 PANASONIC TZ 170/180 0446 PANASONIC TZ140 0466 PANASONIC TZ150/160 0456 PARAGON 0386 PHILIPS 0036, 0216, 0306, 0316, 0326, 0336, 0346 PIONEER 0006, 0086 PIONEER BR50 0846 PIONEER BR60/70/80/81/82 0696 PIONEER BR90 0556 PULSAR 0386 RCA DIGITAL SATELLITE SYSTEM 0396, 0406 REALISTIC 0136 REGENCY/EASTERN 0686 RUNCO 0386 SAMSUNG 0276 SCIENTIFIC ATLANTA 175/475 0576 SCIENTIFIC ATLANTA 75 0366, 0586 SCIENTIFIC ATLANTA 8650 0566 SIGNAL 0276 SL MARX 0276 SPECTAVISION 0236 STANDARD COMPONENTS 0186 STARCOM V 0256 STARGATE 0276 SYLVANIA/TEXSCAN 0376, 0496 TEKNIKA 0176 TELESERVICE 0056 TELEVIEW 0276 TEXSCAN 0186, 0376 TFC 0026 TOCOM 0226, 0356 TOCOM 5503A 0526 TOCOM 5503VIP/5507 0516 TOCOM TC56 0506 TOSHIBA 0386 TUDI 0046 UNIKA 0136 UNIVERSAL 0136, 0156, 0206, 0286 VIDEOWAY 0096 VIEWSTAR 0216 ZENITH 0246, 0386, 0486 SATELLITE TUNER ALPHA STAR 0826 CHAPARRAL 0756 ECHOSTAR 0836 GENERAL INSTRUMENT 0776, 0876 HTS 0836 HUGHES NETWORK SYSTEMS 0816 JERROLD 0776, 0786 PANASONIC 0806 PRIMESTAR 0776, 0786 RCA 0766 SONY 0796 (DBS) HITACHI MAGNAVOX MEMOREX PANASONIC PHILIPS SONY STAR CHOICE TOSHIBA UNIDEN 0856 0886 0886 0896 0886 0906 0876 0866, 0916 0886 VCR A TANDY ADVENTURA AIKO AIWA AKAI 0902 0992 0982 0992 0262, 0942, 0952, 0962, 0972 AMERICAN HIGH 0932 AMSTRAD 0992 ASA 0002, 0912 ASHA 0922 AUDIO DYNAMICS 0202 AUDIOVOX 0912 BEAUMARK 0922 BELL & HOWELL 0902 BLAUPUNKT 0412 BROKSONIC 0872, 0882, 0892 BUSH 0852 CALIX 0912 CANON 0862, 0932 CCE 0852, 0982 CITIZEN 0912, 0982 COLT 0852 CRAIG 0832, 0842, 0852, 0912, 0922 II 02V630_code(U) 2 12/27/01, 7:47 PM CURTIS MATHES 0662, 0822, 0932 CYBERNEX 0922 DAEWOO 0802, 0812, 0982 DBX 0202 DYNATECH 0472, 0992 ELECTROHOME 0912 ELECTROPHONIC 0912 EMEREX 0792 EMERSON 0072, 0132, 0142, 0152, 0162, 0172, 0182, 0192, 0212, 0702, 0712, 0722, 0732, 0742, 0752, 0762, 0772, 0782, 0872, 0882, 0892, 0912, 0952, 0992, 1072 FINLUX 0002, 0992 FISHER 0682, 0692, 0842, 0902 FUJI 0672, 0932 FUNAI 0992 GARRARD 0992 GE 0662, 0822, 0932 GO VIDEO 0642, 0652 GOLDSTAR 0082, 0632, 0912 GOODMANS 0402 GRADIENTE 0992 GRANDA 0612, 0902 GRUNDIG 0002 HARLEY DAVIDSON 0992 HARMAN/KARDON 0632, 1082 HARWOOD 0752, 0852 HEADQUARTER 0612 HI-Q 0842 HINARI 0852 HITACHI 0102, 0562, 0572, 0582, 0592, 0602, 0992 ITT 0942 JVC (VICTOR) 0202, 0522, 0532, 0542, 0552 KENWOOD 0202, 0542, 0612, 0632, 0902 KLH 0852 KODAK 0912, 0932 LLOYD 0992 LOGIK 0852 LUXOR 0942 LXI 0022, 0912 MAGNAVOX 0002, 0482, 0492, 0502, 0512, 0932 MAGNIN 0922 MARANTZ 0002, 0202, 0402, 0632, 0932 MARTA 0912 MATSUSHITA 0932 MATSUI 0722 MEI 0222, 0932 MEMOREX 0232, 0242, 0472, 0512, 0612, 0842, 0902, 0912, 0922, 0932, 0992 MGA 0762, 0952 MGA TECHNOLOGY 0922 MINOLTA 0592, 0602 MITSUBISHI 0452, 0462, 0542, 0762, 0952, 1082 MOTOROLA 0472, 0932 MTC 0922, 0992 TEAC TECHNICS TEKNIKA 0992 0932 0322, 0912, 0932, 0992 TELEFUNKEN 0252 TMK 0212, 0732, 0772, 0922 TOSHIBA 0062, 0302, 0342, 0622, 0682, 0712, 0762 TOTEVISION 0912, 0922 UNITECH 0922 VECTOR RESEARCH 0202, 0432, 0632 VIDEO CONCEPTS 0202, 0432, 0632, 0952 WARDS 0322, 0402, 0472, 0482, 0602, 0712, 0842, 0852, 0922, 0932, 0992 YAMAHA 0202, 0632 ZENITH 0042, 0362, 0512, 0672 MULTITECH NAD NEC 0852, 0992 0442 0122, 0202, 0292, 0422, 0432, 0542, 0632 NIKKO 0912 NOBLEX 0922 OLYMPUS 0412, 0932 OPTIMUS 0442, 0472, 0912 OPTONICA 0402 ORION 0212, 0722, 0742, 0772 OSAKI 0912 PANASONIC 0012, 0052, 0092, 0222, 0372, 0382, 0392, 0412, 0932 PENNY 0202, 0432, 0602, 0632, 0692, 0912, 0922, 0932 PENTAX 0592, 0602 PERDIO 0992 PHILCO 0002, 0932 PHILIPS 0002, 0282, 0402, 0492, 0932 PILOT 0912 PIONEER 0442, 0542 PROSCAN 1002, 1012, 1022, 1032, 1042, 1052, 1062 PULSAR 0512 QUARTER 0612 QUARTZ 0272, 0612 QUASAR 0382, 0392, 0932 RADIO SHACK 0912, 0992 RADIX 0912 RANDEX 0912 RCA 0112, 0382, 0392, 0482, 0592, 0602, 0662, 0822, 0942 REALISTIC 0402, 0472, 0612, 0682, 0842, 0902, 0912, 0922, 0932, 0992 RICOH 0352, 0362 SAISHO 0212, 0582, 0722, 0732, 0742, 0772 SALORA 0612, 0762 SAMSUNG 0212, 0312, 0922, 0962 SANKY 0472, 0512 SANSUI 0292, 0542, 0832 SANYO 0242, 0612, 0842, 0902, 0922 SBR 0002, 0282 SCHEIDER 0852 SCOTT 0342, 0712, 0762, 0872, 0882, 0892 SEARS 0302, 0592, 0602, 0612, 0682, 0692, 0842, 0902, 0912, 0932 SHARP 0402, 0472 SHINTOM 0852 SHOGUN 0922 SINGER 0852 SONY 0032, 0332, 0352, 0362, 0672, 0792, 0932 STS 0602 SUNPAK 0352 SYLVANIA 0002, 0492, 0502, 0762, 0932, 0992 SYMPHONIC 0992 TANDY 0992 TASHIKO 0712, 0992 DVD PLAYER AKAI DENON HITACHI JVC (VICTOR) KENWOOD MAGNAVOX MITSUBISHI ONKYO PANASONIC PHILIPS PIONEER PROSCAN RCA SAMSUNG SHARP SONY TECHNICS THOMSON TOSHIBA YAMAHA ZENITH 0058 0188 0198 0088, 0178 0148 0128 0138 0068, 0128 0028 0098, 0128 0108, 0118 0158 0158 0078 0038 0018 0028 0168 0048, 0128 0008, 0028, 0098 0128 LD PLAYER AIWA 0157 DENON 0147 DISCO VISION 0017 FUNAI 0157 HITACHI (E) 0017 KENWOOD 0087, 0107 MAGNAVOX 0027 MARANTZ 0027 MITSUBISHI 0137 NAD 0137 PANASONIC 0077, 0177 PHILIPS 0027 PIONEER 0017, 0037, 0137 RCA 0167 REALISTIC 0157 SHARP 0127 SONY 0047, 0057, 0117 VICTOR 0097 YAMAHA 0007, 0067 REALISTIC CD PLAYER ACOUSTIC RESEARCH 1295 ADC 0025, 0065 ADCOM 0205, 0255, 1015 ADS 0265 AIWA 0295, 0945, 1035, 1055 AKAI 0175, 0485, 0535 ALPINE 1215, 1305 AUDIO-TECHNICA 0545 BSR 0245, 0655, 0775 CALIFORNIA AUDIO LAB 0055 CAPETRONIC 1205 CARRERA 0245 CARVER 0285, 1135 CASIO 0345 CROWN 0185 CURTIS MATHES 0345 DENON 0275, 0875, 0885 DEUAL (E) 0505 DYNAMIC BASS (H) 0555 EMERSON 0205, 0325, 1105 EROICA 1275 FISHER 0095, 0555, 0925, 1005 GARRARD 0365 GENEXXA 0305, 0325, 1105 GOLDSTAR 1135, 1225, 1265, 1335 HARMAN/KARDON 0105, 0175, 0465, 0995 HITACHI 0195, 0205, 0505, 0815 INKEL 0115, 0395 JVC (VICTOR) 0315 KENWOOD 0045, 0095, 0405, 0585, 0725, 0735, 0745, 0755, 0895 KYOCERA 0025 LUXMAN 0075, 0425, 0675, 0705, 0715, 0985 MAGNAVOX 0165, 0215, 0645, 0955 MARANTZ 0215, 0235, 0375, 0785, 1345 MCINTOSH 0355, 1085 MCS 0905, 1315 MEMOREX 0205, 0225, 0235, 0305, 0325, 1105 MGA 0135 MISSION 0215 MITSUBISHI 0135, 0445 MTC 1255 NAD 0035, 0615, 0685, 0695 NAKAMICHI 0125, 0435, 0515 NEC 0255, 0905, 0965 NIKKO 0545, 1005 ONKYO 0155, 0455, 0495, 0805, 1155 OPTIMUS 0225, 0245, 0555, 0595, 0845, 0855, 0865, 0895, 0935 PANASONIC 0055, 0825, 1095, 1125 PENNY 0905 PHILIPS 0165, 0215 PIONEER 0305, 0935, 1045 PROTON 0215, 1185 QUASAR 0055 RCA 0205, 0915, 1115 0205, 0225, 0235, 0325, 0555, 0845 REVOX 1175 ROTEL 0215 SABA TELECOMMANDER (E) 0505 SAE 0215 SAMSUNG 1285 SANSUI 0215, 0625, 0975, 1025, 1105 SANYO 0145, 0555, 0635, 0765 SCOTT 0325, 1105 SEARS 0345 SHARP 0235, 0665, 0895, 1065, 1075 SHERWOOD 0115, 0235, 0395, 0475 SIEMENTS GARRARD 1245 SIGNATURE 0175 SONTEC 1165 SONY 0065, 0565, 0865, 1145 STARON 1235 STS 0025 SYLVANIA 0215 SYMPHONIC 0335 TANDY 0305 TANGBERG 1195 TEAC 0235, 0335, 0385, 0525, 0795, 0835, 1355 TECHNICS 0055, 0605, 1095 TECHWOOD 1325 TELEFUNKEN (E) 0505 THOMSON (E) 0505 TOSHIBA 0035, 0685 VECTOR RESEARCH 0065, 1135 WARDS 0175 YAMAHA 0005, 0015, 0085, 0415, 0545, 0575, 1065 CD RECORDER/CDRW HITACHI JVC (VICTOR) MARANTZ PHILIPS PIONEER YAMAHA 0474 0504 0484, 0494 0444 0454, 0464 0414 MD RECORDER KENWOOD PIONEER SHARP SONY YAMAHA 0384 0424 0434 0394 0024, 0394, 0404 III 02V630_code(U) 3 12/27/01, 7:47 PM TAPE DECK AIWA AKAI CARVER DENON FISHER GARRARD JVC (VICTOR) KENWOOD MAGNAVOX MARANTZ MITSUBISHI OPTIMUS ONKYO PHILIPS PIONEER REVOX SANSUI SHARP SHERWOOD SONY TEAC TECHNICS WARDS YAMAHA 0094, 0214, 0224 0184 0094 0304 0144 0194, 0204 0274, 0284, 0294 0124, 0134, 0154, 0234, 0244, 0264 0094 0094, 0344 0184 0034, 0064, 0204, 0334 0364, 0374 0094 0034, 0044, 0064 0354 0094, 0344 0264 0334 0054, 0084, 0324 0194, 0254 0074, 0314 0034 0004, 0014, 0104, 0114, 0164, 0174, 0264 IV 02V630_code(U) 4 12/27/01, 7:47 PM YAMAHA YAMAHA YAMAHA YAMAHA YAMAHA YAMAHA YAMAHA ELECTRONICS CORPORATION, USA 6660 ORANGETHORPE AVE., BUENA PARK, CALIF. 90620, U.S.A. CANADA MUSIC LTD. 135 MILNER AVE., SCARBOROUGH, ONTARIO M1S 3R1, CANADA ELECTRONIK EUROPA G.m.b.H. SIEMENSSTR. 22-34, 25462 RELLINGEN BEI HAMBURG, F.R. OF GERMANY ELECTRONIQUE FRANCE S.A. RUE AMBROISE CROIZAT BP70 CROISSY-BEAUBOURG 77312 MARNE-LA-VALLEE CEDEX02, FRANCE ELECTRONICS (UK) LTD. YAMAHA HOUSE, 200 RICKMANSWORTH ROAD WATFORD, HERTS WD1 7JS, ENGLAND SCANDINAVIA A.B. J A WETTERGRENS GATA 1, BOX 30053, 400 43 VÄSTRA FRÖLUNDA, SWEDEN MUSIC AUSTRALIA PTY, LTD. 17-33 MARKET ST., SOUTH MELBOURNE, 3205 VIC., AUSTRALIA 03V630(U)-cv4 1 Printed in Malaysia 12/27/01, 7:47 PM V874820